CP 105 - Ed. 2020

ANSI/ASNT CP-105-2020
ASNT STANDARD
2020
EDITION
TOPICAL OUTLINES FOR
QUALIFICATION OF
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
PERSONNEL
The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.

ASNT...Creating a Safer World!®
Copyright © 2020 by The American Society for Nondestructive Testing.
The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. (ASNT) is not responsible for the authenticity or accuracy of information
herein. Published opinions and statements do not necessarily reflect the opinion of ASNT. Products or services that are advertised
or mentioned do not carry the endorsement or recommendation of ASNT.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by means electronic or mechanical including
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the expressed prior written permission of The American Society for Nondestructive
Testing Inc.
IRRSP, NDT Handbook, The NDT Technician, and asnt.org are trademarks of The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.
ACCP, ASNT, Level III Study Guide, Materials Evaluation, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Research in Nondestructive
Evaluation, and RNDE are registered trademarks of The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.
First printing 05/20

ebook 05/20
Errata, if available for this printing, may be obtained from ASNT’s website, asnt.org. Ebooks contain all corrections and updates,
including the latest errata.
ISBN: 978-1-57117-471-0 (print)

ISBN: 978-1-57117-472-7 (ebook)
Printed in the United States of America
Published by:
1711 Arlingate Lane
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
asnt.org
Publications Team:
Toni Kervina, Director of Publications
Editorial:
Cynthia M. Leeman, Educational Materials Supervisor
Bob Conklin, Educational Materials Editor
Production:
Joy Grimm, Production Manager
Synthia Jester, Graphic Designer and Illustrator
ASNT Mission Statement:

ASNT exists to create a safer world by advancing scientific, engineering, and technical knowledge in the field of nondestructive
testing.
ASNT Code of Ethics:

The ASNT Code of Ethics was developed to provide members of the Society with broad ethical statements to guide their
professional lives. In spirit and in word, each ASNT member is responsible for knowing and adhering to the values and standards
set forth in the Society’s Code. More information, as well as the complete version of the Code of Ethics, can be found on ASNT’s
website, asnt.org.
ii
American National Standard

ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for
Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel
Secretariat
Approved November 7, 2019
American National Standards Institute
Abstract
This standard applies to personnel whose specific tasks or jobs require appropriate knowledge of the technical principles underlying non-
destructive testing (NDT) methods for which they have responsibilities within the scope of their employment. These specific tasks or jobs
include, but are not limited to, performing, specifying, reviewing, monitoring, supervising, and evaluating NDT work.
To the extent applicable to the standard set forth herein, The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. (ASNT) does not assume
the validity or invalidity, enforceability or unenforceability of patent rights, registered trademarks or copyrights in connection with any
item referred to in this standard, study materials, or examinations. Users of this standard, study materials, or examinations are further
cautioned and expressly advised that determination of the validity or enforceability of any such patent rights, trademarks, or copyrights,
and the risk of the infringement of such rights through misuse of protected materials are the responsibility of the user. Reference to or pic-
torial depiction of specific types of products or equipment are for purposes of illustration only and do not represent the endorsement of
such products or equipment by ASNT.
Employers or other persons utilizing nondestructive testing services are cautioned that they retain full responsibility for ultimate determi-
nation of the qualifications of NDT personnel and for the certification process. The process of personnel qualification and certification as
detailed in the standard does not relieve the employer of the ultimate legal responsibility to ensure that the NDT personnel are fully quali-
fied for the tasks being undertaken.
This standard is subject to revision or withdrawal at any time by ASNT.
iii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
American National Standard Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSI that the requirements for due
process, consensus, and other criteria for approval have been met by the standards developer.
Consensus is established when, in the judgment of the ANSI Board of Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by
directly and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity.
Consensus requires that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their existence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they
have approved the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing or using products, processes, or products not conforming
to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and will in no circumstances give an interpretation of any
American National Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue an interpretation of an American National
Standard in the name of the American National Standards Institute.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American
National Standards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise, or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of
American National Standards may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the American National Standards
Institute.
iv
FOREWORD
(This foreword is not part of American National Standard CP-105-2020.)
An essential element in the effectiveness of nondestructive testing (NDT) is the qualification of the personnel who are responsible for and
who perform nondestructive testing. Formal training is an important and necessary element in acquiring the skills necessary to effectively
perform nondestructive tests.
The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. (ASNT) has, therefore, undertaken the preparation and publication of this standard,
which specifies the body of knowledge to be used as part of a training program qualifying and certifying NDT personnel.
In 2018 ASNT accepted the ASTM E1316 definitions of calibration and standardization for use in its publications. These terms are used as
follows:
l Calibration is the comparison (which may include adjustment) of a test instrument to a known reference that is normally traceable to
some recognized authority (e.g., NIST). Calibration is typically performed by an organization considered qualified to do so (e.g., an
accredited laboratory, or in some cases, the instrument manufacturer) at a determined, periodic interval. Calibration of electronic
instrumentation typically involves verification of the linearity of the instrument’s response over its usable range.
l Standardization is typically completed prior to performing an NDT test, and may also be performed at times during the performance
of the test and at the completion of the test as a validation of proper instrument operation. It is the adjustment of an NDT instrument
using a reference standard (that contains a known condition) to obtain or establish a known and reproducible response.
ASNT CP-105: ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel was initially processed and approved
for submittal to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) by the ASNT Standards Development Committee. This revision was
processed by the ASNT Standards Development Committee. Committee approval of the standard does not necessarily imply that all com-
mittee members voted for its approval. At the time it approved this standard, the Standards Development Committee had the following
members:
Michael E. McDaniel, Chair

Ronald T. Nisbet, Vice Chair
Brian D. Frye, Secretary, Ex-Officio
James Bennett, Ex-Officio
James Gerry Churchwell
Paul E. Deeds, Jr.
Darrell W. Harris
Raymond G. Morasse
Michael J. Ruddy
Henry M. Stephens, Jr.
Marvin W. Trimm
Michael L. Turnbow
David H. Vaughn
v
The outlines contained in this American National Standard were approved by the ASNT Technical and Education (T&E) Council through
its method committees. At the time the standard was approved, the T&E Council, Methods Division had the following members:
Methods Division Ground Penetrating Radar Leak Testing Committee

David G. Moore, Chair Committee Mark A. Johnson, Chair
Kurt J. Steinhagen, Chair Anthony J. Heinz, Vice Chair
Acoustic Emission Committee Sreenivas Alampalli Michael J. Bolton
Lawrence W. Gill, Chair James Althauser Edward J. Briggs
Gerard Hacker, Vice Chair Juan Jose Bohorquez Benjamin Brown
Claudio Allevato Michael J. Diaz Travis Dreyfoos
Athanasio Anastasopoulos Peter G. Masters Gary R. Elder
Fadi Basma Raymond G. Morasse Darrell W. Harris
Mark F. Carlos Ricky L. Morgan Dietmar F. Henning
B. Boro Djordjevic David M. Kuhn
Jason Dong Guided Wave Testing Committee Brian D. Laite
John C. Duke, Jr. Jason K. Van Velsor, Chair Janice L. Mather
Valery F. Godinez-Azcuaga Michael J. Quarry, Vice Chair Michael V. McGloin
Richard S. Gostautas David Alleyne Kane M. Mordaunt
Antonios Kontsos David R. Bajula Venkat N. Ramani
David E. Kosnik Fadi Basma Todd E. Sellmer
Margarit G. Lozev John Z. Chen Paul B. Shaw
James R. Mitchell David R. Dechene Greg Sides
Gang Qi Nat Y. Faransso Vijay Srinivasan
Gordon L. Schneider Jimmy Fong Donald J. Trapp
Hermann Schubert Huidong Gao
Terry Tamutus Zeki Cosku Gokce Magnetic Flux Leakage Committee
Samuel J. Ternowchek Robert Gordon Timothy Scott Roach, Chair
James L. Walker II Paul Jackson Russell W. Pack, Vice Chair
Danny L. Keck Martin T. Anderson
Electromagnetics Committee Matt Kidd David R. Bajula
Antionette Y. Bailey, Chair Doron Kishoni David R. Blosser
Michael C. Smith, Vice Chair Glenn M. Light Joseph R. Clasen
Albert S. Birks Kevinn James Morgan William Duke
Michael C. Brown Michael J. Murray Darrell W. Harris
James R. Cahill Ronald Thomas Nisbet Max Harrisson
Robert E. Cameron Kevin Robert Ostergren Danny L. Keck
James E. Cox Peter Rosencranz Brock Mackin
Claude D. Davis Allen Edward Schuele Joseph L. Mackin
Guenther Dinold Dirk Schumann Chris L. Pankratz
Darrell W. Harris Mike J. Sternik Hussein Sadek
Xiaowei He Mauricio Vargas Ram P. Samy
Gary E. Heath Sergey Vinogradov Richard E. Schram
William G. Hoffmann Ke Wang
Bharath Kumar Kodumuru Terry M. Webb Magnetic Particle/Liquid Penetrant
Martin C. Lugg Committee
John A. Markanich Laser Methods Committee Lisa M. Price-Bruemmer, Secretary
Michael J. Ruddy John W. Newman, Chair Tracy L. Alger
Ward D. Rummel Bennett Feferman, Vice Chair Raymond D. Berry III
David E. Russell Flynn Spears, Secretary Michael J. Bolton
Hussein M. Sadek Fadi Basma Richard A. Bordelon
Michael C. Smith Michael R. Collingwood Lisa Brasche
Roderic K. Stanley Matt Crompton John C. Brausch
Ankit Vajpayee Edgardo D. Ferrer Marc Breit
Andrew P. Washabaugh Roger Gregory Gina R. Caudill
Paul J. Kulowitch Brenda L. Collins
Thorsten Siebert Paulla J. Daily
Terry R. Tamberg Claude D. Davis
Andreas Welz Charles W. Eick
Nat Y. Faransso
vi
Parrish A. Furr Penetrating Radiation Committee Philip E. Fish
David Geis Michael V. McGloin, Chair Jerry Fulin
Samuel C. Heller III Lance K. Armistead, Vice Chair Parrish A. Furr
Eric D. Henry Bryan K. Shumway, Secretary Michael Gardner
Lisa Henry John P. Barton Matthew J. Golis
Steve L. Herfurth Hassina Bilheux Amos E. Holt
George M. Hopman Richard H. Bossi Morteza K. Jafari
Bruce G. Isaacson Edward J. Briggs Danny L. Keck
Bradley S. Kienlen David L. Culbertson John J. Kinsey
Akin Arif Koksal John P. Ellegood Brian D. Laite
Douglas G. Krauss Nat Y. Faransso Glenn M. Light
James A. Kretzler Robert A. Feole Eric A. Lindgren
Brian D. Laite Trey Gordon John A. Long
Thomas J. Larkin Darrell W. Harris Joseph L. Mackin
Brock Mackin David P. Harvey David A. Mandina
Joseph L. Mackin George Kenneth Hodges Thomas E. McConomy
James A. MacMillan Edward Jimenez Michael A. McKinley
Arnold G. Marquez Danny L. Keck Scott D. Miller
Eugene G. Miller Bradley S. Kienlen Billy G. Musgraves
Douglas C. Miskell Claudia V. Kropas-Hughes Ronald T. Nisbet
David G. Moore Kevin L. McClain Luis Alfredo Payano
William E. Mooz Scott McClain Robert F. Plumstead
Ronald D. Mosburg David G. Moore Mark R. Pompe
Thomas A. Mullen Thomas A. Mullen Jay C. Richardson
Ciji L. Nelson Robert F. Plumstead Scott D. Ritzheimer
Kaylie Page James E. Prindiville Robert L. Saunders
Jonathan Pasqua Kyle D. Stoll Simon D. Senibi
Luis Alfredo Payano Kyle R. Thompson Andrew D. Smith
Peter E. Pelayo Jeffrey T. Wiswesser Graham H. Thomas
Robert F. Plumstead Brad S. Whiteleather
Thermal/Infrared Testing
William C. Plumstead, Jr. Andrew J. Woodrow
Committee
Juan Carlos Ruiz-Rico
L. Terry Clausing, Chair Vibration Analysis Committee
Ward D. Rummel
Albert A. Ohliger, Vice Chair Kenneth Starry, Chair
Richard I. Seals
Daniel R. Ryan, Secretary Edward F. Nolte III, Vice Chair
Robert Siegel
James Gerry Churchwell James Bricco
James J. Sieger, Jr.
Devon D. Clausing Keith A. Evans
Ivan S. Tenev
Tyler Holmes Frederick M. Gallardo
Lorie Walter
Gary Orlove Brian Graney
Kevin D. Woloszyk
Steven M. Shepard Gregory Lee
Microwave Committee Robert Miller
Ultrasonics Committee
Robert J. Woodward, Chair Albert A. Ohliger
Doron Kishoni, Chair
Jack R. Little Jr., Vice Chair Michael Sigley
Ricky L. Morgan, Vice Chair
Jacques L. Brignac
David Alleyne Visual Testing Committee
Joseph T. Case
David R. Bajula Dietmar F. Henning, Chair
William A. Ellingson
Yoseph Bar-Cohen Bruce G. Crouse, Vice Chair
Ryan Goitia
John A. Brunk Russell W. Pack, Secretary
Brian J. Gray
James R. Cahill Michael W. Allgaier
Shant Kenderian
Eugene J. Chemma Nat Y. Faransso
James Knowles
Andriy M. Chertov Richard C. Hooper
Jouni Koivumaki
Thomas N. Claytor Joseph L. Mackin
Donald McNicol
Claude D. Davis Walter R. Matulewicz
Ken Murphy
B. Boro Djordjevic David J. Vigne
William Neyer
Josh de Monbrun
Prakash B. Pahilajani
David R. Dechene
Karl F. Schmidt, Jr.
Robert D. Dille
Robin Sloan
James B. Elder III
Marvin W. Trimm
Louis J. Elliott
Larry Weigel
Nat Y. Faransso
vii
viii
CONTENTS
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

FOREWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
SUMMARY OF CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Acoustic Emission Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Acoustic Emission Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Acoustic Emission Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Acoustic Emission Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Electromagnetic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Alternating Current Field Measurement Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Alternating Current Field Measurement Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Eddy Current Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Eddy Current Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Remote Field Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Remote Field Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electromagnetic Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electromagnetic Testing Method, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Ground Penetrating Radar Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Ground Penetrating Radar Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ground Penetrating Radar Level lI Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ground Penetrating Radar Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ground Penetrating Radar Method, Level I, II, and III Training References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Guided Wave Testing Topical Outlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Guided Wave Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Guided Wave Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Guided Wave Testing Level III Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Guided Wave Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Laser Methods Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Laser Methods Testing – Holography/Shearography Level I Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Holography/Shearography Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Holography/Shearography Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Holography/Shearography Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ix
Leak Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Fundamentals in Leak Testing Course. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Leak Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Leak Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Leak Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Liquid Penetrant Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Liquid Penetrant Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liquid Penetrant Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liquid Penetrant Testing Level III Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liquid Penetrant Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Magnetic Particle Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Magnetic Particle Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Magnetic Particle Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Magnetic Particle Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Magnetic Particle Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Microwave Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Microwave Technology Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Microwave Technology Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Microwave Technology Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Microwave Technology Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Neutron Radiographic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Neutron Radiographic Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Neutron Radiographic Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Neutron Radiographic Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Neutron Radiographic Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Radiographic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Radiographic Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Radiographic Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Computed Radiography Level I Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Computed Radiography Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Computed Tomography Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Computed Tomography Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Digital Radiography Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Digital Radiography Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Radiographic Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Radiographic Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Limited Certification for Radiographic Film Interpretation Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
x
Contents
Radiographic Technique Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Film Quality and Manufacturing Processes Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Radiographic Evaluation and Interpretation Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Thermal/Infrared Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Thermal/Infrared Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Thermal/Infrared Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Thermal/Infrared Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Thermal/Infrared Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ultrasonic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Ultrasonic Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Ultrasonic Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Full Matrix Capture Ultrasonic Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Time of Flight Diffraction Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ultrasonic Testing Level III Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Ultrasonic Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Limited Certification for Ultrasonic Digital Thickness Measurement Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Limited Certification for Ultrasonic A-scan Thickness Measurement Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Vibration Analysis Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Vibration Analysis Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Vibration Analysis Level II Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Vibration Analysis Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Vibration Analysis, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Visual Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Visual Testing Level I Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Visual Testing Level II Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Visual Testing Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Visual Testing, Level I, II, and III Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Basic Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Basic Examination Level III Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Basic Examination Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Predictive Maintenance Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

PdM Basic Examination Level III Topical Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Basics of Common PdM Methods Training References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Appendix A. Radiographic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Radiographic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
xi
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
CP-105 2020 Edition
1. Where applicable in each outline, new terms “Calibration” and “Standardization,” adopted from ASTM E1316, have been used. For
definitions of these terms, refer to either SNT-TC-1A (2020) or CP-189 (2020).
2. Throughout all applicable outlines, “gages” was changed to “gauges.”
3. Throughout all applicable outlines, “white light” was changed to “visible light.”
4. Throughout all applicable outlines, “black light” was changed to “UV light.”
Basic Acoustic Emission Technique Course

5. Page 4, paragraph 3.1, changed examples of “Guide-type standards” from “glossaries, calibration, etc.” to “glossaries, user manuals,
etc.”
Laser Methods Basic Operating Course — Measurement standardization

6. Page 28 paragraph 1.4.1, changed the mapping screen resolution from “part resolution” to “inspection area.”
7. Page 28 paragraph 1.4.2, clarified meaning by changing line to read “Accounting for shear vector when making measurements.”
8. Page 28 paragraph 1.4.3, changed “manual calibration” to “manual video scale and shear standardization.”
9. Page 28 paragraph 1.4.4., clarified meaning by changing “Spot projection calibration” to “Automatic video scale and shear
standardization via spot projection.”
10. Page 28, paragraph 1.4.5, changed “Recalibration requirements” to “Video scale and shear measurement limitations.”
Holography/Shearography Level III Topical Outline — Measurement standardization

11. Page 33, paragraph 2.5.1 changed the mapping screen resolution from “part resolution” to “inspection area.”
12. Page 33 paragraph 2.5.2, clarified meaning by changing “Accounting for shear vector” to “Accounting for shear vector when making
measurements.”
13. Page 33 paragraph 2.5.3, changed “Manual calibration” to “Manual video scale and shear standardization.”
14. Page 33 paragraph 2.5.4., clarified meaning by changing “Spot projection calibration” to “Automatic video scale and shear
standardization via spot projection.”
15. Page 33 paragraph 2.5.5, changed “Recalibration requirements” to “Video scale and shear measurement limitations.”
Ultrasonic Testing Topical Outlines

16. Pages 89–90, new content, Full Matrix Capture Ultrasonic Testing Level II Topical Outline.
Visual Testing Level II Topical Outline

17. Page 103, a new paragraph was added to the introduction explaining the need to cover both Level I and Level II topics.
xii
SCOPE
ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel

1.0 Scope
1.1 This standard establishes the minimum topical outline requirements for the qualification of nondestructive testing (NDT)
personnel.
1.2 This standard details the minimum training course content for NDT personnel.
1.3 The amount of time spent on each topic in each method should be determined by the NDT Level III and the applicable
certification document.
1.4 These topical outlines are progressive; i.e., consideration as Level I is based on satisfactory completion of the Level I training
course; consideration as Level II is based on satisfactory completion of both Level I and Level II training courses.
1.5 Topics in the outlines may be deleted or expanded to meet the employer’s specific applications or for limited certification, unless
stated otherwise by the applicable certification procedure or written practice.
1
2
AE
Acoustic Emission Testing Topical Outlines
Acoustic Emission Testing Level I Topical 1.3 Signal detection

Outlines 1.3.1 Threshold comparator
1.3.2 Units of threshold measurement
1.3.3 Sensitivity determined by gain and/or threshold
Basic Acoustic Emission Physics Course 1.4 Signal processing
1.4.1 Waveform characteristics
1.0 Principles of Acoustic Emission Testing (AE) 1.4.2 Discrimination techniques
1.1 Characteristics of acoustic emission 1.4.3 Distribution techniques
1.1.1 Continuous emission 1.5 Source location techniques
1.1.2 Burst emission 1.5.1 Single-channel location
1.1.3 Emission/signal levels and frequencies 1.5.2 Linear location
1.2 Sources of acoustic emission 1.5.3 Planar location
1.2.1 Sources in crystalline materials – introduction 1.5.4 Other location techniques
1.2.2 Sources in nonmetals – introduction 1.6 Acoustic emission test systems
1.2.3 Sources in composites – introduction 1.6.1 Single-channel systems
1.2.4 Other sources 1.6.2 Multi-channel systems
1.3 Wave propagation – introduction 1.6.3 Dedicated industrial systems
1.3.1 Wave velocity in materials 1.7 Accessory techniques
1.3.2 Attenuation 1.7.1 Audio indicators
1.3.3 Reflections, multiple paths 1.7.2 X-Y and strip-chart recording
1.3.4 Source input versus signal output 1.7.3 Oscilloscopes
1.4 Repeated loadings: Kaiser and Felicity effects and 1.7.4 Others
Felicity ratio
1.4.1 In metals 2.0 Acoustic Emission Test Techniques
1.4.2 In composites 2.1 Equipment standardization and setup for test
1.5 Terminology (refer to AE Glossary, ASTM E1316) 2.1.1 Standardization signal generation techniques
2.1.2 Standardization procedures
2.0 Sensing the AE Wave 2.1.3 Sensor placement
2.1 Sensors 2.1.4 Adjustment of equipment controls
2.1.1 Principles of operation 2.1.5 Discrimination technique adjustments
2.1.2 Construction 2.2 Loading procedures
2.1.3 Frequency 2.2.1 Type of loading
2.2 Sensor attachment 2.2.2 Maximum test load
2.2.1 Coupling materials 2.2.3 Load holds
2.2.2 Attachment devices 2.2.4 Repeated and programmed loadings
2.2.5 Rate of loading
Basic Acoustic Emission Technique Course 2.3 Data display
2.3.1 Selection of display mode
1.0 Instrumentation and Signal Processing 2.3.2 Use and reading of different kinds of display
1.1 Cables 2.4 Noise sources and pre-test identification techniques
1.1.1 Coaxial cable 2.4.1 Electromagnetic noise
1.1.2 Twisted pair cable 2.4.2 Mechanical noise
1.1.3 Noise problems in cables 2.5 Precautions against noise
1.1.4 Connectors 2.5.1 Electrical shielding
1.2 Signal conditioning 2.5.2 Electronic techniques
1.2.1 Preamplifiers 2.5.3 Prevention of movement
1.2.2 Amplifiers 2.5.4 Attenuating materials and applications
1.2.3 Filters
1.2.4 Units of gain measurement
3
2.6 Data interpretation and evaluation: introduction 1.2 Materials and deformation
2.6.1 Separating relevant acoustic emission indications 1.2.1 Constitution of crystalline and noncrystalline
from noise materials
2.6.2 Accept/reject techniques and evaluation criteria 1.2.2 Stress and strain
2.7 Reports 1.2.3 Elastic and plastic deformation; crack growth
2.7.1 Purpose 1.3 Sources of acoustic emission
2.7.2 Content and structure 1.3.1 Burst emission, continuous emission
1.3.2 Emission/signal levels, units of amplitude
3.0 Codes, Standards, and Procedures measurement
3.1 Guide-type standards (glossaries, user manuals, etc.) 1.3.3 Sources in crystalline materials
3.2 Standardized/codified acoustic emission test procedures 1.3.3.1 Dislocations – plastic deformation
3.3 User-developed test procedures 1.3.3.2 Phase transformations
1.3.3.3 Deformation twinning
4.0 Applications of AE (course should include at least three 1.3.3.4 Nonmetallic inclusions
categories from 4.1 and at least four categories from 4.2) 1.3.3.5 Subcritical crack growth
4.1 Laboratory studies (material characterization) 1.3.3.5.1 Subcritical crack growth under
4.1.1 Crack growth and fracture mechanics increasing load
4.1.2 Environmentally assisted cracking 1.3.3.5.2 Ductile tearing under increasing
4.1.3 Dislocation movement (metals) load
4.1.4 Clarifying deformation mechanisms (composites) 1.3.3.5.3 Fatigue crack initiation and
4.1.5 Phase transformation and phase stability growth
4.1.6 Creep 1.3.3.5.4 Hydrogen embrittlement
4.1.7 Residual stress cracking
4.1.8 Corrosion 1.3.3.5.5 Stress corrosion cracking
4.1.9 Fatigue 1.3.4 Sources in nonmetals
4.1.10 Rupture 1.3.4.1 Microcracking
4.1.11 Ductile/brittle transition 1.3.4.2 Gross cracking
4.1.12 Other material characterization applications 1.3.4.3 Crazing
4.2 Structural applications 1.3.4.4 Other sources in nonmetals
4.2.1 Pressure vessels (metal) 1.3.5 Sources in composites
4.2.2 Storage tanks (metal) 1.3.5.1 Fiber breakage
4.2.3 Pressure vessels/storage tanks (composite) 1.3.5.2 Matrix cracking
4.2.4 Piping and pipelines 1.3.5.3 Fiber-matrix debonding
4.2.5 Bucket trucks 1.3.5.4 Delamination
4.2.6 Aircraft 1.3.5.5 Fiber pull-out, relaxation
4.2.7 Bridges 1.3.5.6 Friction
4.2.8 Mines 1.3.6 Other sources
4.2.9 Dams, earthen slopes 1.3.6.1 Pressure leaks
4.2.10 Pumps, valves, etc. 1.3.6.2 Oxide and scale cracking
4.2.11 Rotating plant 1.3.6.3 Slag cracking
4.2.12 In-process weld monitoring 1.3.6.4 Frictional sources
4.2.13 Leak detection and monitoring 1.3.6.5 Liquefaction and solidification
4.2.14 Other structural applications 1.3.6.6 Loose parts, intermittent contact
1.3.6.7 Fluids and nonsolids
1.3.6.8 Crack closure
Acoustic Emission Testing Level II Topical 1.4 Wave propagation
Outline 1.4.1 Near-field impulse response
1.4.2 Modes of propagation
Acoustic Emission Physics Course 1.4.3 Mode conversion, reflection and refraction
1.4.4 Wave velocity in material
1.0 Principles of AE 1.4.5 Anisotropic propagation in composites
1.1 Characteristics of AE 1.4.6 Specimen geometry effects
1.1.1 Introductory concepts of source, propagation, 1.5 Attenuation
measurement, display, evaluation 1.5.1 Geometric attenuation
1.1.2 Relationships between AE and other NDT 1.5.2 Dispersion
methods 1.5.3 Scattering, diffraction
1.1.3 Significance of applied load in AE 1.5.4 Attenuation due to energy loss mechanisms
1.1.4 Basic math review (exponents, graphing, metric 1.5.5 Attenuation versus frequency
units)
4
1.6 Kaiser and Felicity effects, and Felicity ratio 1.6 Acoustic emission test systems
1.6.1 In metals 1.6.1 Single-channel systems
1.6.2 In composites 1.6.2 Multi-channel systems
1.6.3 In other materials 1.6.3 Dedicated industrial systems
1.7 Terminology (refer to AE Glossary, ASTM E1316) 1.7 Accessory techniques
1.7.1 Audio indicators
2.0 Sensing the AE Wave 1.7.2 X-Y and strip-chart recording
2.1 Transducing processes (piezoelectricity, etc.) 1.7.3 Oscilloscopes
2.2 Sensors 1.7.4 Magnetic recorders
2.2.1 Construction 1.7.5 Others
2.2.2 Conversion efficiencies 1.8 Advanced signal processing techniques
2.2.3 Standardization (sensitivity curve) 1.8.1 Signal definition
2.3 Sensor attachment 1.8.2 Signal capture
2.3.1 Coupling materials 1.8.3 Frequency analysis
2.3.2 Attachment devices 1.8.4 Pattern recognition
2.3.3 Waveguides
2.4 Sensor utilization 2.0 Acoustic Emission Test Techniques
2.4.1 Flat response sensors 2.1 Factors affecting test equipment selection
2.4.2 Resonant response sensors 2.1.1 Material being monitored
2.4.3 Integral-electronics sensors 2.1.2 Location and nature of emission
2.4.4 Special sensors (directional, mode responsive) 2.1.3 Type of information desired
2.4.5 Sensor selection 2.1.4 Size and shape of test part
2.2 Equipment standardization and setup for test
Acoustic Emission Technique Course 2.2.1 Standardization signal generation techniques
2.2.2 Standardization procedures
2.2.3 Sensor selection and placement
1.0 Instrumentation and Signal Processing
2.2.4 Adjustment of equipment controls
1.1 Cables
2.2.5 Discrimination technique adjustments
1.1.1 Coaxial cable
2.3 Loading procedures
1.1.2 Twisted pair cable
2.3.1 Type of loading
1.1.3 Optical fiber cable
2.3.2 Maximum test load
1.1.4 Noise problems in cables
2.3.3 Load holds
1.1.5 Impedance matching
2.3.4 Repeated and programmed loadings
1.1.6 Connectors
2.3.5 Rate of loading
1.2 Signal conditioning
2.4 Special test procedures
1.2.1 Preamplifiers
2.4.1 High temperature/low temperature tests
1.2.2 Amplifiers
2.4.2 Interrupted tests (including cyclic fatigue)
1.2.3 Filters
2.4.3 Long-term tests
1.2.4 Units of gain measurement
2.4.4 Tests in high noise environments
1.3 Signal detection
2.5 Data display
1.3.1 Threshold comparator
2.5.1 Selection of display mode
1.3.2 Units of threshold measurement
2.5.2 Use and reading of different kinds of display
1.3.3 Sensitivity determined by gain and/or threshold
2.6 Noise sources and pretest identification techniques
1.4 Signal processing
2.6.1 Electromagnetic noise
2.6.2 Mechanical noise
1.4.1.1 Amplitude analysis
2.7 Precautions against noise
1.4.1.2 Pulse duration analysis
2.7.1 Electrical shielding
1.4.1.3 Rise time analysis
2.7.2 Electronic techniques
1.4.1.4 Event and event rate processing
2.7.3 Prevention of movement
1.4.1.5 MARSE
2.7.4 Attenuating materials and applications
1.4.2 Discrimination techniques
2.8 Data interpretation
1.4.3 Distribution techniques
2.8.1 Recognizing noise in the recorded data
1.5 Source location techniques
2.8.2 Noise elimination by data filtering techniques
1.5.1 Single-channel location
2.8.3 Relevant and nonrelevant acoustic emission
1.5.2 Linear location
response
1.5.3 Planar location
2.9 Data evaluation
1.5.4 Other location techniques
2.9.1 Methods for ranking, grading, accepting/rejecting
2.9.2 Comparison with standardization signals
2.9.3 Source evaluation by complementary NDT methods
5
2.10 Reports 1.1.2.4 Factors that qualify/disqualify the use of

2.10.1 Purpose AE
2.10.2 Content and structure 1.1.3 Math review (exponents, logarithms, metric units,
conversions)
3.0 Codes, Standards, Procedures, and Societies 1.2 Materials and deformation
3.1 Guide-type standards (glossaries, user manuals, etc.) 1.2.1 Materials constitution
3.2 Standardized/codified AE procedures 1.2.1.1 Crystalline/noncrystalline
3.3 User-developed test procedures 1.2.1.2 Metals/composites/other
3.4 Societies active in acoustic emission 1.2.2 Stress and strain (including triaxial, residual,
thermal)
1.2.3 Elastic and plastic deformation; crack growth
4.0 Applications of AE (course should include at least three
1.2.4 Materials properties (strength, toughness, etc.)
categories from 4.1 and at least four categories from 4.2)
1.3 Sources of acoustic emission
4.1 Laboratory studies (material characterization)
1.3.1 Broadband nature of source spectra
4.1.1 Crack growth and fracture mechanics
1.3.2 Emission/signal levels, units of amplitude
4.1.2 Environmentally assisted cracking
measurement
4.1.3 Dislocation movement (metals)
1.3.3 Sources in crystalline materials
4.1.4 Clarifying deformation mechanisms (composites)
1.3.3.1 Dislocations – plastic deformation
4.1.5 Phase transformation and phase stability
1.3.3.2 Phase transformations
4.1.6 Creep
1.3.3.3 Deformation twinning
4.1.7 Residual stress
1.3.3.4 Nonmetallic inclusions
4.1.8 Corrosion
1.3.3.5 Subcritical crack growth
4.1.9 Fatigue
1.3.3.5.1 Subcritical crack growth under
4.1.10 Rupture
increasing load
4.1.11 Ductile/brittle transition
1.3.3.5.2 Ductile tearing under increasing
4.1.12 Other material characterization applications
load
4.2 Structural applications
1.3.3.5.3 Fatigue crack initiation and
4.2.1 Pressure vessels (metal)
growth
4.2.2 Storage tanks (metal)
1.3.3.5.4 Hydrogen embrittlement
4.2.3 Pressure vessels/storage tanks (composite)
cracking
4.2.4 Piping and pipelines
1.3.3.5.5 Stress corrosion cracking
4.2.5 Bucket trucks
1.3.4 Sources in nonmetals
4.2.6 Aircraft
1.3.4.1 Microcracking
4.2.7 Bridges
1.3.4.2 Gross cracking
4.2.8 Mines
1.3.4.3 Crazing
4.2.9 Dams, earthen slopes
1.3.4.4 Other sources in nonmetals
4.2.10 Pumps, valves, etc.
1.3.5 Sources in composites
4.2.11 Rotating plant
1.3.5.1 Fiber breakage
4.2.12 In-process weld monitoring
1.3.5.2 Matrix cracking
4.2.13 Leak detection and monitoring
1.3.5.3 Fiber-matrix debonding
4.2.14 Other structural applications
1.3.5.4 Delamination
1.3.5.5 Fiber pull-out, relaxation
Acoustic Emission Testing Level III Topical 1.3.5.6 Friction
Outline 1.3.6 Other sources
1.3.6.1 Pressure leaks; cavitation
1.0 Principles and Theory 1.3.6.2 Oxide and scale cracking
1.1 Characteristics of AE 1.3.6.3 Slag cracking
1.1.1 Concepts of source, propagation, loading, 1.3.6.4 Frictional sources
measurement, display, evaluation 1.3.6.5 Liquefaction and solidification
1.1.2 Proper selection of acoustic emission as technique 1.3.6.6 Loose parts, intermittent contact
of choice 1.3.6.7 Fluids and nonsolids
1.1.2.1 Differences between AE and other 1.3.6.8 Crack closure
techniques 1.3.6.9 Corrosion
1.1.2.2 Complementary roles of acoustic 1.4 Wave propagation
emission and other methods 1.4.1 Near-field impulse response
1.1.2.3 Potential or conflicting results between 1.4.2 Modes of propagation (including lamb waves)
methods 1.4.3 Mode conversion, reflection and refraction
6
Acoustic Emission
Acoustic Emission Testing Topical
Topical Outlines
1.4.4 Wave velocity in material (including velocity 2.6.5 Cables as transmission lines
dispersion) 2.6.6 Impedance matching
1.4.5 Anisotropic propagation in composites 2.6.7 Connectors
1.4.6 Specimen geometry effects 2.7 Signal conditioning
1.5 Attenuation 2.7.1 Preamplifiers (dynamic range, cable drive
1.5.1 Geometric attenuation capability, etc.)
1.5.2 Dispersion 2.7.2 Amplifiers
1.5.3 Scattering, diffraction 2.7.3 Filters: selection, roll-off rates
1.5.4 Effects of contained fluids 2.7.4 Units of gain measurement
1.5.5 Attenuation due to energy loss mechanisms 2.7.5 Electronic noise
1.5.6 Attenuation versus frequency 2.8 Signal detection
1.6 Kaiser and Felicity effects, and Felicity ratio 2.8.1 Threshold comparator
1.6.1 In metals 2.8.2 Units of threshold measurement
1.6.2 In composites 2.8.3 Sensitivity determined by gain and/or threshold
1.6.3 Emission during load holds 2.8.4 Use of floating threshold
1.7 Terminology (refer to AE Glossary, ASTM E1316) 2.8.5 Dead time
2.9 Signal processing
2.0 Equipment and Materials 2.9.1 Waveform characteristics
2.1 Transducing processes (piezoelectricity, etc.) 2.9.1.1 Amplitude
2.2 Sensors 2.9.1.2 Pulse duration
2.2.1 Construction 2.9.1.3 Rise time
2.2.1.1 Single-ended 2.9.1.4 Signal strength (MARSE)
2.2.1.2 Differential 2.9.1.5 Threshold crossing counts
2.2.1.3 Test environment considerations 2.9.1.6 Hit versus event processing
2.2.1.4 Wave mode sensitivity 2.10 Source location
2.2.2 Conversion efficiencies; temperature effects 2.10.1 Single-channel location
2.2.3 Calibration 2.10.2 Linear location
2.2.3.1 Methods and significance 2.10.3 Hit-sequence zonal location
2.2.3.2 Calculations from absolute sensitivity 2.10.4 Other location methods
curve 2.10.5 Guard channels and spatial filtering
2.2.4 Reciprocity 2.11 Advanced signal processing
2.3 Sensor attachment 2.11.1 Data filtering
2.3.1 Coupling materials: selection and effective use 2.11.2 Signal definition
2.3.2 Attachment devices 2.11.3 Signal capture
2.3.3 Waveguides: design considerations, effect on 2.11.4 Frequency analysis (fourier theorem, theory of
signal spectrum)
2.4 Sensor utilization 2.11.5 Pattern recognition
2.4.1 Flat response sensors 2.11.6 Source function determination by
2.4.2 Resonant response sensors deconvolution/Green’s function
2.4.3 Integral-electronics sensors 2.12 Acoustic emission test systems
2.4.4 Special sensors (directional, mode responsive, 2.12.1 Single-channel systems
accelerometers) 2.12.2 Multi-channel systems
2.4.5 Sensor selection 2.12.3 Dedicated industrial systems
2.5 Simulated AE sources 2.12.4 Interpreting and writing system specifications
2.5.1 Hsu-Nielsen source (lead break) 2.13 Accessory materials
2.5.2 Piezoelectric transducers and associated 2.13.1 Audio indicators
electronics 2.13.2 X-Y and strip-chart recording
2.5.3 Gas jet 2.13.3 Oscilloscopes
2.5.4 Other devices 2.13.4 Magnetic recorders
2.6 Cables 2.13.5 Computers and their use
2.6.1 Cable types 2.13.5.1 Operating systems
2.6.1.1 Coaxial 2.13.5.2 Data storage and transfer
2.6.1.2 Twisted pair 2.13.5.3 Data output
2.6.1.3 Multiscreened 2.13.6 Others
2.6.1.4 Optical 2.14 Factors affecting test equipment selection
2.6.1.5 Others 2.14.1 Material being monitored
2.6.2 Shielding and other factors governing cable 2.14.2 Location and nature of emission
selection 2.14.3 Type of information desired
2.6.3 Cable length effects 2.14.4 Size and shape of test part
2.6.4 Noise problems in cables
7
3.0 Techniques 4.2 Data evaluation

3.1 Equipment standardization and setup for test 4.2.1 Methods for ranking, grading, accepting/rejecting
3.1.1 Standardization signal generation techniques 4.2.2 Comparison with standardization signals
3.1.2 Standardization procedures 4.2.3 Source evaluation by complementary NDT
3.1.3 Sensor selection and placement methods
3.1.4 Adjustment of equipment controls 4.3 Reports
3.1.5 Discrimination technique adjustments 4.3.1 Purpose
3.2 Establishing loading procedures 4.3.2 Content and structure
3.2.1 Type of loading 4.3.3 Developing a standard report format
3.2.2 Maximum test load
3.2.3 Load holds 5.0 Procedures
3.2.4 Repeated and programmed loadings 5.1 Guide-type standards (glossaries, user manuals, etc.)
3.2.5 Rate of loading 5.2 Standardized/codified AE test procedures
3.3 Precautions against noise 5.3 User-developed test procedures
3.3.1 Noise identification 5.4 Societies active in AE
3.3.1.1 Electromagnetic noise 5.5 Interpretation of codes, standards, and procedures
3.3.1.2 Mechanical noise 5.6 Developing and writing AE test procedures
3.3.2 Noise elimination/discrimination before test 5.7 Training and examining Level I and II NDT personnel
3.3.2.1 Electrical shielding
3.3.2.2 Grounding
6.0 Safety and Health
3.3.2.3 Frequency filtering
6.1 Hazards associated with structural failure during test
3.3.2.4 Gain and/or threshold adjustment
6.2 Other hazards associated with AE
3.3.2.5 Floating threshold
6.3 Importance of local regulations
3.3.2.6 Attenuating materials and applications
3.3.2.7 Prevention of movement, friction
7.0 Applications
3.3.2.8 Guard channels, spatial filtering
7.1 Laboratory studies (material characterization)
3.3.2.9 Time-based and load-based gating
7.1.1 Crack growth and fracture mechanics
3.3.2.10 Discrimination based on waveform
7.1.2 Environmentally assisted cracking
characteristics
7.1.3 Dislocation movement (metals) (strain rate and
3.4 Special test procedures
volume effects)
3.4.1 High temperature/low temperature tests
7.1.4 Clarifying deformation mechanisms (composites)
3.4.2 Interrupted tests (including cyclic fatigue)
7.1.5 Phase transformation and phase stability
3.4.3 Long-term tests, permanent/continuous
7.1.6 Creep
monitoring
7.1.7 Residual stress
3.4.4 Tests in high noise environments
7.1.8 Corrosion
3.5 Data displays
7.1.9 Fatigue
3.5.1 Purpose and value of different displays
7.1.10 Rupture
3.5.1.1 Time-based and load-based plots
7.1.11 Ductile/brittle transition
3.5.1.2 Location displays
7.1.12 Other material characterization applications
3.5.1.3 Distribution functions
7.2 Structural applications
3.5.1.4 Crossplots
7.2.1 Pressure vessels (metal)
3.5.1.5 Other displays
7.2.2 Storage tanks (metal)
3.5.2 Selection of displays
7.2.3 Pressure vessels/storage tanks (composite)
7.2.4 Piping and pipelines
4.0 Interpretation and Evaluation
7.2.5 Bucket trucks
4.1 Data interpretation
7.2.6 Aircraft
4.1.1 Relevant and nonrelevant AE response
7.2.7 Bridges
4.1.2 Recognizing noise versus true AE in the recorded
7.2.8 Mines
data
7.2.9 Dams, earthen slopes
4.1.3 Distribution function analysis
7.2.10 Pumps, valves, etc.
4.1.4 Crossplot analysis
7.2.11 Rotating plant
4.1.5 Noise elimination – data filtering techniques
7.2.12 In-process weld monitoring
4.1.5.1 Spatial filtering
7.2.13 Leak detection and monitoring
4.1.5.2 Filtering on waveform characteristics
7.2.14 Other structural applications
4.1.5.3 Time-based and parametric-based
filtering
8
Acoustic Emission Testing, Level I, II, and Drouillard, T., 1979, Acoustic Emission: A Bibliography with
III Training References Abstracts, Plenum Press, New York.
AEWG, 1989, Journal of Acoustic Emission, Vol. 8, No. 1-2, Matthews, J.R., 1983, Acoustic Emission (Nondestructive Testing
Acoustic Emission Group, Encino, CA. Monographs and Tracts, Vol. 2), Gordon and Breach, Science
Publishers Inc., New York.
ASM,1989, ASM Handbook: Nondestructive Evaluation and
Quality Control, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.* Nicoll, A., 1980, Acoustic Emission, DGM Metallurgy
Informationsgesellschaft, Germany.
ASME, 2017, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, Articles 11
and 12, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, NY. Sachse, W., K. Yamaguchi, and J. Roget, eds., 1991, Acoustic
Emission: Current Practice and Future Directions, STP 1077,
ASNT, 2005, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 6: Acoustic American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
Emission Testing, third edition, American Society for
Nondestructive Testing Inc. Columbus, OH.* Spanner, J., and J. McElroy, 1975, Monitoring Structural Integrity
by Acoustic Emission, STP 571, American Society for Testing and
ASNT, 2008, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Acoustic Emission Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Columbus, OH.* Spanner, J.C., 1974, Acoustic Emissions: Techniques and
Applications, Intex Publishing Co, Evanston, IL.
ASTM, 2018, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03,
Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Testing and
* Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Materials, Philadelphia, PA. Inc., Columbus, OH.
Bingham, A., C. Ek, and J. Tanner, eds., 1992, Acoustic Emission
Testing of Aerial Devices and Associated Equipment Used in the
Utility Industries – STP 1139, American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, PA.
9
10
ET
Electromagnetic Testing Topical Outlines
Alternating Current Field Measurement Technique Course

Testing Level I Topical Outline
1.0 Alternating Current Field Measurement Theory
Theory Course 1.1 Production of uniform fields
1.2 Current flow, Bx, Bz, and By relationships
1.3 Relationship of the Bx, Bz, and butterfly plots
1.0 Introduction to Electromagnetic Testing (ET)
1.4 Other sources that influence the signals
1.1 Brief history of testing
1.2 Basic principles of NDT
2.0 Types of Probes
2.1 Coil arrangements
2.0 Electromagnetic Theory
2.1.1 Primary induction coil
2.1 Eddy current theory
2.1.2 Bx and By sensor coils
2.1.1 Generation of eddy currents by means of an
2.2 Coil factors (liftoff)
alternating current (AC) field
2.3 Theory of operation
2.1.2 Effects of fields created by eddy currents
2.4 Applications
2.1.3 Properties of eddy currents
2.5 Limitations
2.1.3.1 Travel in circular direction
2.6 Probe markings
2.1.3.2 Eddy current distribution
2.1.3.3 Effects of liftoff and geometry
3.0 Probe Software
2.1.3.4 Relationship of magnetic field in relation
3.1 Probe software versions and compatibility
to a current in a coil
3.2 Manufacturers’ sensitivity settings
2.1.3.5 Effects of permeability variations in
3.2.1 Gain
magnetic materials
3.2.2 Scalings
2.1.3.6 Effect of discontinuities
3.2.3 Relationship between gain and current settings
2.1.3.7 Relationship between frequency and depth
3.3 Sensitivity checks
of penetration
2.1.3.8 Standard depths of penetration
2.2 Flux leakage theory 4.0 Factors Affecting the Choice of Probes
2.2.1 Terminology and units 4.1 Type of part to be inspected
2.2.2 Principles of magnetization 4.2 Type of discontinuity to be inspected
2.2.2.1 B-H curve 4.3 Speed of testing required
2.2.2.2 Magnetic properties 4.4 Probable location of discontinuity
2.2.2.3 Magnetic fields
2.2.2.4 Magnetic permeability 5.0 Types of Hardware and Operating Software Applications
2.2.2.5 Factors affecting magnetic permeability 5.1 Choice of systems for specific applications
2.3 Basic electrical theory 5.2 Choice of software for specific applications
2.3.1 Basic units of electrical measurement 5.2.1 Depth and length sizing capabilities
2.3.2 Direct current circuits 5.2.2 Probe resolution
2.3.3 Ohm’s law 5.2.3 Coating thickness
2.3.4 Faraday’s law
2.3.5 Resistance 6.0 Scanning for Detection
2.3.6 Inductance 6.1 Initial setup
2.3.7 Magnetic effect of electrical currents 6.2 Setting position indicators
6.3 Probe orientation
6.4 Scanning speed
6.5 Scanning pattern for tubulars and pipes
6.6 Scanning pattern for linear sections
6.7 Scanning for transverse cracks
11
ANSI/ASNT CP-105-2020 l ET
7.0 Signal Interpretation Eddy Current Testing Level I Topical

7.1 Review of display format Outline
7.2 Detection and examination procedure
7.3 Crack signals – linear cracks, angled cracks, line contacts
and multiple cracks, transverse cracks
Theory Course
7.4 Other signal sources – liftoff, geometry, materials,
magnetism, edges, and corners 1.0 Introduction to Eddy Current Testing
1.1 Historical and developmental process
1.1.1 Founding fathers: Arago, Lenz, Faraday, Maxwell
Alternating Current Field Measurement 1.1.2 Advances in electronics
Testing Level II Topical Outline 1.2 Basic physics and controlling principles
1.2.1 Varying magnetic fields
Principles Course 1.2.2 Electromagnetic induction
1.2.3 Primary and secondary force relationships
1.0 Review of Electromagnetic Theory
1.2 Alternating current field measurement theory
2.1.1 Generation of eddy currents by means of an AC
1.3 Types of alternating current field measurement sensing
field
probes
2.1.2 Effect of fields created by eddy currents
(impedance changes)
2.0 Factors that Affect Depth of Penetration
2.1.3 Effect of change of impedance on instrumentation
2.1 Conductivity
2.1.4 Properties of eddy current
2.2 Permeability
2.1.4.1 Travel in circular direction
2.3 Frequency
2.1.4.2 Strongest on surface of test material
2.4 Coil size
2.1.4.3 Zero value at center of solid conductor
placed in an alternating magnetic field
3.0 Factors that Affect Alternating Current Field Measurement 2.1.4.4 Strength, time relationship, and
Testing orientation as functions of test-system
3.1 Residual fields parameters and test-part characteristics
3.2 Defect geometry 2.1.4.5 Small magnitude of current flow
3.3 Defect location: scanning pattern for attachments, 2.1.4.6 Relationships of frequency and phase
corners, and ratholes 2.1.4.7 Electrical effects, conductivity of
3.4 Defect orientation materials
3.5 Distance between adjacent defects 2.1.4.8 Magnetic effects, permeability of
materials
Techniques and Applications Course 2.1.4.9 Geometrical effects
1.0 Software Commands 3.0 Lab Demonstration

1.1 Probe file production 3.1 Generation of Z-curves with conductivity samples
1.1.1 Selection of gain and frequency settings for 3.2 Generation of liftoff curves
specific applications
1.1.2 Selection of current for specific applications Basic Technique Course
1.1.3 Selections of sensitivity settings and scalings for
specific applications
1.0 Types of Eddy Current Sensing Elements
1.2 Standardization settings
1.1 Probes
1.2.1 Alarm settings
1.1.1 Types of arrangements
1.2.2 Butterfly plot scalings
1.1.1.1 Probe coils
1.3 Adjustment of communication rates
1.1.1.2 Encircling coils
1.1.1.3 Inside coils
2.0 User Standards and Operating Procedures 1.1.2 Modes of operation
2.1 Explanation of standards applicable to alternating 1.1.2.1 Absolute
current field measurement testing 1.1.2.2 Differential
2.2 Explanation of operating procedures applicable to 1.1.2.3 Hybrids
alternating current field measurement testing 1.1.3 Theory of operation
1.1.4 Hall effect sensors
1.1.4.1 Theory of operation
1.1.4.2 Differences between coil and hall-element
systems
12
1.1.5 Applications 2.2 Test system

1.1.5.1 Measurement of material properties 2.2.1 Frequency
1.1.5.2 Flaw detection 2.2.2 Coupling
1.1.5.3 Geometrical features 2.2.3 Field strength
1.1.6 Advantages 2.2.4 Test coil and shape
1.1.7 Limitations 2.2.5 Hall elements
1.2 Factors affecting choice of sensing elements
1.2.1 Type of part to be inspected 3.0 Signal-to-Noise Ratio
1.2.2 Type of discontinuity to be detected 3.1 Definition
1.2.3 Speed of testing required 3.2 Relationship to eddy current testing
1.2.4 Amount of testing (percentage) required 3.3 Methods of improving signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
1.2.5 Probable location of discontinuity
4.0 Selection of Test Frequency
2.0 Selection of Inspection Parameters 4.1 Relationship of frequency to type of test
2.1 Frequency 4.2 Considerations affecting choice of test
2.2 Coil drive: current/voltage 4.2.1 SNR
2.3 Hall element drive: current/voltage 4.2.2 Causes of noise
2.4 Channel gain 4.2.3 Methods to reduce noise
2.5 Display sensitivity selections 4.2.3.1 DC saturation
2.6 Standardization 4.2.3.2 Shielding
2.7 Filtering 4.2.3.3 Grounding
2.8 Thresholds 4.2.4 Phase discrimination
4.2.5 Response speed
3.0 Readout Mechanisms 4.2.6 Skin effect
3.1 Calibrated or uncalibrated meters
3.2 Impedance plane displays 5.0 Coupling
3.2.1 Analog 5.1 Fill factor
3.2.2 Digital 5.2 Liftoff
3.3 Data recording systems
3.4 Alarms, lights, etc. 6.0 Field Strength and its Selection
3.5 Numerical readouts 6.1 Permeability changes
3.6 Marking systems 6.2 Saturation
3.7 Sorting gates and tables 6.3 Effect of AC field strength on eddy current testing
3.8 Cutoff saw or shears
3.9 Automation and feedback 7.0 Instrument Design Considerations
7.1 Amplification
4.0 Lab Demonstration 7.2 Phase detection
4.1 Demo filter effects on rotating reference standards 7.3 Differentiation of filtering
4.2 Demo liftoff effects
4.3 Demo frequency effects
4.4 Demo rotational and forward speed effects
Techniques and Applications Course
4.5 Generate a Z-curve with conductivity standards
1.0 User Standards and Operating Procedures
1.1 Explanation of standards and specifications used in eddy
Eddy Current Testing Level II Topical current testing
Outline
2.0 Inspection System Output
Principles Course 2.1 Accept/reject criteria
2.1.1 Sorting, go/no-go
1.0 Review of Electromagnetic Theory 2.2 Signal classification processes
1.1 Eddy current theory 2.2.1 Discontinuity
1.2 Types of eddy current sensing probes 2.2.2 Flaw
2.3 Detection of signals of interest
2.3.1 Near surface
2.0 Factors that Affect Coil Impedance
2.3.2 Far surface
2.1 Test part
2.4 Flaw sizing techniques
2.1.1 Conductivity
2.4.1 Phase to depth
2.1.2 Permeability
2.4.2 Volts to depth
2.1.3 Mass
2.5 Calculation of flaw frequency
2.1.4 Homogeneity
13
2.6 Sorting for properties related to conductivity 1.1.4.3 External and through-transmission
2.7 Thickness evaluation probes
2.8 Measurement of ferromagnetic properties 1.1.5 Advantages
2.8.1 Comparative circuits 1.1.5.1 Equal sensitivity to internal and external
flaws
1.1.5.2 Easy to understand: increasing depth of
Remote Field Testing Level I Topical flaw signals rotate CCW
Outline 1.1.6 Limitations
1.1.6.1 Speed
Theory Course 1.1.6.2 Difficult to differentiate internal versus
external flaws
1.1.6.3 Small signals from small volume flaws
1.0 Introduction to Remote Field Testing (RFT)
1.1.6.4 Finned tubes
1.1 Historical and developmental process
1.2 Factors affecting choice of probe type
1.1.1 Founding fathers: McLean, Schmidt, Atherton,
1.2.1 Differential for small volume flaws (e.g., pits)
and Lord
1.2.2 Absolute for large area defects (e.g., steam
1.1.2 The computer age and its effect on the
erosion, fretting)
advancement of RFT
1.2.3 Test (probe travel) speed
1.2 Basic physics and controlling principles
1.2.4 Single versus dual exciters and areas of reduced
1.2.1 Varying magnetic fields
sensitivity
1.2.2 Electromagnetic induction
1.2.5 Bobbin coils and solid-state sensors
1.2.3 Primary and secondary field relationships
1.2.6 Finned tubes
2.0 Selection of Inspection Parameters
2.1 Generation of eddy currents in conductors
2.1 Frequency
2.2 Eddy current propagation and decay, standard depth of
2.2 Coil drive: current/voltage
penetration
2.3 Pre-amp gain
2.3 Near field, transition, and remote field zones
2.4 Display gain
2.4 Properties of remote field eddy currents
2.5 Standardization
2.4.1 Through-transmission nature
2.4.2 Magnetic flux is predominant energy
2.4.3 The ferrous tube as a waveguide 3.0 Readout Mechanisms
2.4.4 Strength of field in three zones 3.1 Display types:
2.4.5 External field is source of energy in remote field 3.1.1 RFT voltage plane displays
2.4.6 Factors affecting phase lag and amplitude 3.1.2 Voltage vector displays
2.4.7 Geometric factors: fill factor, external support 3.2 RFT reference curve
plates, tube sheets 3.3 Chart recordings
2.4.8 Speed of test, relationship to thickness, frequency, 3.4 Odometers
conductivity, and permeability 3.5 Storing and recalling data on computers
2.4.9 Effect of deposits, magnetite, copper, calcium
2.4.10 RFT in nonferrous tubes Principles Course
Basic Technique Course 1.0 Review of Electromagnetic Theory

1.1 RFT theory
1.0 Types of Remote Field Sensing Elements 1.2 Types of RFT sensing probes
1.1 Probes
1.1.1 Types of arrangements 2.0 Factors that Affect Coil Impedance
1.1.1.1 Absolute bobbin coils 2.1 Test part
1.1.1.2 Differential bobbin coils 2.1.1 Conductivity
1.1.1.3 Arrays 2.1.2 Permeability
1.1.2 Modes of operation 2.1.3 Mass
1.1.2.1 RFT voltage plane and reference curve 2.1.4 Homogeneity
1.1.2.2 X-Y voltage plane 2.2 Test system
1.1.2.3 Chart recordings 2.2.1 Frequency
1.1.3 Theory of operation 2.2.2 Coupling (fill factor)
1.1.4 Applications 2.2.3 Field strength (drive volts, frequency)
1.1.4.1 Heat exchanger and boiler tubes 2.2.4 Coil shapes
1.1.4.2 Pipes and pipelines
14
3.0 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 1.2.3 Chart recordings

3.1 Definition 1.2.4 Storing, retrieving, archiving data
3.2 Relationship to RFT 1.2.5 Standardization frequency
3.3 Methods of improving SNR 1.3 Reference standards
3.3.1 Speed 1.3.1 Material
3.3.2 Fill factor 1.3.2 Thickness
3.3.3 Frequency 1.3.3 Size
3.3.4 Filters 1.3.4 Heat treatment
3.3.5 Drive 1.3.5 Simulated defects
3.3.6 Shielding 1.3.6 ASTM E2096
3.3.7 Grounding (3.3.6 and 3.3.7 also apply to other 1.3.7 How often to standardize
methods)
2.0 Techniques
4.0 Selection of Test Frequency 2.1 Factors affecting signals
4.1 Relationship of frequency to depth of penetration 2.1.1 Probe speed/smoothness of travel
4.2 Relationship of frequency to resolution 2.1.2 Depth, width, and length of flaw versus probe
4.3 Dual-frequency operation footprint
4.4 Beat frequencies 2.1.3 Probe drive, pre-amp gain, view gain, filters
4.5 Optimum frequency 2.1.4 Position of flaw versus other objects (e.g., support
plates)
5.0 Coupling 2.1.5 Fill factor
5.1 Fill factor 2.1.6 SNR
5.2 Importance of centralizing the probe 2.1.7 Thickness, conductivity, and permeability of the
tube
6.0 Field Strength 2.1.8 Correct display of the signal
6.1 Probe drive and penetration 2.2 Selection of test frequencies
6.2 Effect of increasing thickness, conductivity or 2.2.1 Single or dual or multi-frequency
permeability 2.2.2 Sharing the time slice
6.3 Position of receive coils versus field strength 2.2.3 Number of readings per cycle
2.2.4 Beat frequencies, harmonics, and base frequencies
7.0 Instrument Design Considerations 2.2.5 Optimum frequency
7.1 Amplification 2.2.6 Saturating the input amplifier (large volume
7.2 Phase and amplitude detection (lock-in amplifier) defects)
7.3 Differentiation and filtering 2.2.7 Small volume defects: optimizing the settings to
detect
Remote Field Testing Level II Topical 3.0 Applications

Outline 3.1 Tubulars using internal probes
3.1.1 Heat exchanger tubes
Techniques and Applications Course 3.1.2 Boiler tubes
3.1.3 Pipes
3.1.4 Pipelines
1.0 Equipment
3.1.5 Furnace tubes
1.1 Probes
3.2 Tubulars using external probes
1.1.1 Absolute bobbin coils
3.2.1 Boiler tubes
1.1.2 Differential bobbin coils
3.2.2 Process pipes
1.1.3 Arrays
3.2.3 Pipelines
1.1.4 Dual exciter or dual detector probes
3.2.4 Structural pipes
1.1.5 Solid-state sensors
3.3 Other applications
1.1.6 External probes
3.3.1 Flat plate
1.1.7 Effect of fill factor
3.3.2 Finned tubes
1.1.8 Centralizing the probe
3.3.3 Hydrogen furnace tubes
1.1.9 Quality of the “ride”
3.3.4 Nonferrous tubes and pipes
1.1.10 Cable length considerations
3.3.5 Cast-iron water mains
1.1.11 Preamplifiers: internal and external
3.3.6 Oil well casings
1.2 Instruments
1.2.1 Measuring phase and amplitude
1.2.2 Displays: RFT, voltage plane, impedance plane
differences
15
4.0 Inspection System Output 2.5 Instrument design considerations

4.1 Accept/reject criteria 2.5.1 Amplification
4.1.1 Customer specified or code specified 2.5.2 Phase detection
4.2 Signal classification processes 2.5.3 Differentiation or filtering
4.2.1 Discontinuity 2.5.4 Thresholds, box gates, etc.
4.2.2 Flaw
4.3 Detection of signals of interest 3.0 Techniques/Standardization
4.3.1 Near/under support plates and tubesheets 3.1 Factors which affect coil impedance
4.3.2 Flaws in the free span 3.1.1 Test part
4.3.3 Internal and external flaws 3.1.2 Test system
4.3.4 Recognition of signals from nonflaws 3.2 Selection of test frequency
4.4 Signal recognition, data analysis, and flaw-sizing 3.2.1 Relation of frequency to type of test
techniques 3.2.2 Consideration affecting choice of test
4.4.1 Understanding the RFT reference curve and using 3.2.2.1 SNR
it for flaw sizing 3.2.2.2 Phase discrimination
4.4.2 Using phase angle to calculate flaw depth on the 3.2.2.3 Response speed
X-Y display 3.2.2.4 Skin effect
4.4.3 Coil footprint considerations 3.3 Coupling
3.3.1 Fill factor
Electromagnetic Testing Level III Topical 3.3.2 Liftoff
3.4 Field strength
Outline 3.4.1 Permeability changes
3.4.2 Saturation
Eddy Current Testing 3.4.3 Effect of AC field strength on eddy current testing
3.5 Comparison of techniques
1.0 Principles/Theory 3.6 Standardization
1.1 Eddy current theory 3.6.1 Techniques
1.1.1 Generation of eddy currents 3.6.2 Reference standards
1.1.2 Effect of fields created by eddy currents 3.7 Techniques – general
(impedance changes) 3.7.1 Thickness
1.1.3 Properties of eddy currents 3.7.2 Sorting
1.1.3.1 Travel mode 3.7.3 Conductivity
1.1.3.2 Depth of penetration 3.7.4 Surface or subsurface flaw detection
1.1.3.3 Effects of test part characteristics – 3.7.5 Tubing
conductivity and permeability
1.1.3.4 Current flow 4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
1.1.3.5 Frequency and phase 4.1 Flaw detection
1.1.3.6 Effects of permeability variations – noise 4.2 Sorting for properties
1.1.3.7 Effects of discontinuity orientation 4.3 Thickness gauging
4.4 Process control
2.0 Equipment/Materials 4.5 General interpretations
2.1 Probes – general
2.1.1 Advantages/limitations 5.0 Procedures
2.2 Through, encircling or annular coils and hall elements
2.2.1 Advantages/limitations/differences Remote Field Testing
2.3.1 Type of part to be inspected
1.0 RFT Principles and Theories
2.3.2 Type of discontinuity to be detected
1.1 Three zones in RFT
2.3.3 Speed of testing required
1.1.1 Near field (direct field)
2.3.4 Amount of testing required
1.1.2 Transition zone
2.3.5 Probable location of discontinuity
1.1.3 Remote field zone
2.3.6 Applications other than discontinuity detection
1.2 Through-transmission nature of RFT
2.4 Readout selection
1.3 Standard depth of penetration factors
2.4.1 Meter
1.3.1 Thickness
2.4.2 Oscilloscope, X-Y, and other displays
1.3.2 Permeability
2.4.3 Alarm, lights, etc.
1.3.3 Conductivity
2.4.4 Strip-chart recorder
1.3.4 Frequency
1.3.5 Geometry
16
1.4 Signal analysis Electromagnetic Testing Method, Level I,

1.5 Display options II, and III Training References
1.5.1 Voltage plane (polar coordinates)
1.5.2 X-Y display (rectilinear coordinates) ASNT, 2004, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 5:
1.5.3 Chart recordings: phase, log-amplitude, Electromagnetic Testing, third edition, American Society for
magnitude, X-Y Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
1.6 Advanced applications
ASNT, 2014, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Electromagnetic Testing,
1.6.1 Array probes
American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus,
1.6.2 Large pipes
OH.*
1.6.3 Flat plates
1.6.4 Nonferrous applications ASNT, 2014, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Electromagnetic
1.6.5 Effects of tilt and shields Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
1.6.6 Effects of cores and magnets Columbus, OH.*
2.0 Codes and Practices ASNT, 2016, Materials and Processes for NDT Technology, second
2.1 Writing procedures edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
2.2 ASTM E2096 Columbus, OH.*
2.3 SNT-TC-1A ASNT, 2018, Electromagnetic Testing Classroom Training Book
2.3.1 Responsibility of Level III (PTP Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
2.4 Supervision and training Columbus, OH.*
2.5 Administering exams
2.6 Ethics ASTM, 2010, ASTM E690 – 10: Standard Practice for In Situ
2.7 Reports: essential elements, legal responsibility Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Examination of Nonmagnetic Heat
Exchanger Tubes, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA.
Alternating Current Field Measurement Testing ASTM, 2018, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03:
1.0 Principles and Theory Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
1.1 Generation of eddy currents
1.2 Effect of fields created by eddy currents Beissner, R., G. Matzkanin, and C. Teller, 1980, NTIAC-80-1, NDE
1.3 Properties of eddy currents Applications of Magnetic Leakage Field Methods.
1.3.1 Depth of penetration Bray, D., and D. McBride, 1982, Nondestructive Testing
1.3.2 Effects of test part characteristics Techniques. John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY.
1.3.3 Current flow
1.3.4 Frequency Cecco, V., G. Van Drunen, and F. Sharp, 1987, Eddy Current
1.3.5 Effects of permeability variations Testing, US Edition, (AECL-7523), Nichols Publishing Inc.
1.3.6 Effects of discontinuity orientation Columbia, MD.*
2.0 Equipment and Materials Kilgore, R., and S. Ramchandran. “Remote-Field Eddy Current
2.1 Alternating current measurement probes general Testing of Small-Diameter Carbon Steel Tubes,” Materials
2.1.1 Advantages and limitations Evaluation, Vol. 47, No.1, pp. 32–36.*
2.2 Factors affecting choice of probes Libby, H., 1979, Introduction to Electromagnetic Nondestructive
2.2.1 Type of part to be inspected Test Methods, Robert E. Krieger Publishing Co., Huntington, NY.
2.2.2 Type of discontinuity to be inspected
2.2.3 Speed of testing required Mackintosh, D., D. Atherton, and P. Puhach, 1993, “Through-
2.2.4 Amount of testing required Transmission Equations for Remote-Field Eddy Current
2.2.5 Probable location of discontinuity Inspection of Small-Bore Ferromagnetic Tubes,” Materials
2.2.6 Applications other that discontinuity detection Evaluation, Vol. 51, No. 6, pp. 744–748.*
2.3 Techniques/equipment sensitivity
Mackintosh, D., D. Atherton, T. Schmidt, and D. Russell, 1996,
2.3.1 Selection of test frequency
“Remote Field Eddy Current for Examination of Ferromagnetic
2.3.2 Selection of correct probe scalings in relation to
Tubes,” Materials Evaluation, Vol. 54, No. 6, pp. 652–657.*
the test
2.3.3 Selection of correct communication rates Mordfin, L., 2002, Handbook of Reference Data for Nondestructive
Testing, second edition, ASTM International, West
3.0 Interpretation and Evaluation of Signals Conshohocken, PA.**
3.1 Flaw detection
Schmidt, T., 1984, “The Remote Field Eddy Current Technique,”
4.0 Procedures Materials Evaluation, Vol. 42, No. 2, pp. 223–230.*
17
Schmidt, T., 1989, “History of the Remote Field Eddy Current British Standard institution, latest edition, BS 3683: Part 5 Eddy
Inspection Technique,” Materials Evaluation, Vol. 47, No. 1, Current Flaw Detection Glossary.
pp. 14–22.* Collins, R. and M. Lugg, 1991, “Use of AC Field Measurements for
Non-Destructive Testing,” Fatigue Crack Measurement:
Schmidt, T., D. Atherton, and S. Sullivan, 1989, “The Remote-
Techniques and Applications, Engineering Materials Advisory
Field Transition Zone,” Materials Evaluation, Vol. 47, No. 9,
Services Ltd.
pp. 969–979.*
PCN, latest edition, PCN Classroom – Product Technology, PCN
Smith, H., and D. Mackintosh, 1995, “Remote Field Eddy Current
Certification Services, British Institute of NDT.
Examination of Boiler Tubes,” Proceedings of EPRI Topical
Workshop on Electromagnetic NDE Application in the Electric Raine, A., 1994, “An Alternative Method for Offshore Inspection,”
Power Industry, Charlotte. Insight, Vol. 36, No. 9.
Sollish, D., 1991, “Field Experience in Boiler Examinations Using Raine, A., and C. Laenen, 1998, “Additional Applications with the
Remote Field Eddy Current,” Corrosion 91: NACE Annual Alternating Current Field Measurement (ACFM) Technique,”
Conference and Corrosion Show, Cincinnati, OH. Proceedings of the ASNT Spring Conference and 7th Annual
Research Symposium, Anaheim, CA.
Sullivan, S., and D. Atherton, 1989, “Analysis of the Remote Field
Eddy Current Effect in Non-magnetic Tubes,” Materials Topp, D., 1994, “The Alternating Current Field Measurement
Evaluation, Vol. 47, No. 1, pp. 80–86.* Technique and its Application to the Inspection of Oil and Gas
Installations,” Insight, Vol. 36, No.6.
Taylor, J., ed., 1988, Basic Metallurgy for Non-Destructive Testing,
revised edition, W.H. Houldershaw Ltd., British Institute of Non- Topp, D., and B. Jones, 1994, Operational Experience with the
destructive Testing, Essex, England.* ACFM Inspection Technique for Sub-Sea Weld Inspection, British
Gas Environmental Engineering.
Additional Papers Topp, O., 1994, OSEA 94.137: The Use of Manual and Automated
Alternating Current Field Measurement Techniques for Sub-sea and
The following selected papers are available from PCN Topside Crack Detection and Sizing, Offshore S E Asia.
Certification Services, British Institute of NDT, 1 Spencer
Parade, Northampton NN1 5AA. The list of available papers
may be extended by the addition of later publications. This Inc., Columbus, OH.
document will not be revised to show the extended list in
every case.
18
GPR
Ground Penetrating Radar Topical Outlines
Ground Penetrating Radar Level I Topical 3.1.3 Snell angle

Outline 3.1.4 Near field/far field
3.1.5 Frequencies
3.2 Coupling
Theory Course 3.2.1 Impedance matching
3.2.2 Unloading
1.0 Introduction to Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) 3.2.3 Ringing
1.1 Radar 3.3 Waveguides
1.1.1 Reflection
1.1.2 Radar equation
1.1.3 Polarization Basic Techniques Course
1.1.4 Interference
1.2 The history of GPR 1.0 Surveys
1.1 Defining the objectives
2.0 Electromagnetic Theory 1.2 Antenna selection and orientation
2.1 Electromagnetic wave propagation 1.2.1 Speed
2.2 Velocity 1.2.2 Frequency
2.3 Wavelength 1.2.3 Application
2.4 Interference 1.2.4 Materials
2.4.1 Attenuation 1.2.5 Targets
2.4.2 Dispersion 1.3 Depth of penetration
2.4.3 Noise 1.3.1 Gain controls
2.4.4 Clutter 1.3.2 Sensitivity controls
2.5 Electrical properties 1.3.3 Standardization
2.5.1 Relative dielectric permittivity 1.4 Range settings
2.5.2 Electrical conductivity 1.5 Filter settings
2.5.3 Dielectric materials 1.6 Scanning parameters
2.5.3.1 Conductors 1.6.1 Mapping
2.5.3.2 Insulators 1.6.2 Grid layout
2.5.3.3 Semiconductors 1.6.3 Spacing
2.5.4 Types of materials
2.5.4.1 Soil 2.0 Applications
2.5.4.2 Concrete 2.1 Test methods
2.5.4.3 Rocks 2.2 Advantages
2.5.4.4 Water – salt/fresh 2.3 Limitations
2.5.4.5 Ice
2.5.4.6 Others 3.0 Data Display and Interpretation
2.6 Magnetic properties in materials 3.1 Material properties
2.6.1 Ferromagnetic 3.2 Layer reflection
2.6.2 Paramagnetic 3.2.1 Trench effect
2.6.3 Super paramagnetic 3.3 Target reflection
3.3.1 Point targets
3.0 GPR Equipment 3.4 Detection accuracy
3.1 Antennas 3.5 Horizontal accuracy and resolution
3.1.1 Polarization 3.6 Depth accuracy and resolution
3.1.2 Fresnel reflection 3.7 Measurement techniques
19
ANSI/ASNT CP-105-2020 l GPR
Ground Penetrating Radar Level lI Topical 2.0 Systems Design

Outline 2.1 Range
2.1.1 Antenna loss
2.1.2 Transmission loss
Principles and Applications Course 2.1.3 Coupling loss
2.1.4 Mismatch
1.0 Review of Electromagnetic Theory 2.1.5 Target scatter
1.1 Radar equation 2.1.6 Material attenuation
1.2 Stokes vector 2.2 Velocity propagation
1.3 Mueller matrix 2.3 Clutter
1.4 Poincaré sphere 2.4 Resolution
2.4.1 Depth
2.0 Types of Tests 2.4.2 Plan
3.0 Factors Affecting Tests 3.0 Modeling

3.1 Depth of investigation 3.1 Time domain models
3.2 Orientation 3.2 Antenna radiation
3.3 Noise 3.3 Numerical modeling
3.3.1 Signal-to-noise ratios 3.3.1 Schemes
3.3.2 Causes 3.3.2 Applications
3.3.3 Filters 3.3.3 Absorbing boundary conditions (ABC) properties
3.4 Interferences 3.4 Target shape effects
3.5 Noninvasive surfaces
4.0 Material Properties
4.0 Field Strength 4.1 Dielectric materials
4.1 Antenna drive 4.2 Ice, water
4.2 Effects of conductivity 4.3 Soils, rocks
4.3 Permeability effects 4.4 Suitability
4.4 Ground truth 4.5 Manmade materials
4.5 Hyperbolic shape analysis 4.6 Techniques
4.7 Measurement techniques
5.0 Instrument Design Considerations
5.1 Waveguides 5.0 Antennas
5.2 Multipathing 5.1 Types
5.3 Near field and far field factors 5.1.1 Element
5.4 Resonance 5.1.2 Traveling wave
5.5 Resolution 5.1.3 Impulse radiating
5.1.4 Frequency dependent
6.0 Data 5.1.5 Horn
6.1 Data acquisition 5.1.6 Dielectric antennas
6.2 Data processing 5.2 Arrays
6.2.1 Displays 5.3 Polarization
6.3 Modeling
6.4 Interpretation 6.0 Signal Modulation
6.4.1 Uncertainty 6.1 Ultra-wideband signal resolution
Ground Penetrating Radar Level III 6.1.2 Signals
6.1.2.1 Time domain
Topical Outline 6.1.2.2 Noise
6.1.2.3 Comparisons
Theory Course 6.1.2.4 Spectra comparisons
6.2 Amplitude modulation
1.0 Introduction 6.3 Continuous wave frequency modulation
1.1 History 6.4 Polarization modulation
1.2 Applications
20
Ground Penetrating Radar Topical Outlines
7.0 Signal processing 4.3 Polythermal glaciers

7.1 A-scan processing 4.3.1 Radar system
7.1.1 Zero offset 4.3.2 Bottom topography
7.1.2 Noise 4.3.3 Internal structure
7.1.3 Clutter 4.3.4 Snow cover
7.1.4 Gain 4.4 Oil spills
7.1.5 Filtering 4.5 Contaminations
7.1.6 Target resonances 4.6 Soil erosion
7.2 B-scan processing 4.7 Coal and salt
7.3 C-scan processing 4.8 Rocks
7.4 Migration
7.5 Image processing 5.0 Bore Hole Radar (Long Distance)
7.6 Deconvolution 5.1 Radar design
7.7 Data acquisition 5.2 Data
7.8 Data processing 5.3 Subsurface fracture characterization
7.9 Microwave 5.4 Radar polarimetry
7.10 Clutter 5.5 Specifications
7.11 Anomalies 5.6 Data acquisition
5.7 Problems
Applications Course 5.8 Signal/image processing
5.9 Electromagnetic modeling
1.0 Archeology
1.1 Application 6.0 Mine Detection
1.2 Identification 6.1 Humanitarian and military programs
6.1.1 United States
2.0 Civil Engineering 6.1.2 Europe
2.1 Roads and pavement 6.1.3 Others
2.2 Conduits 6.2 Performance assessment
2.3 Techniques 6.3 Mine detection
2.4 Concrete 6.3.1 Handheld
2.4.1 Walls 6.3.2 Vehicle mounted
2.4.2 Reinforcement 6.3.3 Airborne
2.4.3 Dowels and anchors 6.3.4 Data processing
2.5 Buildings 6.3.5 Clutter characteristics and removal
2.5.1 Masonry
2.5.2 Floors 7.0 Utilities
2.5.3 Walls 7.1 Technology
2.5.4 Joints 7.2 Pipes and cables
2.6 Tunnels 7.3 Pipe hawk
7.4 Mapping
3.0 Forensic Applications 7.5 Drainage
3.1 Principles of search 7.6 Inspection of pipe
3.2 Methods
3.3 Graves 8.0 Remote Sensing
3.4 Remains 8.1 Airborne systems
3.5 Excavation 8.2 Satellite systems
3.6 Examples 8.3 Planetary exploration
8.3.1 Interplanetary body measurement
4.0 Geophysical Applications 8.3.2 Scientific objectives
4.1 Radar systems 8.3.3 Models
4.2 Frozen materials 8.3.4 Performance
4.2.1 Short pulse and frequency-modulated
continuous-wave radar
4.2.2 Firm layering and isochrones
4.2.3 Crevasses detection
4.2.4 Hydraulic pathways
4.2.5 Topography
4.2.6 Lake ice
21
9.0 Equipment Ground Penetrating Radar Method, Level

9.1 Survey methods I, II, and III Training References
9.2 Site characteristics
9.3 Surface characteristics Daniels, D., ed., 2004, Ground Penetrating Radar, second edition,
9.4 Material characteristics The Institution of Engineering and Technology, London, UK.
9.5 Target characteristics
ASNT, 2016, GPR Compendium: Articles on Ground Penetrating
Radar – Collected from ASNT Publications, American Society for
10.0 Regulations, Radiological Aspects, and Electromagnetic Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH. *
Compatability (EMC)
10.1 US regulations Jol, H., ed., 2009, Ground Penetrating Radar Theory and
10.2 European regulations Applications, Elsevier Science, Oxford, UK.
10.3 Radiological aspects
10.4 EMC
Inc., Columbus, OH.
22
GW
Guided Wave Testing Topical Outlines
Guided Wave Testing Level I Topical 3.5 Cables

Outline 3.6 Computer interface
3.7 Electromagnetic acoustic transducers (EMATs)
Note: It is recommended that the trainee receive instruction
in this course prior to performing work in guided wave test- 4.0 Testing Techniques
ing (GW). 4.1 Pulse-echo
4.2 Through-transmission
GW, or long-range ultrasonic testing, is uniquely different
and specialized such that it should be considered a separate 5.0 Standardization
method for Level I and II personnel. The intent of this doc- 5.1 Distance standardization
ument is to provide basic body of knowledge requirements 5.2 Amplitude standardization (DAC and TCG)
for GW of piping that is consistent with other methods and
not intended to replace specific training or schemes identi- 6.0 Procedures
6.1 Specific applications
fied by the various equipment manufacturers.
6.1.1 Weld/feature location
6.1.2 Corrosion and wall loss evaluation
1.0 Introduction
6.1.2.1 Aboveground piping – uninsulated
1.1 Basic understanding of nondestructive testing
6.1.2.2 Aboveground piping – insulated
1.2 Responsibilities of levels of certification
6.2 Basic data collection
1.3 Terminology of GW
6.2.1 Choosing a test location
1.4 History of GW
6.2.2 Selection of wave modes
1.5 Product technology
6.2.3 Selection of frequency
1.5.1 Pipe designs and manufacturing processes
6.3 Basic data evaluation
1.5.2 Process versus service-induced defects
6.3.1 Data quality
6.3.2 Influence of geometry and structure
2.0 Basic Principles of GW 6.3.3 Recognition of symmetrical features
2.1 Utility of GW 6.3.4 Distance-amplitude correction
2.2 Characteristics of guided wave propagation 6.3.5 Recognition of nonsymmetrical features
2.3 Basic concepts of GW of piping 6.3.6 Influence of coatings, linings, and pipe condition
2.4 Various types of guided waves of pulse-echo analysis
6.3.7 Recognizing false indications
3.0 Equipment 6.4 Basic reporting
3.1 Transmission and reception of guided waves 6.4.1 A-scan presentations
3.2 Piezoelectric effect 6.4.2 Feature list
3.3 Magnetostriction effect
3.4 Transduction
3.4.1 Pulser-receiver unit(s) Guided Wave Testing Level II Topical
3.4.2 Sensor rings Outline
3.4.3 Types of sensors
3.4.4 Array arrangement 1.0 Introduction
3.4.5 Directionality 1.1 Review of Level I knowledge
3.4.6 Frequency limits 1.2 Terminology of GW
3.4.7 Dead zone and near field 1.3 Level II responsibilities
3.4.8 Influence of transduction and frequency on 1.4 Product technology
inspection 1.4.1 Various types of pipeline supports
3.4.9 Guided wave focusing 1.4.2 Advanced information on girth welds and other
3.4.10 Factors influencing selection of test conditions accessories welded to pipe (including typical
3.4.11 Influence of pipe geometry and pipe defects)
configuration 1.4.3 Structural integrity of pipelines – codes and
standards for the specific sector
23
2.0 Principles of GW 2.0 Principles of GW

2.1 Various types of guided wave modes (deeper knowledge) 2.1 Review of mathematical basics
2.2 Factors influencing selection of test parameters 2.1.1 Advanced GW propagation theory
2.3 Sensitivity to cross-sectional changes 2.1.2 Dispersion effect and compensation factors
2.4 Effect of feature geometry 2.1.3 Effect of material properties
2.5 Transducer configuration 2.1.4 Bi-layer systems
2.1.5 Attenuation due to viscoelastic coatings and
3.0 Equipment embedded medium (parameters affecting and
3.1 Advanced transduction configuration mathematical prediction)
3.2 Hardware and software requirements for optimization of 2.1.6 Sensitivity to stiffness changes
test parameters 2.1.7 Properties of guided waves in pipes and plates
3.3 Data presentation (deeper knowledge) 2.2 Various types of GW modes
2.2.1 Torsional, longitudinal, and flexural
4.0 Procedures 2.2.2 Modes in bends
4.1 Contents and requirements of instructions, procedures
and standards 3.0 Nonconventional Applications
4.2 Preparation of written instructions 3.1 Advanced array configuration
4.3 Cased piping (road crossings) 3.2 Transduction selection parameters
4.4 Buried piping 3.3 Advanced standardization systems
4.5 Coated piping 3.4 Underwater inspection
3.5 Guided wave monitoring
5.0 Advanced GW Data Analysis 3.6 Guided wave focusing
3.7 Advanced transduction systems
6.0 Evaluation
6.1 Comparison procedures 4.0 Interpretations/Evaluations
6.1.1 Standards and references 4.1 Identification of discontinuities in various industrial
6.1.2 Application of results of other NDT methods environments
6.2 Object appraisal 4.2 Variables affecting test results
6.2.1 History of pipe 4.2.1 Transducer performance
6.2.2 Intended use of pipe 4.2.2 Instrument performance
6.2.3 Existing and applicable code interpretation 4.2.3 Effect of testing environment
6.2.4 Type of discontinuity and location 4.2.4 Pipe specifications (diameter, thickness,
6.3 Followup manufacturing method, tolerances) and condition
(temperature, roughness, stress)
7.0 Reporting 4.3 Range and sensitivity
7.1 Influence of frequency 4.4 Signal-to-noise ratio
7.2 Influence of focusing 4.5 Detailed knowledge on how to classify and assess
7.3 Estimation of indication severity observations and identification of best NDT method for
sizing (UT, RT, etc.) or monitoring defect growth (GW,
UT, etc.)
Guided Wave Testing Level III Topical
Outline 5.0 Writing Procedures for Specific Applications
5.1 General and bare or painted piping
1.0 Introduction 5.2 Insulated piping
1.1 Terminology of GW 5.3 Inspection under supports (simple, welded, clamped)
1.2 Level III responsibilities 5.4 Road crossings
1.2.1 Preparation of inspection procedures 5.5 Buried piping
1.2.2 Preparation of training materials for Level I and 5.6 Plate
Level II 5.7 Steel cable or wire rope
1.2.3 Developing material for Level I and Level II tests 5.8 Rods or rail stock
including written and practical tests 5.9 Tubes
6.0 Understanding of Codes, Standards, and

Specifications
24
Guided Wave Testing Topical Outlines
Guided Wave Testing, Level I, II, and III British Standards Institution, 2011, BS 9690-2:2011: Non-
Training References Destructive Testing – Guided Wave Testing, Part 2: Basic
Requirements for Guided Wave Testing of Pipes, Pipelines and
Achenbach, J., 1987, Wave Propagation in Elastic Solids. North Structural Tubulars.
Holland, New York.
Catton, P., P. Mudge, and W. Balachandran, 2008, “Advances in
Alers, G., 2004, “Electromagnetic Induction of Ultrasonic Waves: Defect Characterization using Long-Range Ultrasonic Testing of
EMAT, EMUS, EMAR,” 16th World Conference on NDT, Pipes,” Insight, Vol. 50, No. 9.
Montreal, Canada.
Choi, M-S., S-Y. Kim, H. Kwun, and G. Light, 2004,
Alleyne, D., B. Pavlakovic, M. Lowe, and P. Cawley, 2004, “Rapid “Transmission Line Model for Simulation of Guided-Wave Defect
Long-Range Inspection of Chemical Plant Pipework using Guided Signals in Piping,” IEEE Transactions on Ultrasonics, Ferroelectrics,
Waves,” Key Engineering Materials, Vol. 270–273 Advances in and Frequency Control, Vol. 51, No. 5.
Nondestructive Evaluation, pp. 434–441.
Crompton, A., R. Royer, M. Tallon, and S. Biagiotti, 2012, “Guided
Alleyne, D., M. Lowe, and P. Cawley, 1998, “The Reflection of Wave Testing: Maximizing Buried Pipe Corrosion Knowledge
Guided Waves From Circumferential Notches in Pipes,” Journal of from Each Excavation,” Proceedings of the ASME 2012 PVP
Applied Mechanics, Vol. 65, No. 3, pp. 635–641. Conference - PVP2012-78561, Toronto, Ontario, Canada.
ASNT, 2016, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Ultrasonic Testing, sec- Demma, A., P. Cawley, M. Lowe, and A. Roosenbrand, 2003, “The
ond edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. Reflection of the Fundamental Torsional Mode From Cracks and
Columbus, OH.* Notches in Pipes,” The Journal of the Acoustical Society of
America, Vol. 114, No. 2, pp. 611–625.
ASNT, 2016, GW Compendium: Articles on Guided Wave –
Collected from ASNT Publications, American Society for Ditri, J., and J. Rose, 1992, “Excitation of Guided Elastic Wave
Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.* Modes in Hollow Cylinders by Applied Surface Tractions,” Journal
of Applied Physics, Vol. 72, No. 7, pp. 2589–2597.
ASTM, 2011, ASTM E2775-11: Standard Practice for Guided Wave
Testing of Above Ground Steel Pipework using Piezoelectric Effect Ditri, J., 1994, “Utilization of Guided Elastic Waves for the
Transduction, ASTM International, West Conshochocken, PA. Characterization of Circumferential Cracks in Hollow Cylinders,”
The Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Vol. 96, No. 6, pp.
ASTM, 2013, ASTM E2929-13: Standard Practice for Guided Wave 3769–3775.
Testing of Above Ground Steel Pipework with Magnetostrictive
Transduction, ASTM International, West Conshochocken, PA. Ditri, J., J. Rose, and A. Pilarski, 1993, “Generation of Guided
Waves in Hollow Cylinders by Wedge and Comb Type
Auld, B., 1973, Acoustic Fields and Waves in Solids, Vol. I and II, Transducers,” Review of Progress in Quantitative Nondestructive
Wiley, Interscience, New York, NY. Evaluation, pp. 211–218.
Barshinger, J., and J. Rose, 2004, “Guided Wave Propagation in an Gazis, D., 1959, “Three-Dimensional Investigation of the
Elastic Hollow Cylinder Coated with a Viscoelastic Material,” IEEE Propagation of Waves in Hollow Circular Cylinders. I. Analytical
Transactions on Ultrasonics, Ferroelectrics, and Frequency Control, Foundation,” The Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Vol.
Vol. 51, No. 11, pp. 1547–1556. 31, No. 5, pp. 568–573.
Barshinger, J., J. Rose, and M. Avioli, Jr, 2002, “Guided Wave Graff, K., 1991, Wave Motion in Elastic Solids, revised edition,
Resonance Tuning for Pipe Inspection,” Journal of Pressure Vessel Dover Publications, NY.
Technology, Vol. 124, pp. 303–310.
Hayashi, T., K. Kawashima, Z. Sun, and J. Rose, 2002, “Analysis of
Beard, M., M. Lowe, and P. Cawley, 2003, “Inspection of Steel Flexural Mode Focusing by a Semi-Analytical Finite Element
Tendons in Concrete Using Guided Waves,” AIP Conference Method,” The Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Vol.
Proceedings, Vol. 657, pp. 1139–1147. 113, No. 3, pp. 1241–1248.
Biagiotti, S., A. Crompton, and, R.L. Royer, 2012, “Integrated Hirao, M., and H. Ogi, 1999, “An SH-wave EMAT Technique for
Inspection and Analytical Technologies for Buried Pipe Gas Pipeline Inspection,” NDT&E International, Vol. 32, No. 3,
Assessments,” Proceedings of the Electric Power Research Institute pp. 127–132.
9th International Conference on NDE in Relation to Structural
Integrity for Nuclear and Pressurized Components, Seattle, WA. Hirao, M., and H. Ogi, 2003, EMATs for Science and Industry -
Noncontacting Ultrasonic Measurements, ninth edition, Kluwer,
British Standards Institution, 2011, BS 9690-1:2011: Non- Boston, MA.
Destructive Testing – Guided Wave Testing, Part 1: General
Guidance and Principles. Krautkramer, J., and H. Krautkramer, 1990, Ultrasonic Testing of
Materials, fourth edition, Springer-Verlag, New York.
25
ANSI/ASNT CP-105-2020 l GW
Li, J., and J. Rose, 2002, “Angular-Profile Tuning of Guided Waves Royer, R., K. Rach, A. Crompton, and D. Keene, 2013, “Safety
in Hollow Cylinders using a Circumferential Phased Array,” IEEE Related Service Water Piping Assessment for Nuclear Power
Transactions on Ultrasonics, Ferroelectrics, and Frequency Control, Stations,” Proceedings of the Tenth International Conference on
Vol. 49, No. 12, pp. 1720–1729. NDE in Relation to Structural Integrity for Nuclear and
Pressurized Components.
Liu, G., and J. Qu, 1998, “Guided Circumferential Waves in a
Circular Annulus,” Journal of Applied Mechanics, Vol. 65, No. 2, Silk, M., and K. Bainton, 1979, “The Propagation in Metal Tubing
pp. 424–430. of Ultrasonic Wave Modes Equivalent to Lamb Waves,”
Ultrasonics, Vol. 17, No. 1, pp. 1–19.
Luo, W., and J. Rose, 2007, “Phased Array Focusing with Guided
Waves in a Viscoelastic Coated Hollow Cylinder,” The Journal of Sun, Z., L. Zhang, and J. Rose, 2005, “Flexural Torsional Guided
the Acoustical Society of America, Vol. 121, No. 4, pp. 1945–1955. Wave Mechanics and Focusing in Pipe,” Journal of Pressure Vessel
Technology, Vol. 127, No. 4, pp. 471–478.
Mu, J., and J. Rose, 2008, “Guided Wave Propagation and Mode
Differentiation in Hollow Cylinders with Viscoelastic Coatings,” Thompson, D., and D. Chimenti, eds., 1997, “Disperse: A General
The Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Vol. 124, No. 2, Purpose Program For Creating Dispersion Curves,” Twenty-Third
pp. 866–874. Annual Review of Progress in Quantitative Nondestructive
Evaluation, Vol. 16A, pp. 185–192.
Mudge, P., and D. Alleyne, 1996, “A Long Range Method Of
Detection Of Corrosion Under Insulation In Process Pipework,” Thompson, D., and D. Chimenti, eds., 2006, “Phased-Array
The Strategic Importance of Oil and Gas Technology: 5th European Focusing Potential in Pipe with Viscoelastic Coating,” Thirty-
Union Hydrocarbons Symposium. Third Review of Progress in Quantitative Nondestructive
Evaluation, Vol. 26A, pp. 188–123.
NACE International, 2013, SP0313-2013: Standard Practice
Guided Wave Technology for Piping Applications, National Thompson, D., and D. Chimenti, eds., 2006, “Circumferential
Association of Corrosion Engineers International. Guided Waves for Defect Detection in Coated Pipes,” Thirty-
Second Annual Review of Progress in Quantitative Nondestructive
Redwood, M., 1960, Mechanical Wave-Guides, The Propagation of Evaluation, Vol. 25A, pp. 165–172.
Acoustic and Ultrasonic Waves in Fluids and Solids with
Boundaries, Pergamon, New York. Thompson, R., 1990, “Physical Principles of Measurements with
EMAT Transducers,” Physical Acoustics, Vol. 19, pp. 157–200.
Rose, J. Ultrasonic Guided Waves in Solid Media, revised edition.
Cambridge University Press, New York. Van Velsor, J.K., H. Goo, and J.L. Rose, 2007, “Guided-Wave
Tomographic Imaging of Defects in Pipe Using a Probabilistic
Rose, J., 2014, “A Baseline and Vision of Ultrasonic Guided Wave Reconstruction Algorithm,” Insight, Vol. 49, No. 9, pp. 532–537.
Inspection Potential,” Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology, Vol.
124, No.3, pp. 273–282. Viktorov, I.A., 1967, Rayleigh and Lamb Waves, Physical Theory
and Applications. Plenum Press, New York.
Rose, J., R. Royer, J. Mu, J. Hua, and S. Kenefick, 2009, “Guided
Wave Inspection of Buried Pipe: Part 1 – Theory,” Proceedings of Zemanek Jr., J., 1972, “An Experimental and Theoretical
the Electric Power Research Institute Seventh International Investigation of Elastic Wave Propagation in a Cylinder,” The
Conference on NDE in Relation to Structural Integrity for Nuclear Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Vol. 51, No. 1B,
and Pressurized Components. pp. 265–283.
Rose, J., R. Royer, J. Mu, J. Hua, and S. Kenefick, 2009, “Guided Zhao, X., and J. Rose, 2004, “Guided Circumferential Shear
Wave Inspection of Buried Pipe: Part 2 – Experiments,” Horizontal Waves in an Isotropic Hollow Cylinder,” The Journal
Proceedings of the Seventh International Conference on NDE in of the Acoustical Society of America, Vol. 115, No. 5,
Relation to Structural Integrity for Nuclear and Pressurized pp. 1912–1916.
Components.
Royer, R., J. Van Velsor, and J.L. Rose, 2009, “An Ultrasonic * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Guided Wave Approach for Pipeline Health Monitoring,” Inc., Columbus, OH.
Proceedings of the Seventh International Conference on NDE in
Relation to Structural Integrity for Nuclear and Pressurized
Components.
26
LM
Laser Methods Testing Topical Outlines
Laser Methods Testing – 3.4 Commonly used lasers based on medium (basic
Holography/Shearography Level I Topical properties)
3.4.1 Solid-state lasers
Outline 3.4.2 Gas lasers
3.4.3 Ion lasers
Basic Holography/Shearography Physics Course 3.4.4 Diode lasers
3.4.5 Diode pumped solid-state lasers (DPSS)
1.0 Introduction 3.5 Use of multiple laser sources
1.1 Nondestructive testing (NDT) 3.5.1 Multiple beams from single lasers (beam splitting)
1.2 Overview of shearography and holography NDT (basic 3.5.2 Independent laser sources (e.g., laser diodes)
premise) 3.5.2.1 Coherence and phase limitations
1.2.1 Relationship between stress and strain for a 3.6 Use of fiber optic delivery systems
material or structure
1.2.2 Inherent material or structural stiffness (e.g., 4.0 Laser Safety
Young’s modulus) 4.1 Introduction
1.2.3 Looking for sub-surface defects by observing the 4.2 Potential dangers
surface of the test article as it is acted upon by an 4.2.1 Eye exposure
applied stress. 4.2.1.1 Dangers of intra-beam (collimated) viewing
1.3 History of holography/shearography 4.2.1.2 Dangers of concentrated (magnified)
1.4 Definition of speckle interferometry viewing
1.5 Application of shearography (SNDT) holography 4.2.2 Skin exposure
(HNDT) 4.2.3 Potential ignitions source
1.6 Overview of international NDT certification 4.2.4 Hazardous material exposure from laser mediums
1.7 Responsibilities of levels of certification 4.2.5 Hazardous byproducts (e.g., ozone production)
4.3 Levels of laser classification 1–4 based on increasing
2.0 Basic Principles of Light and Shearography level of potential danger
2.1 Wave nature of light 4.3.1 Classification limits and safety requirements
2.2 Wave particle duality 4.4 Expanded beams – inverse square law
2.3 Visible light versus monochromatic light 4.5 Laser system classification
2.4 Definition of coherence 4.5.1 Potential exposure during normal operation and
2.5 Interference maintenance versus service
2.6 Interferometry 4.5.2 Safety during service operations
2.6.1 What is an interferometer? 4.5.3 Measurement locations
2.6.1.1 Michelson interferometer example 4.5.4 Aversion response time (blink response)
2.6.2 Wavelength of light used as a measuring stick 4.5.5 Enclosures and interlocks
2.6.3 Shearography and holography cameras are 4.6 Rules for the safe use of lasers
interferometers 4.7 Keeping laser systems safe
4.8 Safety requirements for the production and field
3.0 Lasers applications
3.1 Introduction to lasers 4.9 Laser safety officers
3.2 Properties of laser light 4.10 Laser safety references
3.2.1 Practical sources of monochromatic-coherent light
3.2.2 High power densities 5.0 Basic Holography/Shearography Systems
3.2.3 Polarized outputs 5.1 Laser illumination (use of monochromatic coherent light)
3.3 Interference and the formation of laser speckle 5.2 Differences between holography camera and
3.3.1 Laser speckle and interferometry provide the basis shearography camera
for holography and shearography 5.2.1 Independent reference beam versus sheared images
5.2.2 Shear vector (definition)
5.2.2.1 Magnitude and sensitivity
5.2.2.2 Direction (orientation) and sensitivity
27
5.2.3 Beam ratio (definition) – holography 1.3 Test article imaging considerations
5.2.4 Holography sensitive to absolute displacement 1.3.1 Specular versus diffuse reflectors
5.2.4.1 Single-lobed indication similar to a 1.3.2 Overall reflectivity
topographical map 1.3.3 Transparent or translucent surface
5.2.4.2 Increased stability requirements 1.3.4 Orienting test article to minimize glare
5.2.5 Shearography sensitive to relative displacements. 1.3.5 Possible surface preparations
5.2.5.1 Double-lobed indications showing first 1.4 Measurement standardization
derivative of displacement 1.4.1 Mapping screen resolution to inspection area
5.3 Basic Holography/Shearography 1.4.1.1 Defining pixels/unit distance
5.3.1 Basic premise 1.4.2 Accounting for shear vector when making
5.3.2 Image capture measurements
5.3.3 Application of stress 1.4.3 Manual video scale and shear standardization
5.3.4 Observation of surface deformation 1.4.4 Automatic video scale and shear standardization
5.4 Basic image formation process (general overview) via spot projection
5.4.1 Subtraction 1.4.5 Video scale and shear measurement limitations
5.4.2 Phase stepping 1.5 Measuring indications
5.4.2.1 Wrapped versus unwrapped images 1.5.1 Overall indication sizing (single lobe versus
5.4.3 Continuous phase stepping with variable reference double lobe)
5.4.4 Hybrid techniques (e.g., phase reversal, additive 1.5.2 Marking defect location on test articles
subtractive phase modulation, etc.) 1.6 Image processor settings (defined within Level I
technique description)
Basic Operating Course 1.6.1 Video signal optimization
1.6.2 System specific settings
1.6.3 Processing modes (review)
1.0 Holography/Shearography System Setup
1.6.3.1 Subtraction
1.1 Camera and test article stability
1.6.3.2 Phase stepping
1.1.1 Three-point mounting
1.6.3.2.1 Wrapped versus unwrapped
1.1.2 Additional requirements for holography
images
1.1.3 Benefits of common camera/test article platform
1.6.3.3 Continuous phase stepping with variable
1.2 Camera settings
reference
1.2.1 Focus/clarity
1.6.3.4 Hybrid techniques (e.g., phase reversal,
1.2.1.1 Relationship between iris and focus
additive subtractive phase reversal, etc.)
setting
1.6.4 File saving
1.2.1.2 Proper procedure for setting focus at
1.6.4.1 File types
minimum depth of field
1.6.4.2 Linking images to test data
1.2.2 Iris/aperture
1.2.2.1 Selecting the proper iris setting
2.0 Primary Stressing Methods (Introduction)
1.2.2.2 Saturation
2.1 Mechanical loading
1.2.2.3 Relationship between iris and speckle size
2.2 Thermal stressing
1.2.3 Shear vector
2.3 Vacuum (pressure reduction) stressing
1.2.3.1 Relationship between shear distance and
2.3.1 Chamber; whole body pressure reduction
camera shear angle
2.3.2 Vacuum hood or window; single-sided vacuum
1.2.3.2 Shear distance and system sensitivity
stressing
1.2.3.3 Common shearing convention and its
2.4 Pressurization stressing
importance
2.5 Vibration stressing
1.2.3.4 Nominal shear magnitudes
2.5.1 Acoustic versus mechanical
1.2.3.5 Shear orientation and direction of
2.5.2 Contact versus noncontact
maximum sensitivity
2.5.3 Frequency limitations acoustic versus mechanical
1.2.3.5.1 Minimizing effect of part or
2.6 Combined stressing systems
camera motion
2.6.1 Sequential application
1.2.3.6 Effect of shear vector orientation on
2.6.2 Combined application
indication appearance
1.2.4 Beam ratio (holography only)
1.2.4.1 Optimum 1:1 ratio for digital holography 3.0 Test Standards
1.2.5 Test article illumination 3.1 Importance of test standards
1.2.5.1 Ensuring full coverage of test area 3.2 Representative/relevant standards
1.2.5.2 Multiple illumination sources (e.g., 3.2.1 Representative defects for test article
aligning multiple laser diodes) 3.2.2 Representative defects for chosen stressing
1.2.5.3 Parallax correction for camera-to-part method
distance 3.3 Operational validation
28
4.0 Documentation 2.4 Applications

4.1 Introduction to documentation 2.5 Interpretation of example results
4.2 Digital image files
4.2.1 Generic image formats (JPEG, TIFF, BMP, AVI, 3.0 Vacuum (Pressure Reduction) Stressing
MPEG) 3.1 Types of stressing
4.2.2 System specific file types 3.1.1 Vacuum chamber (whole body pressure
4.2.3 Incorporation of images into reports reduction)
4.2.4 File naming and storage (linking images to test 3.1.1.1 Basic premise
part) 3.1.1.2 Basic requirements for effective stressing
4.3 Report writing 3.1.1.3 Potential problems with laminates
3.1.1.4 Reference image capture at reduced
Basic Applications Course pressure versus ambient pressure
3.1.2 Portable single-sided vacuum stressing (vacuum
hood/vacuum windows)
1.0 Basic Image Interpretation
3.1.2.1 Combined single-sided pressure
1.1 Fringe generation (subtraction and phase stepped)
reduction with mechanical stress
1.2 Basic quantitative interpretation of fringes
3.2 Applications
1.2.1 Holography versus shearography (single-lobed
3.3 Interpretation of example results
versus double-lobed indications)
1.3 Wrapped versus unwrapped images
1.4 Common defect types and test results 4.0 Pressurization Stress
1.4.1 Disbonds 4.1 Types of stressing
1.4.2 Crushed core 4.1.1 Increase of decrease in internal pressure of test
1.4.3 Impact damage in solid laminates article
1.5 Depth, indication size, and stressing relationships 4.2 Biaxial strain implications
1.5.1 Fringe growth versus stressing level 4.2.1 Directional sensitivity of shearography (hoop
1.5.2 Number of fringes versus depth for constant size versus axial stress)
defect and fixed stress 4.3 Applications
1.5.3 Number of fringes versus defect size for constant 4.4 Interpretation of example results
depth and fixed stress
1.5.4 Relative rate of growth for varying size defects a 5.0 Vibration Excitation: Acoustic and Mechanical
constant depth 5.1 Basic premise
5.2 Physical contact requirements
2.0 Basic Stressing Methods 5.2.1 Acoustic (noncontact)
2.1 Mechanical loading 5.2.2 Mechanical (contact required)
2.1.1 Point loading 5.3 Frequency range limitation
2.1.2 Load cells or fatigue fixture 5.4 Types of excitation
2.1.3 Single-sided vacuum stressing* 5.4.1 White noise
2.1.4 Applications 5.4.2 Single frequency
2.2 Interpretation of example results 5.4.3 Frequency sweep
2.3 Thermal stressing 5.5 Image processing modes
2.3.1 Basic premise 5.5.1 Phase reversal
2.3.1.1 Thermal expansion effects 5.6 General relationships
2.3.1.2 Effects of internal structures or anomalies 5.6.1 Frequency response versus material stiffness
2.3.1.3 Simple disbond or delamination example 5.6.2 Frequency response versus depth
2.3.2 Thermal stressing sources 5.6.3 Frequency response versus defect size
2.3.2.1 Infrared flash lamps 5.7 Amplitude
2.3.2.2 Conventional heat lamps 5.8 Safety when using high-intensity sound
2.3.2.3 Heat gun 5.9 Applications
2.3.2.4 Cold air generators 5.10 Interpretation of example results
2.3.3 Uniform application of heat
2.3.3.1 Thermal gradient versus equilibrium 6.0 Complex Structures
temperature 6.1 Types of constructions
2.3.4 Basic thermal stressing techniques 6.2 Interpretation of example results
2.3.4.1 Refresh before heat
2.3.4.2 Refresh after heat
2.3.5 Time versus temperature effects
2.3.6 Time versus depth effects
29
Holography/Shearography Level II 4.4 Laser classification based on:

Topical Outline 4.4.1 Pulsed or continuous wave emission
4.4.2 Wavelength
4.4.3 Power
Intermediate Physics Course 4.4.4 Expanded or collimated beam
4.4.4.1 Power density reduction via inverse
1.0 Introduction to Holography and Shearography square law
1.1 Basic premise – looking for subsurface defects and 4.4.5 Extended source or point source
anomalies by observing changes in the surface of a test 4.4.6 Expanding beams – inverse square law
article while it is acted on by an applied stress 4.5 Dangers of intra-beam (collimated) viewing
1.2 Stress/strain relationship of a specific material or 4.6 Dangers of concentrated (magnified) viewing
structure (Young’s modulus) 4.7 Laser system classification
1.3 Difference between holography and shearography 4.7.1 Potential exposure during normal operation and
systems maintenance versus service
4.7.2 Safety during service operations
2.0 Physics of Light 4.7.3 Measurement locations
2.1 Basic wave theory 4.7.4 Aversion response time (blink response)
2.2 White light versus monochromatic light 4.7.5 Enclosures and interlocks
2.3 Coherence and interference 4.8 Rules for the safe use of lasers
2.4 Interferometry 4.9 Keeping laser systems safe
2.4.1 Michelson interferometer example 4.10 Safety requirements for the laboratory
2.4.2 Wavelength of light used as a measuring stick 4.11 Safety requirements for production
4.12 Safety requirements for the workshop or field
3.0 Lasers 4.13 Laser safety officers
3.1 Introduction to lasers 4.14 Additional laser safety references
3.2 Properties of laser light
3.2.1 Practical sources of monochromatic-coherent 5.0 Holography and Speckle Interferometry (Historical
light Development)
3.2.1.1 Coherence length 5.1 Holographic recording process (wave-front recording
3.2.2 High power densities and reconstruction)
3.2.3 Polarized outputs 5.1.1 Stability requirements
3.3 Interference and the formation of laser speckle 5.2 Holography
3.4 Laser speckle and interferometry 5.3 Practical limitations of digital wave front recording
3.5 Speckle interferometry 5.4 Speckle photography and speckle correlation
3.6 Commonly used lasers based on medium (basic 5.5 Speckle interferometry
properties) 5.5.1 Reference beam makes speckle image phase
3.6.1 Solid-state lasers sensitive
3.6.2 Gas lasers 5.6 Digital holography – basic image formation
3.6.3 Ion lasers (correlation/subtraction)
3.6.4 Diode lasers 5.6.1 Stability requirements
3.6.5 DPSS
3.7 Logistics and the choice of lasers 6.0 Digital Holography and Shearography Optics
3.8 Use of multiple laser sources 6.1 Holography camera optics
3.8.1 Multiple beams from single lasers (beam splitting) 6.1.1 Independent reference beam
3.8.2 Independent laser sources (e.g., laser diodes) 6.1.1.1 Beam ratio
3.8.3 Coherence and phase limitations 6.1.2 Sensitive to absolute displacement changes
3.9 Use of fiber optic delivery systems 6.1.3 Single-lobed indications for a simple displacement
6.2 Shearography camera optics
4.0 Laser Safety 6.2.1 Laterally sheared object and reference beams
4.1 Introduction (shearing interferometer)
4.2 Potential dangers 6.2.2 Sensitive to relative displacements between
4.2.1 Eye exposure sheared points on test article
4.2.2 Skin exposure 6.2.3 Double-lobed indications showing first derivative
4.2.3 Potential ignitions source of the displacement
4.2.4 Hazardous material exposure from laser mediums 6.2.3.1 Strain gradient (lines of isostrain)
4.2.5 Hazardous byproducts (e.g., ozone production) 6.3 Shear Vector
4.3 Levels of laser classification 1–4 based on increasing 6.3.1 Relationship between shear distance and camera
level of potential danger shear angle
30
6.3.2Shear distance and system sensitivity 5.0 Speckle Interferometry – Image Processor
6.3.3Common shearing convention and its importance 5.1 Advanced processor adjustment
6.3.4Nominal shear magnitudes 5.2 Advanced post-processing techniques
6.3.5Shear orientation and direction of maximum 5.3 Interface options
sensitivity 5.4 Documentation options
6.3.6 Minimizing effect of part or camera motion
6.3.7 Effect of shear vector orientation on indication 6.0 Stressing Systems, Setup, and Operation
appearance 6.1 Thermal stressing systems
6.4 Types of shearography cameras 6.2 Vacuum inspection systems
6.4.1 Fixed shear 6.3 Pressurization systems
6.4.2 Adjustable shear 6.4 Vibration excitation
6.4.3 Phase stepped
6.5 Phase stepping 7.0 Method Development
6.5.1 Correlation shearography review (subtraction) 7.1 Test standards
6.5.2 Phase stepping defined 7.2 Effective research for optimum defect detection
6.5.3 Image capture 7.3 Representative defect sample/confidence pieces
6.5.4 Phase map creation 7.4 Method format/procedure/technique writing
6.5.5 Phase map advantages
6.5.6 Unwrapped phase maps 8.0 Documentation
6.5.7 Unwrapped phase map advantages 8.1 Digital image file management
8.2 Reporting
7.0 Physics of Materials 8.3 Archiving data
7.1 Stress strain and strain relationship (Young’s modulus)
7.2 Deformation versus strain
7.3 Flat plate deformation equation
Intermediate Applications Course
7.4 Thermal expansion
7.5 Vacuum stressing loads 1.0 Materials and Applications
7.6 Pressurization loads (biaxial strain/axial and hoop) 1.1 Laminates
7.7 Vibrations stressing and resonance 1.2 Honeycombs
1.3 Foam core materials
1.4 Advanced materials
Intermediate Operating Course 1.5 Pressure vessel, piping, and tubing
1.6 Plasma spray and ceramics
1.0 Holography and Shearography Systems 1.7 Bonded metal
1.1 Automated inspection systems
1.2 Tripod-based systems 2.0 Fringe Interpretation
1.3 On vehicle inspections 2.1 Quantitative fringe measurement
2.2 Defect measurement and characterization
2.0 Sources of Noise and Solutions 2.3 Strain measurement
2.1 Stability
2.2 Vibration 3.0 Mechanical Loading
2.3 Thermal currents 3.1 Review of mechanical loading methods
2.4 Air currents 3.2 Applications
3.2.1 Cracks
3.0 Fixturing for Test Parts and Camera Systems 3.2.2 Material weaknesses
3.1 Simple forms 3.2.3 Detection of ply wrinkling
3.1.1 Three-point mounting 3.2.4 Interpretation of results
3.1.2 Use of preloads 3.2.5 Strain gradient versus loading
3.2 Automated system requirements
4.0 Thermal stressing
4.0 Speckle Interferometry Camera 4.1 Review of thermal stressing methods
4.1 Field of view 4.1.1 Time versus temperature thermal gradient
4.2 Resolution versus field of view 4.1.2 Time versus depth
4.3 Focus and iris settings 4.1.3 Multiple image analysis
4.4 Sensitivity versus angles 4.2 Applications
4.5 In-plane and out-of-plane considerations 4.2.1 Delaminations
4.6 Effects of shear orientation 4.2.2 Impact damage
4.7 Specular reflections 4.2.3 Composite repair evaluation
4.2.4 Foreign material
4.3 Interpretation of results – phase change
31
5.0 Vacuum Stressing 1.2 Lasers

5.1 Review of stressing methods 1.2.1 Introduction to lasers
5.1.1 The general purpose method 1.2.2 Properties of laser light
5.1.2 Depth versus fringes 1.2.2.1 Practical sources of monochromatic-
5.2 Applications coherent light
5.2.1 Near-side disbonds 1.2.2.1.1 Coherence length
5.2.2 Far-side disbonds 1.2.2.2 High power densities
5.2.3 Composite repair evaluation 1.2.2.3 Polarized outputs
5.2.4 Delaminations 1.2.3 Interference and the formation of laser speckle
5.3 Interpretations of results 1.2.4 Laser speckle and interferometry
5.3.1 Effects of windows 1.2.5 Speckle interferometry
1.2.6 Commonly used lasers based on medium (basic
6.0 Pressurization Stressing properties)
6.1 Review of pressure stressing methods 1.2.6.1 Solid-state lasers
6.2 Applications 1.2.6.2 Gas lasers
6.2.1 Piping and tubing 1.2.6.3 Ion lasers
6.2.2 Pressure vessels 1.2.6.4 Diode lasers
6.2.3 Aircraft fuselage 1.2.6.5 DPSS
6.3 Interpretation of results 1.2.7 Logistics and the choice of lasers
1.2.8 Use of multiple laser sources
7.0 Vibration Excitation, Mechanical 1.2.8.1 Multiple beams from single lasers (beam
7.1 Review of mechanical vibration excitation methods splitting)
7.1.1 Frequency versus material stiffness 1.2.8.2 Independent laser sources (e.g., laser
7.1.2 Frequency versus material thickness/depth diodes)
7.1.3 Frequency versus defect size 1.2.8.3 Coherence and phase limitations
7.1.4 Amplitude 1.2.9 Use of fiber optic delivery systems
7.1.5 Sweep rate 1.3 Optics
7.1.6 White noise 1.3.1 Holographic optics
7.2 Applications 1.3.2 Shearography optics
7.3 Interpretation of results 1.3.3 Polarization
1.3.4 Filters
8.0 Vibration Excitation, Acoustic 1.4 Material properties
8.1 Review of acoustic vibration excitation methods 1.4.1 Stress/strain Young’s modulus of elasticity
8.1.1 Frequency versus material stiffness 1.4.2 Plate deformation equation
8.1.2 Frequency versus material thickness/depth 1.4.3 Deformation versus strain
8.1.3 Frequency versus defect size 1.4.4 Specular versus diffuse reflections
8.1.4 Amplitude 1.4.5 Transparent coating and translucent materials
8.1.5 Sweep rate 1.4.6 Thermal expansion of materials
8.1.6 White noise 1.4.7 Vacuum stress and out-of-plane strain
8.2 Applications 1.4.8 Pressurization, axial, hoop, and out-of-plane
8.3 Interpretation of results strain
8.4 Safe use of acoustic exciters 1.4.9 Vibration and resonance
1.4.10 Stress relaxation
9.0 Other Stressing Methods
9.1 Review of stress relaxation methods 2.0 Equipment/Materials
9.2 Applications 2.1 Holographic systems
9.3 Interpretations 2.1.1 Fundamentals of holography
2.1.2 Holographic instruments
2.1.3 Interpreting results
Holography/Shearography Level III 2.2 Types of shearography systems
Topical Outline 2.2.1 Image subtraction correlation systems
2.2.2 Phase-stepped systems
1.0 Principles/Theory 2.2.3 Phase-stepped systems with variable reference
1.1 Light 2.2.4 Hybrid systems (e.g., phase reversal, additive
1.1.1 Light and basic wave theory subtractive phase modulation, etc.)
1.1.2 Coherence and inference 2.2.5 Production system examples
1.1.3 Electronic speckle 2.2.6 Automated system examples
1.1.4 Speckle interferometry 2.2.7 Field inspection system examples
32
2.3 Basic setup 3.1.3 Material weakness

2.3.1 Illumination 3.1.4 Ply wrinkling detection
2.3.1.1 Illumination and view of view 3.2 Thermal stressing
2.3.1.2 Laser speckle considerations 3.2.1 Thermal stressing methods
2.3.1.3 In-plane and out-of-plane 3.2.2 Types of thermal energy application
2.3.2 Fixturing 3.2.2.1 Time versus temperature
2.3.2.1 Simple forms 3.2.2.2 Time versus depth
2.3.2.2 Automated system requirements 3.2.3 Substructure
2.3.3 Sensitivity shear vector (in portable systems as 3.2.4 Impact damage
system rotational relationships) 3.2.5 Composite repair evaluation
2.3.3.1 Sensitivity relating to shear magnitude 3.2.6 Foreign material detection
2.3.3.2 Sensitivity relating to shear direction 3.2.7 Near-side defects
2.3.3.3 Sensitivity relation to in-plane/out-of- 3.2.8 Far-side defects
plane strain 3.3 Vacuum Stressing
2.3.4 Sensitivity shear vector (in manual systems and 3.3.1 Ambient pressure reduction (chamber)
automated systems) 3.3.2 Contact vacuum stressing (vacuum hood/window)
2.3.4.1 Sensitivity relating to shear magnitude 3.3.3 Depth versus fringe density
2.3.4.2 Sensitivity relating to shear direction 3.4 Pressurization stressing
2.3.4.3 Sensitivity relation to in-plane/out-of- 3.4.1 Types of stressing
plane strain 3.4.2 Applications
2.3.5 Sources of noise and solutions 3.4.2.1 Piping
2.3.5.1 Stability 3.4.2.2 Composite pressure vessels
2.3.5.2 Vibration 3.4.2.3 Biaxial strain implications
2.3.5.3 Thermal gradients 3.4.2.4 Fuselage (barrel) inspections
2.3.5.4 Air currents 3.4.2.5 Control surfaces
2.3.5.5 Shear vector settings 3.5 Vibration stressing
2.4 Instrument settings 3.5.1 Mechanical vibration (MECAD)
2.4.1 Focus 3.5.1.1 Applications
2.4.2 Iris settings 3.5.1.2 Interpretation of results
2.4.3 Shear optics and vector 3.5.2 Acoustic vibrations (ACAD)
2.4.4 Sensitivity versus shear vector 3.5.2.1 Applications
2.4.5 Effects of shear orientation 3.5.2.2 Interpretations
2.4.6 Aligning illumination and camera axis 3.5.3 Common excitation considerations
2.4.7 Field of view (FOV) 3.5.3.1 Frequency versus material stiffness
2.4.8 Resolution versus FOV 3.5.3.2 Frequency versus material thickness/depth
2.4.9 Phase stepping 3.5.3.3 Frequency versus defect size
2.4.9.1 Single reference systems 3.5.3.4 Amplitude
2.4.9.2 Multiple reference systems 3.5.3.5 Sweep rate
2.4.10 Reflections 3.5.3.6 White noise
2.5 Measurement standardization 3.5.3.7 Phase reversal
2.5.1 Mapping screen resolution to inspection area 3.6 Other stressing methods
2.5.1.1 Defining pixels/unit distance 3.6.1 Stress relaxation
2.5.2 Accounting for shear vector when making 3.6.2 Tensile stressing how is this applicable
measurements
2.5.3 Manual video scale and shear standardization 4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
2.5.4 Automatic video scale and shear standardization 4.1 Fringe interpretation
via spot projection 4.2 Double-lobed fringe set
2.5.5 Video scale and shear measurement limitations 4.3 Shear orientation effects
2.6 Phase-step standardization 4.4 Strain concentrations
2.7 Advanced settings 4.5 Defect sizing
2.8 Image processing 4.6 Strain measurement
2.8.1 Image formation techniques 4.7 In-plane/out-of-plane considerations
2.8.2 Advanced post-processing
2.8.3 Effects of processing 5.0 Procedures
5.1 Documentation
3.0 Stressing Methods and Example Applications 5.1.1 Digital file management
3.1 Mechanical loading 5.1.2 Reporting
3.1.1 Cracks 5.1.3 Post-processing
3.1.2 Revealing substructure 5.1.4 Data extraction
33
5.1.5 Archiving data 7.2.1.3.2 Foam cores

5.1.6 Developing procedures 7.2.1.3.3 Other core material
5.2 Guideline standards 7.2.1.4 Advanced materials
5.3 Standardized procedures 7.2.1.5 Bonded metal
5.4 User-developed standards 7.2.2 Marine applications
5.5 Interpretation of codes, standards, and procedures 7.2.2.1 Solid laminates
5.6 Responsibilities of a Level III 7.2.2.2 Sandwich structures
5.7 Responsibilities as an external Level III 7.2.2.3 Ply dropoff
5.8 Training and examining Level I and Level II NDT 7.2.2.4 Bulkhead detection
personnel 7.2.2.5 Repair evaluation
7.2.3 Tire inspection
6.0 Laser Safety 7.2.3.1 Equipment
6.1 Introduction 7.2.3.2 Fault detection
6.2 Potential dangers 7.2.4 Encapsulated microcircuit leak detection
6.2.1 Eye exposure 7.2.4.1 Leak rate
6.2.2 Skin exposure 7.2.4.2 Volume
6.2.3 Potential ignitions source 7.2.5 Civil engineering applications
6.2.4 Hazardous material exposure from laser mediums 7.2.5.1 Composite reinforcement
6.2.5 Hazardous byproducts (e.g., ozone production) 7.2.5.2 Insulation panel inspection
6.3 Levels of laser classification 1–4 based on increasing 7.2.6 Complex structures
level of potential danger 7.2.6.1 Types of construction
6.4 Laser classification based on: 7.2.6.2 Interpretation of results
6.4.1 Pulsed or continuous wave emission
6.4.2 Wavelength Holography/Shearography Level I, II, and
6.4.3 Power
6.4.4 Expanded or collimated beam
III Training References
ASNT, 2012, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 10:
6.4.4.1 Power density reduction via inverse
Nondestructive Testing Overview, third edition, American Society
square law
for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
6.4.5 Extended source or point source
6.4.6 Expanding beams – inverse square law ASNT, 1995, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 9: Special
6.5 Dangers of intra-beam (collimated) viewing Nondestructive Testing Methods, second edition, American Society
6.6 Dangers of concentrated (magnified) viewing for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
6.7 Laser system classification
6.7.1 Potential exposure during normal operation and ASNT, 2014, ASNT Industry Handbook: Aerospace NDT,
maintenance versus service American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus,
6.7.2 Safety during service operations OH.*
6.7.3 Measurement locations
ASTM, 2014, ASTM E2581-15 Standard Practice for Shearography
6.7.4 Aversion response time (blink response)
of Polymer Matrix Composites and Sandwich Core Materials in
6.7.5 Enclosures and interlocks
Aerospace Applications, ASTM International, West Conshohocken,
6.8 Rules for the safe use of lasers
PA.
6.9 Keeping laser systems safe
6.10 Safety requirements for the laboratory ASTM, 2015, ASTM E2981-15 Standard Guide for Nondestructive
6.11 Safety requirements for production Testing of the Composite Overwrap in Filament Wound Pressure
6.12 Safety requirements for the workshop or field Vessels Used in Aerospace Applications, ASTM International, West
6.13 Laser safety officers Conshohocken, PA.
6.14 Additional laser safety references
Gabor, D., 1949, “Microscopy by Reconstructed Wavefronts,”
7.0 Applications Proceedings of the Royal Society, London.
7.1 Holography applications
Hung, Y., 1982, “Shearography: A New Optical Method for Strain
7.1.1 Felt metal
Measurement and Nondestructive Testing,” Optical Engineering,
7.1.2 Plasma bonding
Vol. 21, pp. 391–395.
7.1.3 Other inspections
7.2 Shearography applications Hung, Y., 1999, “Applications of Digital Shearography for
7.2.1 Aerospace applications Composite Materials,” Composites Part B: Engineering, Vol. 30,
7.2.1.1 Composite materials No. 7, pp. 765–773.
7.2.1.2 Laminates
7.2.1.3 Sandwich constructions
7.2.1.3.1 Honeycomb
34
Johnston, S., 2006, Holographic Visions, Oxford University Press, Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry
Oxford. Level II Topical Outline
Leith, E., and J. Upatnieks, 1964, “Wavefront Reconstruction with
Diffused Illumination and Three Dimensional Objects,” Journal of 1.0 Introduction
the Optical Society of America, Vol. 54, No. 11, pp. 1295–1301. 1.1 Purpose for laser methods and laser profilometry
1.2 Review of basic principles of laser profilometry
Lui, Z., et al., 2011, “NDT Capability of Digital Shearography for 1.3 Benefits and limitations of laser profilometry
Different Materials,” Optics and Lasers in Engineering, Vol. 49, 1.4 Responsibilities of Level II laser profilometry examiner
No. 12, pp. 1462–1469. 1.5 Limitations of Level II laser profilometry examiner
Nakadata, S., 1988, “Phase Detection of Equidistant Fringes for
Highly Sensitive Optical Sensing,” Journal of the Optical Society of 2.0 Laser Safety
America A, Vol. 5, No. 8, pp. 1265–1269. 2.1 Types laser types
2.2 Laser classifications
Newman, J., and J. Lindberg, 2010, “Laser Shearography of Wind 2.3 Laser safety equipment
Turbine Blades,” Materials Evaluation, Vol. 68, No. 7, 2.4 Precautions for safe laser operation
pp. 828–837. 2.5 Regulations and governing organizations
Prescott, J., 1961, Applied Elasticity, Dover, New York, NY. 3.0 Intermediate Theory of Profilometry
3.1 Optical triangulation
* Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., 3.2 Lasers
Columbus OH. 3.2.1 Gas lasers
3.2.2 Diode lasers
3.3 Lenses and optical filters
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry 3.4 Photodetectors
Level I Topical Outline 3.4.1 Charge-coupled devices (CCDs)
3.4.2 Lateral effect photodetectors
1.0 Introduction 3.5 Basic signal processing
1.1 Brief history of NDT and laser methods (LM) 3.6 Calibration
1.2 Purpose for laser profilometry
1.3 Benefits and limitations of laser profilometry 4.0 Conducting Laser Profilometric Inspection
4.1 Equipment selection and setup
2.0 Lasers and Laser Safety 4.2 Environmental considerations
2.1 Introduction to lasers 4.2.1 Test material
2.2 Laser classifications 4.2.2 Dust and other contamination
2.3 Basic laser safety 4.2.3 Humidity and moisture
2.4 Precautions for safe laser operation 4.2.4 Power considerations
2.5 Definitions 4.3 Standardization
4.3.1 When to standardize
3.0 Theory of Laser Profilometry 4.3.2 Factors that affect standardization
3.1 Introduction to basic optical triangulation 4.4 Acquiring and saving inspection results
3.2 Photodetectors
3.3 Calibration 5.0 Evaluation of Indications
5.1 General
4.0 Laser Profilometry 5.1.1 Flaws in various materials
4.1 Preparation of test parts 5.1.2 Overview of typical causes of flaws in materials
4.2 Environmental considerations and limitations 5.1.3 Appearance of flaws
4.3 System setup 5.1.4 Nonflaw-related indication
4.4 Instrument standardization 5.2 Factors affecting quality of inspection results
4.5 Data acquisition 5.2.1 Condition/cleanliness of test component surface
4.6 Data storage 5.2.2 Reflectivity of test component surface
5.2.3 Sharp corners/glints
5.0 Introduction to Data Processing and Analysis 5.2.4 Signal too high/too low
5.1 Confirming quality of inspection results
5.2 Basic interpretation of test results 6.0 Inspection Procedures and Standards
5.3 Data storage and archival 6.1 Inspection procedures and specifications
6.2 Standards
6.3 Codes
35
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry 5.6 Equipment selection and standardization

Level III Topical Outline 5.6.1 Equipment
5.6.2 Standardization equipment
1.0 Introduction 5.6.2.1 When to standardize
1.1 Purpose for laser methods and laser profilometry 5.6.2.2 Factors that affect standardization quality
1.2 Responsibilities of Level III laser profilometry examiner
1.3 Limitations of Level III laser profilometry examiner 6.0 Evaluation of Indications
6.1 General
2.0 Knowledge of Other Basic NDT methods 6.1.1 Flaws in various materials
2.1 Advantages and limitations of each method 6.1.2 Overview of typical causes of flaws in materials
2.2 Applications well suited to laser profilometry 6.1.3 Appearance of flaws
2.3 Test methods that complement laser profilometry 6.1.4 Nonflaw-related indication
6.2 Factors affecting quality of inspection results
3.0 Laser Safety 6.3 Indications
3.1 Laser classifications 6.3.1 Internal pitting and corrosion
3.1.1 Laser power calculation 6.3.2 Cracks
3.1.2 Calculating laser classification 6.3.3 Erosion
3.2 Precautions and equipment for safe laser operation 6.3.4 Other
3.3 Regulations and governing organizations 6.4 False indications
3.3.1 Laser product user 6.5 Interpreting and sizing indications
3.3.2 Laser product manufacturer 6.6 Confirming inspection results
4.0 Codes, Standards, Specifications, and Procedures 7.0 Reporting Inspection Results
4.1 Interpreting codes, standards, and specifications
4.2 Establishing techniques, procedures, and acceptance 8.0 Training Level I and II Personnel for Certification
criteria
Laser Methods Testing – Profilometry,
5.0 Advanced Theory of Profilometry Level I, II, and III Training References
5.1 Basic laser physics ANSI, latest edition, ANSI Z-136.1: American National Standard
5.2 Diode lasers for the Safe Use of Lasers, Laser Institute of America, Orlando, FL.
5.2.1 Continuous wave/pulsed operation
5.2.2 Laser beam “footprint” ASNT, 1995, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 9: Special
5.2.3 Matching lasers and detectors Nondestructive Testing Methods, second edition, Section 3, Part 4,
5.3 Basic optics and optical triangulation “Laser-based Profilometry Using Point Triangulation,” American
5.3.1 Snell’s law Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus OH.*
5.3.2 Scheimpflug condition
5.3.3 Optical design considerations Bickel, G., G. Hausler, and M. Maul, 1985, “Triangulation with
5.4 Photodetectors Expanded Range of Depth,” Optical Engineering, Vol. 24, No. 6,
5.4.1 CCD pp. 975–977.
5.4.2 Lateral effect photodetectors Owen, R., and M. Awscock, 1968, “One and Two Dimensional
5.4.3 Benefits and limitations of photodetectors Position Sensitive Photodetectors,” IEEE Transactions on Electron
5.5 Signal processing Devices, Vol. ED-21, No. 3, pp. 290–297.

Inc., Columbus, OH.
36
LT
Leak Testing Topical Outlines
Leak Testing Level I Topical Outline 2.6 Vacuum fundamentals

2.6.1 Introduction to vacuum
Fundamentals in Leak Testing Course 2.6.1.1 Terminology
2.6.1.2 Principles
2.6.1.3 Units of pressure
1.0 Introduction
2.6.2 Characteristics of gases
1.1 History of leak testing (LT)
2.6.2.1 Kinetic theory
1.2 Reasons for LT
2.6.2.2 Mean free path
1.2.1 Material loss prevention
2.6.3 Gas laws
1.2.2 Contamination
2.6.4 Quantity, throughput, and conductance of gas
1.2.3 Component/system reliability
2.6.4.1 Quantity
1.2.4 Pressure-differential maintenance
2.6.4.1.1 Comparison with an electric
1.2.5 Personnel/public safety
circuit
1.3 Functions of LT
2.6.4.1.2 Comparison with water flow
1.3.1 Categories
2.6.4.2 Conductance analogy with electrical
1.3.2 Applications
resistance
1.4 Training and certification
2.6.4.2.1 Resistance connected in series
2.6.4.2.2 Resistance connected in parallel
2.0 LT Fundamentals 2.7 Vacuum system operation
2.1 Terminology 2.7.1 Effects of evacuating a vessel
2.1.1 Leakage terms 2.7.2 Pump-down time
2.1.2 Leakage tightness 2.8 Vacuum system characteristics
2.1.3 Quantitative/semi-quantitative 2.8.1 General
2.1.4 Sensitivity/calibration and standardization terms 2.8.1.1 Operating limits
2.2 LT units 2.8.1.2 Rate of pressure rise – measurement
2.2.1 Mathematics in LT 2.8.2 Vacuum pumps
2.2.2 Exponential notation 2.8.2.1 Mechanical pumps (positive displacement)
2.2.3 Basic and fundamental units 2.8.2.1.1 Oil-sealed rotary pumps
2.2.4 The International System of Units (SI) 2.8.2.1.1.1 Construction
2.3 Physical units in LT 2.8.2.1.1.2 Operation
2.3.1 Volume and pressure 2.8.2.1.1.3 Pump fluids
2.3.2 Time and temperature 2.8.2.1.1.4 Difficulties with
2.3.3 Absolute values rotary pumps
2.3.4 Standard or atmospheric conditions 2.8.2.1.1.5 Care of rotary
2.3.5 Leakage measurement pumps
2.4 LT standards 2.8.2.1.2 Mechanical booster pumps
2.4.1 Capillary or permeation 2.8.2.2 Vapor (diffusion) pumps
2.4.2 National Institute of Standards and Technology 2.8.2.2.1 Construction
(NIST) standards 2.8.2.2.2 Operation
2.4.3 System calibration versus instrument 2.8.2.2.3 Pump fluids
standardization 2.8.2.2.4 Difficulties with diffusion pumps
2.4.4 Inaccuracy of calibration 2.8.2.2.5 Diagnosis of diffusion pump
2.5 Flow characteristics trouble
2.5.1 Gas flow 2.8.2.3 Sublimation pumps (getter pumps)
2.5.2 Liquid flow 2.8.2.4 Ion pumps
2.5.3 Correlation of leakage rates 2.8.2.5 Turbomolecular pumps
2.5.4 Anomalous leaks 2.8.2.6 Absorption pumps
2.5.5 Leak clogging 2.8.2.7 Cryopumps
37
Safety in Leak Testing Course 1.1.2 Ultrasonic testing

1.1.2.1 Sonic/mechanical flow
Note: It is recommended that the trainee, as well as all other 1.1.2.2 Sound generator
LT personnel, receive instruction in this course prior to per- 1.1.3 Voltage discharge testing
forming work in LT. 1.1.3.1 Voltage spark
1.1.3.2 Color change
1.0 Safety Considerations 1.1.4 Pressure testing
1.1 Personnel and the public 1.1.4.1 Hydrostatic
1.2 Product serviceability 1.1.4.2 Pneumatic
1.3 Test validity 1.1.5 Ionization
1.4 Safe work practices 1.1.5.1 Photoionization
1.1.5.2 Flame ionization
2.0 Safety Precautions 1.1.6 Conductivity
2.1 Explosive/implosive hazards 1.1.6.1 Thermal conductivity
2.2 Flammability, ignitibility, combustibility hazards 1.1.6.2 Solid-state
2.3 Toxicity and asphyxiation hazards 1.1.7 Radiation absorption
2.4 Cleaning and electrical hazards 1.1.7.1 Infrared
1.1.7.2 Ultraviolet
3.0 Pressure Precautions 1.1.7.3 Laser
3.1 Pressure test versus proof test 1.1.8 Chemical-based
3.2 Preliminary LT 1.1.8.1 Chemical penetrants
3.3 Pressurization check 1.1.8.2 Chemical gas tracer (colorimetric)
3.4 Design limitations 1.1.9 Halogen detector
3.5 Equipment and setup 1.1.9.1 Halide torch
1.1.9.2 Electron capture
4.0 Safety Devices 1.1.9.3 Halogen diode leak testing
4.1 Pressure control valves and regulators 1.1.10 Pressure change leak testing
4.2 Pressure relief valves and vents 1.1.10.1 Absolute
4.3 Flow rate of regulator and relief valves 1.1.10.2 Reference
1.1.10.3 Pressure rise
5.0 Hazardous and Tracer Gas Safety 1.1.10.4 Flow
5.1 Combustible gas detection and safety 1.1.10.5 Pressure decay
5.2 Toxic gas detection and safety 1.1.10.6 Volumetric
5.3 Oxygen-deficiency detectors 1.1.11 Mass spectrometer leak testing
5.4 Radioisotope detection 1.1.11.1 Helium or argon leak detector
1.1.11.2 Residual gas analyzer
1.1.12 Radioisotope
6.0 Types of Monitoring Equipment
6.1 Area monitors
6.2 Personnel monitors 2.0 LT Method Course Outline
6.3 Leak-locating devices 2.1 The following may be applied to any of the listed
methods
2.2 Terminology
7.0 Safety Regulations
2.3 Basic techniques and/or units
7.1 State and federal regulations
2.3.1 Leak location – measurement/monitoring
7.2 Safety codes/standards
2.3.2 Visual and other sensing devices
7.3 Hazardous gas standards
2.3.3 Various techniques
7.4 Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) radiation
2.4 Testing materials and equipment
requirements
2.4.1 Materials, gases/fluids used
2.4.2 Control devices and operation
Leak Testing Methods Course 2.4.3 Instrument/gauges used
2.4.4 Range and standardization of instrument/gauges
1.0 The following LT methods may be incorporated as 2.5 Testing principles and practices
applicable. 2.5.1 Pressure/vacuum and control used
1.1 Each of these methods can be further divided into major 2.5.2 Principles of techniques used
techniques as shown in the following examples 2.5.3 Effects of temperature and other atmospheric
1.1.1 Bubble leak testing conditions
1.1.1.1 Immersion 2.5.4 Standardization for testing
1.1.1.2 Film solution 2.5.5 Probing/scanning or measurement/monitoring
2.5.6 Leak interpretation evaluation
38
2.6 Acceptance and rejection criteria 2.1.2 Volume and pressure

2.7 Safety concerns 2.1.3 Time and temperature
2.8 Advantages and limitations 2.1.4 Absolute values
2.9 Codes/standards 2.1.5 Standard versus atmospheric conditions
2.1.6 Leakage rates
2.2 Structure of matter
Leak Testing Level II Topical Outline 2.2.1 Atomic theory
2.2.2 Ionization and ion pairs
Principles of Leak Testing Course 2.2.3 States of matter
2.2.4 Molecular structure
1.0 Introduction 2.2.5 Diatomic and monatomic molecules
1.1 LT fundamentals 2.2.6 Molecular weight
1.1.1 Reasons for LT 2.3 Gas principles and laws
1.1.2 Functions of LT 2.3.1 Brownian movement
1.1.3 Terminology 2.3.2 Mean free path
1.1.4 LT units 2.3.3 Pressure and temperature effects on gases
1.1.5 Leak conductance 2.3.4 Pascal’s law of pressure
1.2 LT standards 2.3.5 Charles’ and Boyle’s gas laws
1.2.1 Leak standards 2.3.6 Ideal gas law
1.2.2 NIST traceability and calibration 2.3.7 Dalton’s law of partial pressure
1.2.3 Instrument standardization versus test 2.3.8 Vapor pressure and effects in vacuum
qualification 2.4 Gas properties
1.2.4 System calibration techniques 2.4.1 Kinetic theory of gases
1.2.5 Inaccuracy of calibration 2.4.2 Graham law of diffusion
1.2.6 Tracer-gas leak rate/air-equivalent leak rate 2.4.3 Stratification
1.3 LT safety 2.4.4 Avogadro’s principle
1.3.1 Safety considerations 2.4.5 Gas law relationship
1.3.2 Safety precautions 2.4.6 General ideal gas law
1.3.3 Pressure precautions 2.4.7 Gas mixture and concentration
1.3.4 Tracer-gas safety and monitoring 2.4.8 Gas velocity, density, and viscosity
1.3.5 Safety devices
1.3.6 Cleaning and electrical hazards 3.0 Principles of Gas Flow
1.3.7 Safe work practices 3.1 Standard leaks
1.3.8 Safety regulations 3.1.1 Capillary
1.4 LT procedure 3.1.2 Permeation
1.4.1 Basic categories and techniques 3.2 Modes of gas flow
1.4.2 Leak location versus leakage measurement 3.2.1 Molecular and viscous
1.4.3 Pressurization or evacuation 3.2.2 Transitional
1.4.4 Sealed units with or without tracer gas 3.2.3 Laminar, turbulent, sonic
1.4.5 Units inaccessible from one or both sides 3.3 Factors affecting gas flow
1.4.6 System at, above, or below atmospheric pressure 3.4 Geometry of leakage path
1.5 LT specifications 3.4.1 Mean free flow of fluid
1.5.1 Design versus working conditions 3.4.2 Clogging and check valve effects
1.5.2 Pressure and temperature control 3.4.3 Irregular aperture size
1.5.3 Types of LT methods 3.4.4 Leak rate versus cross section of flow
1.5.4 Sensitivity of LT methods 3.4.5 Temperature and atmospheric conditions
1.5.5 Test method and sensitivity needed 3.4.6 Velocity gradient versus viscosity
1.5.6 Preparation of an LT specification 3.4.7 Reynolds number versus Knudsen number
1.6 Detector/instrument performance factors
1.6.1 Design and use
Pressure and Vacuum Technology Course
1.6.2 Accuracy and precision
1.6.3 Linearity (straight/logarithmic scale)
1.6.4 Calibration and standardization frequency 1.0 Pressure Technology
1.6.5 Response and recovery time 1.1 Properties of a fluid
1.1.1 What is a fluid?
1.1.2 Liquid versus gas
2.0 Physical Principles in LT
1.1.3 Compressibility
2.1 Physical quantities
1.1.4 Partial and vapor pressure
2.1.1 Fundamental units
1.1.5 Critical pressure and temperature
39
1.1.6 Viscosity of a liquid 2.2.3 Mechanical gauges

1.1.7 Surface tension and capillarity of a liquid 2.2.3.1 Bourdon or diaphragm
1.2 Gas properties 2.2.3.2 Manometer (U-tube or McLeod)
1.2.1 Review of gas properties 2.2.3.3 Capacitance manometer
1.2.2 What is a perfect/ideal gas? 2.2.4 Electrical gauges
1.2.3 Pressure and temperature effects on gases 2.2.4.1 Thermal conductivity
1.2.4 Viscosity of a gas 2.2.4.2 Ionization
1.2.5 Gas flow modes 2.2.5 Gauge calibration – full range
1.2.6 Gas flow conductance 2.3 Vacuum pumps
1.2.7 Dynamic flow measurements 2.3.1 Types of vacuum pumps
1.2.8 Factors affecting gas flow 2.3.2 Mechanical pumps
1.3 Pressurization 2.3.2.1 Reciprocating versus rotary
1.3.1 Pressure measurements 2.3.2.2 Roots, turbomolecular, drag pumps
1.3.2 Types of pressure gauges 2.3.3 Nonmechanical pumps
1.3.2.1 Bourdon or diaphragm 2.3.3.1 Fluid entrainment or diffusion
1.3.2.2 Manometers 2.3.3.2 Condensation or sorption
1.3.3 Pressure control and procedure 2.3.4 Pump oils
1.3.4 Mixing of gases 2.3.5 Pumping speed and pump-down time
1.3.5 Tracer gases and concentration 2.4 Vacuum materials
1.3.6 Pressure hold time 2.4.1 Outgassing – vapor pressure
1.3.7 Pressure versus sensitivity 2.4.2 Elastomers, gaskets, O-rings
1.3.8 Gauge calibration 2.4.3 Metals, metal alloys and nonmetals
1.3.8.1 Working range 2.4.3.1 Carbon steel versus stainless steel
1.3.8.2 Frequency 2.4.3.2 Aluminum, copper, nickel, and alloys
1.3.8.3 Master gauge versus dead-weight tester 2.4.4 Nonmetals
1.4 LT background/noise variables 2.4.4.1 Glass, ceramics
1.4.1 Atmospheric changes 2.4.4.2 Plastics, tygon, etc.
1.4.2 Liquid/air temperature correction 2.4.5 Joint design
1.4.3 Vapor pressure (evaporation/condensation) 2.4.5.1 Sealed joint
1.4.4 Vapor/moisture pockets 2.4.5.2 Welded/brazed joint
1.4.5 Geometry/volume changes 2.4.5.3 Mechanical joint
1.4.6 Surface/internal vibration waves 2.4.6 Vacuum greases and sealing materials
1.5 Detector/instrument performance variables 2.4.7 Tracer gas permeation through materials
1.5.1 Instrument standardization variables 2.5 Design of a vacuum system
1.5.2 Limits of accuracy 2.5.1 Production of a vacuum
1.5.3 Intrinsic and inherent safety performance 2.5.1.1 Removal of gas molecules
1.5.4 Protection for electromagnetic interference, 2.5.1.2 Gas quantity or throughput
radio-frequency interference, shock, etc. 2.5.1.3 Conductance
1.5.5 Flooding, poisoning, contamination 2.5.2 Stages of vacuum pumping
1.6 Measurement and data documentation 2.5.2.1 Various vacuum pumps
1.6.1 Experimental, simulation and/or preliminary 2.5.2.2 Various traps and baffles
testing 2.5.2.3 Pumping stages or sequences
1.6.2 Analysis of background/noise variables 2.5.3 Vacuum valve location
1.6.3 Analysis of leakage indications/signals 2.5.3.1 Vacuum valve design and seat leakage
1.6.4 Validation and error analysis 2.5.3.2 Isolation and protection
1.6.5 Interpretation and evaluation of results 2.5.3.3 Automatic versus manual
1.6.6 Documentation of data and test results 2.5.3.4 Venting
2.6 Maintenance and cleanliness
2.0 Vacuum Technology 2.6.1 Maintenance of vacuum equipment
2.1 Nature of vacuum 2.6.1.1 Under constant vacuum
2.1.1 What is a vacuum? 2.6.1.2 Dry gas (nitrogen)
2.1.2 Vacuum terminology 2.6.2 Routing oil changes
2.1.3 Degrees of vacuum 2.6.3 System cleanliness
2.1.4 Mean free path in a vacuum 2.6.3.1 Initial cleanliness
2.1.5 Gas flow in a vacuum 2.6.3.2 Cleaning procedures and effects on leak
2.2 Vacuum measurement location and measurement
2.2.1 Pressure units in a vacuum 2.6.3.3 Continued cleanliness
2.2.2 Absolute versus gauge pressure
40
2.7 Analysis and documentation 1.1.4.7 Gas mixture and concentration

2.7.1 Analysis of outgassing and background 1.1.4.8 Gas velocity, density, and viscosity
contamination 1.2 Principles of gas flow
2.7.2 Instrument standardization/system calibration 1.2.1 Standard leaks
2.7.3 Analysis of leakage indications/signals 1.2.1.1 Capillary
2.7.4 Interpretation and evaluation 1.2.1.2 Permeation
2.7.5 Documentation of standardization and test results 1.2.2 Modes of gas flow
1.2.2.1 Molecular and viscous
Leak Test Selection Course 1.2.2.2 Transitional
1.2.2.3 Laminar, turbulent, sonic
1.2.3 Factors affecting gas flow
1.0 Choice of LT Procedure
1.2.4 Geometry of leakage path
1.1. Basic categories of LT
1.2.4.1 Mean free flow of fluid
1.1.1 Leak location
1.2.4.2 Clogging and check valve effects
1.1.2 Leakage measurement
1.2.4.3 Irregular aperture size
1.1.3 Leakage monitoring
1.2.4.4 Leak rate versus viscosity
1.2 Types of LT methods
1.2.4.5 Temperature and atmospheric conditions
1.2.1 Specifications
1.2.4.6 Velocity gradient versus viscosity
1.2.2 Sensitivity
1.2.4.7 Reynolds number versus Knudsen
1.3 Basic techniques
number
1.3.1 Pressurization or evacuation
1.2.5 Principles of mass spectrometer testing
1.3.2 Sealed unit with or without tracer gases
1.2.5.1 Vacuum and pressure technology
1.3.3 Probing or visual leak location
1.2.5.2 Outgassing of materials versus pressure
1.3.4 Tracer or detector probing
1.2.5.3 Vacuum pumping technology
1.3.5 Accumulation techniques
1.3 Proper selection of LT as method of choice
1.3.1 Differences between LT and other methods
Leak Testing Level III Topical Outline 1.3.2 Complementary roles of LT and other methods
1.3.3 Potential for conflicting results between methods
1.0 Principles/Theory 1.3.4 Factors that qualify/disqualify the use of LT
1.1 Physical principles in LT
1.1.1 Physical quantities 2.0 Equipment/Material
1.1.1.1 Fundamental units 2.1 LT standards
1.1.1.2 Volume and pressure 2.1.1 Capillary or permeation
1.1.1.3 Time and temperature 2.1.2 NIST standards
1.1.1.4 Absolute values 2.1.3 System calibration versus instrument
1.1.1.5 Standard versus atmospheric conditions standardization
1.1.1.6 Leakage rates 2.1.4 Inaccuracy of calibration
1.1.2 Structure of matter 2.2 Detector/instrument performance factors
1.1.2.1 Atomic theory 2.2.1 Design and use
1.1.2.2 Ionization and ion pairs 2.2.2 Accuracy and precision
1.1.2.3 States of matter 2.2.3 Linearity (straight/logarithmic scale)
1.1.2.4 Molecular structure 2.2.4 Calibration and standardization frequency
1.1.2.5 Diatomic and monatomic molecules 2.2.5 Response and recovery time
1.1.2.6 Molecular weight 2.3 Vacuum pumps
1.1.3 Gas principles and law 2.3.1 Mechanical pumps (positive displacement)
1.1.3.1 Brownian movement 2.3.1.1 Oil-sealed rotary pumps
1.1.3.2 Mean free path 2.3.1.1.1 Construction
1.1.3.3 Pressure and temperature effects on gases 2.3.1.1.2 Operation
1.1.3.4 Pascal’s law of pressure 2.3.1.1.3 Pump fluid
1.1.3.5 Charles’ and Boyles’ laws 2.3.1.1.4 Difficulties with rotary pumps
1.1.3.6 Ideal gas law 2.3.1.1.5 Care of rotary pumps
1.1.3.7 Dalton’s law of partial pressure 2.3.1.2 Vapor (diffusion) pumps
1.1.3.8 Vapor pressure and effects in vacuum 2.3.1.2.1 Construction
1.1.4 Gas properties 2.3.1.2.2 Operation
1.1.4.1 Kinetic theory of gases 2.3.1.2.3 Pump fluid
1.1.4.2 Graham law of diffusion 2.3.1.2.4 Diagnosis of diffusion pump
1.1.4.3 Stratification troubles
1.1.4.4 Avogadro’s principle 2.3.1.3 Sublimation pumps (getter pumps)
1.1.4.5 Gas law relationship 2.3.1.4 Ion pumps
1.1.4.6 General ideal gas law 2.3.1.5 Turbomolecular pumps
41
2.3.1.6 Absorption pumps 3.3 Halogen detector leak testing

2.3.1.7 Cryopumps 3.3.1 Principles of halogen detector leak testing
2.4 Bubble leak testing practices and techniques 3.3.2 Terminology related to halogen detector leak
2.4.1 Solutions testing
2.4.2 Solution applicators 3.3.3 Calibration of detectors for testing
2.4.3 Vacuum boxes 3.3.3.1 Standard leak settings
2.5 Absolute pressure testing equipment 3.3.3.2 Halogen mixture percentages
2.5.1 Pressure measuring instruments 3.3.3.3 Detection sensitivity versus test sensitivity
2.5.2 Temperature measuring instruments 3.3.4 Halogen detector probe “sniffer” testing
2.5.3 Dew point measuring instruments techniques and practices
2.5.4 Accuracy of equipment 3.3.4.1 Detector probe “sniffer” speed
2.5.5 Calibration of equipment 3.3.4.2 Halogen background
2.5.6 Reference panel instruments 3.3.4.3 Effects of heat on refrigerant R-12
2.5.7 Reference system installation and testing 3.3.5 Halogen leak detector operation and servicing
2.6 Absolute pressure hold testing of containers 3.3.5.1 Operation of the probe
2.6.1 Equation for determining pressure change 3.3.5.2 Replacing the sensing element
2.6.2 Temperature measuring 3.3.5.3 Cleaning the sensing element
2.7 Absolute pressure leakage rate testing of containers 3.4 Mass spectrometer leak testing
2.7.1 Equation(s) for determining percent loss 3.4.1 Terminology related to mass spectrometer leak
2.7.2 Positioning of temperature and dew point sensors testing
for mean sampling accuracy 3.4.2 Helium mass spectrometer
2.7.3 Analysis of temperature and dew point data 3.4.2.1 Operation
2.8 Analysis of data for determination of accurate results 3.4.2.2 Standardization
2.9 Halogen detector leak testing equipment 3.4.2.3 Maintenance
2.9.1 Leak detector control unit 3.4.3 Helium mass spectrometer pressure leak testing
2.9.2 Gun detectors 3.4.3.1 Detector probe “sniffer” techniques
2.9.3 Standard leaks 3.4.3.2 Mixture percentage
2.9.4 Refrigerant tracer gases 3.4.3.3 Pressure differential techniques
2.10 Helium mass spectrometer testing equipment 3.4.3.4 Bagging-accumulation techniques
2.10.1 Mechanical vacuum pump systems 3.4.3.5 Standardization of helium mass
2.10.2 Cryogenic pumps spectrometer for “sniffer” testing
2.10.3 Diffusion pumps 3.4.4 Helium mass spectrometer vacuum testing by
2.10.4 Vacuum gauges dynamic method
2.10.5 Vacuum hose 3.4.4.1 Tracer probing
2.10.6 Vacuum valves 3.4.4.2 Bagging or hooding
2.10.7 Standard leaks 3.4.4.3 System calibration
2.10.8 Vacuum sealing compounds 3.4.4.4 Helium mixture
2.10.9 Vacuum connectors 3.4.4.5 Calculation of leakage rate
2.10.10 Detector “sniffer” probes 3.4.5 Helium mass spectrometer vacuum testing by
2.10.11 Tracer probes static method
3.4.5.1 Static equation
3.0 Techniques/Standardization and Calibration 3.4.5.2 System standardization
3.1 Bubble leak testing 3.4.5.3 Helium mixture
3.1.1 Bubble leak testing practices and techniques 3.4.5.4 System pressure
3.1.1.1 Vacuum box testing 3.4.5.5 Calculation of leakage rate
3.1.1.2 Pipe, nozzle, and pad plate testing
3.1.1.3 Vessel testing 4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
3.1.1.4 Weather effects and lighting 4.1 Basic techniques and/or units
3.2 Pressure change leak testing 4.1.1 Leak location-measurement/monitoring
3.2.1 Absolute pressure leak test and reference system test 4.1.2 Visual and other sensing devices
3.2.1.1 Principles of absolute pressure testing 4.1.3 Various techniques
3.2.1.1.1 General gas law equation 4.2 Test materials and equipment effects
3.2.1.1.2 Effects of temperature change 4.2.1 Materials, gases/fluids used
3.2.1.1.3 Effects of water vapor pressure 4.2.2 Control devices and responses
change 4.2.3 Instrumentation/gauges used
3.2.1.1.4 Effects of barometric pressure 4.2.4 Range and standardization
change 4.3 Effects of temperature and other atmospheric conditions
3.2.1.2 Terminology related to absolute pressure 4.4 Standardization for testing
testing
42
4.5 Probing/scanning or measurement/monitoring 6.7 Safety

4.6 Leak interpretation evaluation 6.7.1 State and federal regulations
4.7 Acceptance and rejection criteria 6.7.2 Safety codes/standards
6.7.3 Hazardous gas standards
5.0 Procedures 6.7.4 NRC radiation requirements
5.1 LT procedures
5.1.1 Basic categories and techniques Leak Testing, Level I, II, and III Training
5.1.2 Leak location versus leakage measurement
5.1.3 Pressurization or evacuation
References
ANSI, 1981, ANSI/ANS 56.8 Containment System Leakage Testing
5.1.4 Sealed units with or without tracer gas
Requirements, American Nuclear Society, LaGrange Park, IL.
5.1.5 Units accessible from one or both sides
5.1.6 Systems at, above, or below atmospheric pressure ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
5.2 LT specifications Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
5.2.1 Design versus working conditions
5.2.2 Pressures and temperature control ASME, latest edition, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspection Code B,
5.2.3 Types of leak testing methods Section V, Article 10, Leak Testing, American Society of
5.2.4 Sensitivity of leak testing methods Mechanical Engineers, New York, NY.
5.2.5 Test method and sensitivity needed
ASNT, 2017, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 2: Leak
5.2.6 Preparation of a leak testing specification
Testing, fourth edition, American Society for Nondestructive
Testing Inc., Columbus OH.*
6.1 Safety considerations ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Leak Testing
6.1.1 Personnel and the public Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
6.1.2 Product serviceability Columbus, OH.*
6.1.3 Test validity
6.1.4 Safe work practices ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Bubble
6.2 Safety precautions Leak Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
6.2.1 Explosive/implosive hazards Columbus, OH.*
6.2.2 Flammability, ignitibility, combustibility hazards
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Halogen
6.2.3 Toxicity and asphyxiation hazards
Diode Detector, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
6.2.4 Cleaning and electrical hazards
Columbus, OH.*
6.3 Pressure precautions
6.3.1 Pressure test versus proof test ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Mass
6.3.2 Preliminary leak test Spectrometer Testing Method, American Society for
6.3.3 Pressurization check Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
6.3.4 Design limitations
6.3.5 Equipment and setup ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Pressure
6.4 Safety devices Change Measurement Testing, latest edition, American Society for
6.4.1 Pressure control valves and regulators Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
6.4.2 Pressure relief valves and vents ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03:
6.4.3 Flow rate of regulator and relief valves Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Testing and
6.5 Hazardous and tracer gas safety Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
6.5.1 Combustible gas detection and safety
6.5.2 Toxic gas detection and safety Mix, P., 2005, Introduction to Nondestructive Testing: A Training
6.5.3 Oxygen-deficiency detectors Guide, second edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York.
6.5.4 Radioisotope detection
6.6 Types of monitoring equipment Wilson, N., and L. Beavis, 1988, Handbook of Vacuum Leak
6.6.1 Area monitors Detection, American Vacuum Society, New York.
6.6.2 Personnel monitors
6.6.3 Leak-locating devices * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Inc., Columbus, OH.
43
44
PT
Liquid Penetrant Testing Topical Outlines
Liquid Penetrant Testing Level I Topical 3.1.3 Appearance of indications

Outline 3.1.4 Time for indications to appear
3.1.5 Persistence of indications
1.0 Introduction 3.1.6 Effects of temperature and lighting (visible to UV)
1.1 Brief history of nondestructive testing and liquid 3.1.7 Effects of metal smearing operations (shot
penetrant testing (PT) peening, machining, etc.)
1.2 Purpose of PT 3.1.8 Preferred sequence for penetrant inspection
1.3 Basic principles of PT 3.1.9 Part preparation (precleaning, stripping, etc.)
1.4 Types of liquid penetrants commercially available 3.2 Factors affecting indications
1.5 Method of personnel qualification 3.2.1 Precleaning
3.2.2 Penetrant used
2.0 Liquid Penetrant Processing 3.2.3 Prior processing
2.1 Preparation of parts 3.2.4 Technique used
2.2 Adequate lighting 3.3 Indications from cracks
2.3 Application of penetrant to parts 3.3.1 Cracks occurring during solidification
2.4 Removal of surface penetrant 3.3.2 Cracks occurring during processing
2.5 Developer application and drying 3.3.3 Cracks occurring during service
2.6 Inspection and evaluation 3.4 Indications from porosity
2.7 Postcleaning 3.5 Indications from specific material forms
3.5.1 Forgings
3.5.2 Castings
3.0 Various PT Methods
3.5.3 Plate
3.1 Current ASTM and ASME standard methods – ASTM
3.5.4 Welds
E165, E1208, E1209, E1210, and E1417
3.5.5 Extrusions
3.2 Characteristics of each method
3.6 Evaluation of indications
3.3 General applications of each method
3.6.1 True indications
3.6.2 False indications
4.0 PT Equipment
3.6.3 Relevant indications
4.1 PT units
3.6.4 Nonrelevant indications
4.2 Lighting for PT equipment and light meters
3.6.5 Process control
4.3 Materials for PT
3.6.5.1 Controlling process variables
4.4 Precautions in PT
3.6.5.2 Testing and maintenance materials
Liquid Penetrant Testing Level II Topical 4.0 Inspection Procedures and Standards
Outline 4.1 Inspection procedures (minimum requirements)
4.2 Standards/codes
1.0 Review 4.2.1 Applicable methods/processes
1.1 Basic principles 4.2.2 Acceptance criteria
1.2 Process of various methods
1.3 Equipment 5.0 Basic Methods of Instruction
2.0 Selection of the Appropriate Penetrant Testing Method Liquid Penetrant Testing Level III Topical
2.1 Advantages of various methods
2.2 Disadvantages of various methods
Outline
1.0 Principles/Theory
3.0 Inspection and Evaluation of Indications
1.1 Principles of liquid penetrant process
3.1 General
1.1.1 Process variables
3.1.1 Discontinuities inherent in various materials
1.1.2 Effects of test object factors on process
3.1.2 Reason for indications
45
1.2 Theory 4.0 Procedures

1.2.1 Physics of how penetrants work
1.2.2 Control and measurement of penetrant process 5.0 Safety and Health
variables 5.1 Toxicity
1.2.2.1 Surface tension, viscosity, and capillary 5.2 Flammability
entrapment 5.3 Precautions for ultraviolet radiation
1.2.2.2 Measurement of penetrability, 5.4 Material safety data sheets (MSDS)
washability, and emulsification
1.2.2.3 Contrast, brightness, and fluorescence
1.2.2.4 Contamination of materials
Liquid Penetrant Testing, Level I, II, and III
1.2.2.5 Proper selection of penetrant levels for Training References
different testing (sensitivity) ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
1.3 Proper selection of PT as method of choice Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
1.3.1 Difference between PT and other methods
ASNT, 2016, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 1: Liquid
1.3.2 Complementary roles of PT and other methods
Penetrant Testing, fourth edition, American Society for
Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
1.3.4 Factors that qualify/disqualify the use of PT
1.3.5 Selection of PT technique ASNT, 1999, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 2: Liquid
1.4 Liquid penetrant processing Penetrant Testing, third edition, American Society for
1.4.1 Preparation of parts Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
1.4.2 Applications of penetrants and emulsifiers to parts
1.4.3 Removal of surface penetrants ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Liquid Penetrant
1.4.4 Developer application and drying Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
1.4.5 Evaluation Columbus, OH.*
1.4.6 Postcleaning ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Liquid
1.4.7 Precautions Penetrant Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive
Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
2.0 Equipment/Materials
2.1 Methods of measurement ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Liquid
2.2 Lighting for PT Penetrant Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
2.2.1 Visible light intensity Inc., Columbus, OH.*
2.2.2 Ultraviolet radiation intensity, warmup time, etc.
2.2.3 Physics and physiological differences ASTM, 1985, Standard Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant
2.3 Materials for PT Inspection: Adjunct to ASTM E 433, American Society for Testing
2.3.1 Solvent-removable Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
2.3.2 Water-washable ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03
2.3.3 Post-emulsifiable Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Testing and
2.3.3.1 Water base (hydrophilic) Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
2.3.3.2 Oil base (lipophilic)
2.3.4 Dual sensitivity AWS, latest edition, Welding Handbook, Vol. 1, American Welding
2.4 Testing and maintenance of materials Society, Miami, FL.
Badger, D., 2005, Liquid Penetrant Testing Classroom Training

3.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
Book, PTP Series, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
3.1 General
Inc., Columbus, OH.*
3.1.1 Appearance of penetrant indications
3.1.2 Persistence of indications Boisvert, B., 1993, Principles and Applications of Liquid Penetrant
3.2 Factors affecting indications Testing: A Classroom Training Text, American Society for
3.2.1 Preferred sequence for penetrant inspection Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
3.2.2 Part preparation (precleaning, stripping, etc.)
3.2.3 Environment (lighting, temperature, etc.) Lovejoy, D., 1991, Penetrant Testing: A Practical Guide, Chapman
3.2.4 Effect of metal smearing operations (shot peening, & Hall, New York.
machining, etc.)
Mix, P., 2005, Introduction to Nondestructive Testing: A Training
3.3 Indications from discontinuities
Guide, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
3.3.1 Metallic materials
3.3.2 Nonmetallic materials
3.4 Relevant and nonrelevant indications * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
3.4.1 True indications Inc., Columbus, OH.
3.4.2 False indications
46
MFL
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Topical Outlines
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Level I 10.0 Readout Mechanism

Topical Outline 10.1 Displays
10.2 Strip-chart recorder
1.0 Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing (MFL) 10.3 Computerized data acquisition
1.1 Brief history of MFL testing
1.2 Basic principles of MFL testing Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Level II
Topical Outline
2.0 Principles of Magnetic Fields
2.1 Magnetic fields characteristics
2.2 Flux line characteristics Magnetic Flux Leakage Evaluation Course
3.0 Magnetism by Means of Electric Current 1.0 Review of Magnetic Theory

3.1 Field around a conductor 1.1 Flux leakage theory
3.2 Right-hand rule 1.2 Types of flux leakage sensing probes
3.3 Field in ferromagnetic conductors
2.0 Factors that Affect Flux Leakage Fields
4.0 Indirect Magnetization 2.1 Degree of magnetization
4.1 Circular fields 2.2 Defect geometry
4.2 Longitudinal fields 2.3 Defect location
4.3 Transverse fields 2.4 Defect orientation
2.5 Distance between adjacent defects
5.0 Magnetization Variables
5.1 Type of magnetizing current 3.0 Signal-to-Noise Ratio
5.2 Alloy magnetic properties 3.1 Definition
5.2.1 Hysteresis curve 3.2 Relationship to flux leakage testing
5.2.2 Permeability 3.3 Methods of improving signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
5.2.3 Factors affecting permeability
4.0 Selection of Method of Magnetization for Flux Leakage
6.0 Flux Leakage Testing
6.1 Flux leakage theory 4.1 Magnetization characteristics for various magnetic
6.2 Normal component of flux leakage materials
4.2 Magnetization by means of electric fields
7.0 Search Coils 4.2.1 Circular field
7.1 Rate of change in the normal component of flux leakage 4.2.2 Longitudinal field
7.2 Faraday’s law (rate of change versus induced voltage) 4.2.3 Value of flux density
7.3 Factors that affect the voltage induced in a search coil 4.3 Magnetization by means of permanent magnets
4.3.1 Permanent magnet relationship and theory
8.0 Hall Effect Search Units 4.3.2 Permanent magnet materials
8.1 Hall effect principles 4.4 Selection of proper magnetization method
8.2 Factors that affect the output voltage of hall effect
element 5.0 Coupling
5.1 Liftoff in MFL
9.0 Signal Processing
9.1 Rectification 6.0 Signal Processing Considerations
9.2 Filtering 6.1 Amplification
6.2 Filtering
47
7.0 Applications 3.2 Coupling

7.1 General 3.2.1 Fill factor
7.1.1 Flaw detection 3.2.2 Liftoff
7.1.2 Sorting for properties related to permeability 3.3 Field strength
7.1.3 Measurement of magnetic-characteristic values 3.3.1 Permeability changes
7.2 Specific 3.3.2 Saturation
7.2.1 Tank floor and side inspection 3.4 Comparison of techniques
7.2.2 Wire rope inspection 3.5 Standardization
7.2.3 Tube inspection 3.5.1 Techniques
7.2.4 “Intelligent” pigs 3.5.2 Reference standards
7.2.5 Bar inspection 3.6 Techniques – general
3.6.1 Surface or subsurface flaw detection
8.0 User Standards and Operating Procedures 3.6.2 Noise suppression
8.1 Explanation of standards and specifications used in MFL
8.2 Explanation of operating procedures used in MFL 4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
4.1 Flaw detection
4.2 Process control
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Level III 4.3 General interpretations
Topical Outline 4.4 Defect characterization
1.0 Principles/Theory 5.0 Standards

1.1 Flux leakage theory 5.1 ASME Section V Article 16 Magnetic Flux Leakage
1.2 Förster and other theories 5.2 API 653 Appendix G
1.3 Finite element methods
1.4 DC flux leakage/AC flux leakage
6.0 Procedures
2.1 Detectors Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing, Level I, II,
2.1.1 Advantages/limitations and III Training References
2.2 Coils ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
2.2.1 Advantages/limitations Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
2.3.1 Type of part to be inspected ASNT, 2008, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 8: Magnetic
2.3.2 Type of discontinuity to be detected Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive
2.3.3 Speed of testing required Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
2.3.4 Amount of testing required ASNT, 2010, MFL Compendium: Articles on Magnetic Flux
2.3.5 Probable location of discontinuity Leakage – Collected from Materials Evaluation Published from
2.3.6 Applications other than discontinuity detection 1953 to 2006, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
2.4 Readout selection Columbus, OH.*
2.4.1 Oscilloscope and other monitor displays
2.4.2 Alarm, lights, etc. ASNT, 2010, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 5:
2.4.3 Marking system Electromagnetic Testing, third edition, American Society for
2.4.4 Sorting gates and tables Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
2.4.5 Cutoff saw or shears
2.4.6 Automation and feedback ASNT, 2009, Supplement to Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A:
2.4.7 Strip-chart recorder Electromagnetic Testing Method Questions & Answers Book, sec-
2.4.8 Computerized data acquisition ond edition, The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
2.5 Instrument design considerations Inc., Columbus, OH.
2.5.1 Amplification Beissner, R., G. Matzkanin, and C. Teller, 1980, NTIAC-80-1: NDE
2.5.2 Filtering Applications of Magnetic Leakage Field Methods.
2.5.3 Sensor configuration
Bray, D., and R. Stanley, 1996, Nondestructive Evaluation, A Tool
3.0 Techniques/Standardization in Design, Manufacturing and Service, revised edition, CRC Press.
3.1 Consideration affecting choice of test
3.1.1 SNR * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
3.1.2 Response speed Inc., Columbus, OH.
3.1.3 Skin effect
48
MT
Magnetic Particle Testing Topical Outlines
Magnetic Particle Testing Level I Topical 5.0 Selecting the Proper Method of Magnetization
Outline 5.1 Alloy, shape, and condition of part
5.2 Type of magnetizing current
1.0 Principles of Magnets and Magnetic Fields 5.3 Direction of magnetic field
1.1 Theory of magnetic fields 5.4 Sequence of operations
1.1.1 Earth’s magnetic field 5.5 Value of flux density
1.1.2 Magnetic fields around magnetized materials
1.2 Theory of magnetism 6.0 Inspection Materials
1.2.1 Magnetic poles 6.1 Wet particles
1.2.2 Law of magnetism 6.2 Dry particles
1.2.3 Materials influenced by magnetic fields
1.2.3.1 Ferromagnetic 7.0 Principles of Demagnetization
1.2.3.2 Paramagnetic 7.1 Residual magnetism
1.2.4 Magnetic characteristics of nonferrous materials 7.2 Reasons for requiring demagnetization
1.3 Terminology associated with magnetic particle testing 7.3 Longitudinal and circular residual fields
(MT) 7.4 Basic principles of demagnetization
7.5 Retentivity and coercive force
2.0 Characteristics of Magnetic Fields 7.6 Methods of demagnetization
2.1 Bar magnet
2.2 Ring magnet 8.0 MT
8.1 Equipment selection considerations
3.0 Effect of Discontinuities of Materials 8.1.1 Type of magnetizing current
3.1 Surface cracks 8.1.2 Location and nature of test
3.2 Scratches 8.1.3 Test materials used
3.3 Subsurface defects 8.1.4 Purpose of test
8.1.5 Area inspected
4.0 Magnetization by Means of Electric Current 8.2 Manual inspection equipment
4.1 Circular field 8.3 Medium- and heavy-duty equipment
4.1.1 Field around a straight conductor 8.4 Stationary equipment
4.1.2 Right-hand rule 8.5 Mechanized inspection equipment
4.1.3 Field in parts through which current flows 8.5.1 Semiautomatic inspection equipment
4.1.3.1 Long, solid, cylindrical, regular parts 8.5.2 Single-purpose semiautomatic equipment
4.1.3.2 Irregularly shaped parts 8.5.3 Multipurpose semiautomatic equipment
4.1.3.3 Tubular parts 8.5.4 Fully automatic equipment
4.1.3.4 Parts containing machined holes, slots,
etc. 9.0 Types of Discontinuities Detected by MT
4.1.4 Methods of inducing current flow in parts 9.1 Inclusions
4.1.4.1 Contact plates 9.2 Blowholes
4.1.4.2 Prods 9.3 Porosity
4.1.5 Discontinuities commonly discovered by circular 9.4 Flakes
fields 9.5 Cracks
4.2 Longitudinal field 9.6 Pipes
4.2.1 Field produced by current flow in a coil 9.7 Laminations
4.2.2 Field direction in a current-carrying coil 9.8 Laps
4.2.3 Field strength in a current-carrying coil 9.9 Forging bursts
4.2.4 Discontinuities commonly discovered by 9.10 Voids
longitudinal fields
4.2.5 Advantages of longitudinal magnetization
4.2.6 Disadvantages of longitudinal magnetization
49
10.0 Magnetic Particle Test Indications and Interpretations 4.2 Longitudinal technique
10.1 Indications of nonmetallic inclusions 4.2.1 Principles of induced flux fields
10.2 Indications of surface seams 4.2.2 Geometry of part to be inspected
10.3 Indications of cracks 4.2.3 Shapes and sizes of coils
10.4 Indications of laminations 4.2.4 Use of coils and cables
10.5 Indications of laps 4.2.4.1 Strength of field
10.6 Indications of bursts and flakes 4.2.4.2 Current directional flow versus flux field
10.7 Indications of porosity 4.2.4.3 Shapes, sizes, and current capacities
10.8 Nonrelevant indications 4.2.5 Current calculations
4.2.5.1 Formulas
4.2.5.2 Types of current required
Magnetic Particle Testing Level II Topical 4.2.5.3 Current demand
Outline 4.2.6 Discontinuities commonly detected
1.0 Principles 5.0 Selecting the Proper Method of Magnetization

1.1 Theory 5.1 Alloy, shape, and condition of part
1.1.1 Flux patterns 5.2 Type of magnetizing current
1.1.2 Frequency and voltage factors 5.3 Direction of magnetic field
1.1.3 Current calculations 5.4 Sequence of operations
1.1.4 Surface flux strength 5.5 Value of flux density
1.1.5 Subsurface effects
1.2 Magnets and magnetism
6.0 Demagnetization Procedures
1.2.1 Distance factors versus strength of flux
6.1 Need for demagnetization of parts
1.2.2 Internal and external flux patterns
6.2 Current, frequency, and field orientation
1.2.3 Phenomenon action at the discontinuity
6.3 Heat factors and precautions
1.2.4 Heat effects on magnetism
6.4 Need for collapsing flux fields
1.2.5 Material hardness versus magnetic retention
7.0 Equipment
2.0 Flux Fields
7.1 Portable type
2.1 Direct current
7.1.1 Reason for portable equipment
2.1.1 Depth of penetration factors
7.1.2 Capabilities of portable equipment
2.1.2 Source of current
7.1.3 Similarity to stationary equipment
2.2 Direct pulsating current
7.2 Stationary type
2.2.1 Similarity to direct current
7.2.1 Capability of handling large and heavy parts
2.2.2 Advantages
7.2.2 Flexibility in use
2.2.3 Typical fields
7.2.3 Need for stationary equipment
2.3 Alternating current
7.2.4 Use of accessories and attachments
2.3.1 Cyclic effects
7.3 Automatic type
2.3.2 Surface strength characteristics
7.3.1 Requirements for automation
2.3.3 Safety precautions
7.3.2 Sequential operations
2.3.4 Voltage and current factors
7.3.3 Control and operation factors
2.3.5 Source of current
7.3.4 Alarm and rejection mechanisms
7.4 Multidirectional units
3.0 Effects of Discontinuities on Materials 7.4.1 Capability
3.1 Design factors 7.4.2 Control and operation factors
3.1.1 Mechanical properties 7.4.3 Applications
3.1.2 Part use 7.5 Liquids and powders
3.2 Relationship to load-carrying ability 7.5.1 Liquid requirements as a particle vehicle
7.5.2 Safety precautions
4.0 Magnetization by Means of Electric Current 7.5.3 Temperature needs
4.1 Circular techniques 7.5.4 Powder and paste contents
4.1.1 Current calculations 7.5.5 Mixing procedures
4.1.2 Depth-factor considerations 7.5.6 Need for accurate proportions
4.1.3 Precautions – safety and overheating 7.6 Ultraviolet radiation type
4.1.4 Contact prods and yokes 7.6.1 Ultraviolet radiation and fluorescence
4.1.4.1 Requirements for prods and yokes 7.6.2 Visible light and UV comparisons
4.1.4.2 Current-carrying capabilities 7.6.3 Requirements in the testing cycle
4.1.5 Discontinuities commonly detected 7.6.4 Techniques in use
50
Magnetic Particle Testing Topical Outlines
7.7 Light-sensitive instruments 3.0 Technique

7.7.1 Need for instrumentation 3.1 Magnetization by means of electric current
7.7.2 Light characteristics 3.1.1 Circular field
3.1.1.1 Field around a straight conductor
8.0 Types of Discontinuities 3.1.1.2 Right-hand rule
8.1 In castings 3.1.1.3 Field in parts through which current
8.2 In ingots flows
8.3 In wrought sections and parts 3.1.1.4 Methods of inducing current flow in parts
8.4 In welds 3.1.1.5 Discontinuities commonly indicated by
circular field
9.0 Evaluation Techniques 3.1.1.6 Applications of circular magnetization
9.1 Use of standards – e.g., ASTM E1444, E3024, E709 3.1.2 Longitudinal field
9.1.1 Need for standards and references 3.1.2.1 Field direction
9.1.2 Comparison of known with unknown 3.1.2.2 Discontinuities commonly indicated by
9.1.3 Specifications and certifications longitudinal techniques
9.1.4 Comparison techniques 3.1.2.3 Applications of longitudinal
9.2 Defect appraisal magnetization
9.2.1 History of part 3.2 Selecting the proper method of magnetization
9.2.2 Manufacturing process 3.2.1 Alloy, shape, and condition of part
9.2.3 Possible causes of defect 3.2.2 Type of magnetizing field
9.2.4 Use of part 3.2.3 Direction of magnetic field
9.2.5 Acceptance and rejection criteria 3.2.4 Sequence of operation
9.2.6 Use of tolerances 3.2.5 Value of flux density
3.3 Demagnetization
10.0 Quality Control of Equipment and Processes 3.3.1 Reasons for requiring demagnetization
10.1 Malfunctioning of equipment 3.3.2 Methods of demagnetization
10.2 Proper magnetic particles and bath liquid
10.3 Bath concentration 4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
10.3.1 Settling test 4.1 Magnetic particle test indications and interpretations
10.3.2 Other bath-strength tests 4.2 Effects of discontinuities on materials and types of
10.4 Tests for ultraviolet radiation intensity discontinuities indicated by MT
5.0 Procedures
Magnetic Particle Testing Level III Topical 5.1 Magnetic particle procedures, codes, standards, and
Outline specifications
1.0 Principles/Theory 6.0 Safety and Health

1.1 Principles of magnets and magnetic fields 6.1 Precautions for ultraviolet radiation
1.1.1 Theory of magnetic fields
1.1.2 Theory of magnetism
1.1.3 Terminology associated with MT Magnetic Particle Testing, Level I, II, and
1.2 Characteristics of magnetic fields III Training References
1.2.1 Bar magnet ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
1.2.2 Ring magnet Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
ASNT, 2008, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 8: Magnetic

Particle Testing, third edition, American Society for
2.1 Magnetic particle test equipment
2.1.1 Equipment selection considerations
2.1.2 Manual inspection equipment ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Magnetic Particle
2.1.3 Medium- and heavy-duty equipment Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
2.1.4 Stationary equipment Columbus, OH.*
2.1.5 Mechanized inspection equipment
2.2 Inspection materials ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Magnetic
2.2.1 Wet particle technique Particle Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive
2.2.2 Dry particle technique Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
51
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Magnetic Betz, C., 2000, Principles of Magnetic Particle Testing, Magnaflux
Particle Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Corp., Chicago, IL.
ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03 Guide, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Materials, Philadelphia, PA.* Smith, G., 2015, Magnetic Particle Testing Classroom Training
Book, PTP Series, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
AWS, latest edition, Welding Handbook, Vol. 1, American Inc., Columbus, OH.*
Welding Society, Miami, FL.
Inc., Columbus, OH.
52
4.0 Microwave Energy and Excitation Energies 3.0 Standardization

3.1 Frequency selection
5.0 Microwave Energy Field – Charge Interaction 3.2 Standoff
5.1 Dipole moment 3.3 Power
5.2 Polarity 3.4 Gain
5.3 Interference 3.5 Sample rate
5.4 Anisotropic material properties 3.6 Scan separation
6.0 Material Properties 4.0 Reference Blocks

6.1 Conductors and dielectrics 4.1 Nominal specimen
6.2 Excitation energies 4.2 Fault examples
4.3 Measurement
7.0 Wave Propagation 4.3.1 Dielectric constant
7.1 Attenuation and impedance 4.3.2 Wavelength in material
7.2 Reflection 4.3.3 Loss tangent
7.3 Refraction
7.4 Beam spread 5.0 Imaging Surfaces at a Distance
8.0 Microwave Antennas 6.0 Thickness Measurement

8.1 Antenna pattern polarization
8.1.1 Energy profile 7.0 Density Measurement
9.0 Phase Relationship 8.0 Evaluation

8.1 Codes and standards
Technique Course 8.2 Determination of relative condition
8.2.1 Comparison of tested part to prototype
8.2.2 Comparison to nominal
1.0 Data Format and Collection
8.3 Evaluation of artifacts
1.1 Meta data (heading and reference data)
8.4 Validation of results
1.2 Scan pattern
1.3 Sample density
1.4 File management Microwave Technology Testing Level III
1.5 Transportability Topical Outline
2.0 Instrument Characteristics
Theory Course
2.1 Scanning microwave interference pattern image
2.1.1 Interference pattern
1.0 Microwave Signal Phase Relationship
2.1.2 Compare amplitude of reflected signal with
standing wave
2.1.3 Emitter and receiver in probe fixed physical 2.0 Wave Behavior in Complex Structures
relationship
2.1.4 Fixed phase relationship 3.0 Lenses and Horns
2.2 Probe design
2.2.1 Phase relation 4.0 Microwave Interaction with Matter
2.2.2 Multi-channel receiver
2.2.3 Standoff Technique Course
2.3 Antenna pattern
2.3.1 Optimizing beam geometry
5.0 Basic Materials, Fabrication, and Product Technology
2.4 Image creation
5.1 Fundamentals of material technology
2.4.1 Multiple channels
5.1.1 Properties of materials
2.4.2 Variable frequency
5.1.1.1 Strength and elastic properties
2.5 Signal differential and phase relationship
5.1.1.2 Physical properties
2.5.1 Phase vector
5.1.1.3 Material properties testing
2.5.2 Unit circle
5.1.2 Origin of discontinuities and failure modes
2.5.3 Analysis
5.1.2.1 Inherent discontinuities
5.1.2.2 Process-induced discontinuities
5.1.2.3 Service-induced discontinuities
5.1.3 Statistical nature of detecting and characterizing
discontinuities
54
Microwave Technology Testing Topical Outlines
5.2 Dielectric materials susceptible to microwave 10.2 Joining

examination 10.2.1 Adhesives
5.2.1 Plastics 10.2.2 Thermally welded joints
5.2.2 Rubber 10.2.3 Resin joining
5.2.3 Resins 10.2.4 Mechanical coupling
5.2.4 Fiberglass reinforced plastic 10.3 Coatings
5.2.5 Ceramics 10.3.1 Coating inspection
5.2.6 Composites 10.3.2 Inspection under coatings
5.2.7 Advanced materials
5.2.8 Glass 11.0 Evaluation
5.2.9 Coatings 11.1 Codes and standards
5.3 In-process materials 11.2 Design and construction specifications
5.4 Structures of interest 11.3 Development of reference standards
11.4 Determination of relative condition
6.0 Origin of Discontinuities and Failure Modes 11.4.1 Comparison of tested part to prototype
6.1 Process-induced discontinuities 11.4.2 Comparison to nominal
6.1.1 Placement geometry 11.5 Evaluation of artifacts
6.1.2 Contaminants 11.6 Validation
6.1.3 Bonds between layers
6.1.4 Voids 12.0 Responsibilities of Levels of Certification
6.1.5 Porosity 12.1 Level III
6.1.6 Incorrect chemistry 12.2 Level II
6.1.7 Incorrect material phase/crystallization 12.3 Level I trainee
6.2 Service-induced discontinuities
6.2.1 Inherent discontinuities
6.2.2 Mechanical disruption Microwave Technology Testing, Level I, II,
6.2.3 Thermal damage and III Training References
6.2.3.1 Material phase differences ASNT, 2004, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 5:
6.2.3.2 Crystal structure changes Electromagnetic Testing, third edition, American Society for
7.0 Properties of Materials
ASNT, 2016, Materials and Processes for NDT Technology, second
7.1 Strength and elastic properties
edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
7.2 Physical properties
Columbus, OH.*
7.3 Material properties testing
ASNT, 2016, MW Compendium: Articles on Microwave Technology
8.0 Statistical Nature of Detecting and Characterizing – Collected from ASNT Publications, American Society for
Discontinuities Nondestructive Testing Inc. Columbus, OH.*
9.0 Thickness Measurements ASNT, latest edition, Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-IA:
9.1 Coatings Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing,
9.2 Parts American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus,
OH.*
10.0 Fundamentals of Fabrication and Product Technology Brooks, C., and A. Choudhury, 2001, Failure Analysis of
10.1 Raw materials processing Engineering Materials, first edition, McGraw-Hill Professional,
10.1.1 Castings New York.
10.1.2 Extrusions
10.1.3 Layered composites Carr, J., 2001, Practical Antenna Handbook, fourth edition,
10.1.4 Resin-coated fabrics McGraw-Hill/Tab Electronics, New York.
10.1.5 Ceramics
Chady, T., et al. eds., 2011, “Application of Microwave
10.1.5.1 Sintered materials
Interferometry in Complex Engineered Dielectric Materials,”
10.1.5.2 Ceramic composites
Electromagnetic Nondestructive Evaluation (XIV), IOS Press,
10.1.5.3 Monolithic ceramics
Amsterdam, Netherlands.
10.1.6 Organic composites
10.1.6.1 Reinforcement Henderson, F., and A. Lewis, eds., 1998, Principles & Applications
10.1.7 Plastics of Imaging Radar, Vol. 2, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York.
10.1.8 Elastomers
10.1.8.1 Reinforcement Kalpakjian, S., and S. Schmid, 2007, Manufacturing Processes for
Engineering Materials, fifth edition, Prentice Hall, New York.
55
Lerner, R., and G. Trigg, 2005, Encyclopedia of Physics, Stakenborghs, R., 2005, “Specific Application NDE Method Leads
third edition, VCH Publisher, New York. to Development of Novel Microwave NDE Technique,”
Inspectioneering Journal, Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 11–13.
Nayfeh, M., and M. Brussel, 1985, Electricity and Magnetism, John
Wiley & Sons, New York. Tipler, P., and R. Llewellyn, 2007, Modern Physics, fifth edition,
W.H. Freeman, New York.
Stakenborghs, R., and J. Little, 2009, “A Modern Approach to
Condition-Based Maintenance of Reinforced Rubber Cooling
System Expansion Joints Utilizing a Microwave Nondestructive * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Inspection Method – ICONE17-75602,” Proceedings of the 17th Inc., Columbus, OH.
International Conference on Nuclear Engineering, Brussels, Belgium.
56
NR
Neutron Radiographic Testing Topical Outlines
Neutron Radiographic Testing Level I 3.2 Accelerators

Topical Outline 3.2.1 Types of accelerators
3.2.2 Neutron-producing reactions
Note: Independent of the training recommended for Level I 3.3 Isotopic sources
and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive 3.3.1 Radioisotope + Be
radiation safety training as required by the regulatory juris- 3.3.1.1 α – Be
diction. A Radiation Safety Topical Outline is available in 3.3.1.2 ϒ – Be
Appendix A and can be used as guidance. 3.3.2 Radioisotope + D
3.3.2.1 ϒ – D
3.3.3 Spontaneous fission
Basic Neutron Radiographic Physics Course 3.3.3.1 252Cf
1.0 Introduction 4.0 Personnel Safety Radiation Protection Review

1.1 History of industrial neutron radiographic testing (NR) 4.1 Hazards of excessive exposure
1.2 General principles of examination of materials by 4.1.1 General – beta, gamma radiation
penetrating radiation 4.1.2 Specific neutron hazards
1.3 Relationship of penetrating neutron radiation, 4.1.2.1 Relative biological effectiveness
radiography and radiometry 4.1.2.2 Neutron activation
1.4 Comparison with other NDT methods, particularly with 4.2 Methods of controlling radiation dose
X-rays and gamma rays 4.2.1 Time
1.5 General areas of application 4.2.2 Distance
1.5.1 Imaging 4.2.3 Shielding
1.5.2 Metrology 4.3 Specific equipment requirements
1.5.3 Product 4.3.1 Neutron monitoring dosimeters
4.3.2 Gamma ray monitoring dosimeters
2.0 Physical Principles 4.3.3 Radiation survey equipment
2.1 Sources for NR (general description) 4.3.3.1 Beta/gamma
2.1.1 Isotopes 4.3.3.2 Neutron
2.1.2 Nuclear reactors 4.3.4 Recording/record keeping
2.1.3 Accelerators 4.4 Radiation work procedures
2.2 Interaction between neutrons and matter 4.5 Federal, state, and local regulations
2.2.1 Absorption
2.2.1.1 Thermal neutrons
2.2.1.2 Resonance neutrons Basic Neutron Radiographic Testing Technique
2.2.1.3 Fast neutrons Course
2.2.2 Scatter
2.2.2.1 Elastic 1.0 Radiation-Detection Imaging
2.2.2.2 Inelastic 1.1 Converter screens
2.3 NR techniques 1.1.1 Principles of operation
2.3.1 Film imaging techniques 1.1.2 Direct-imaging screens
2.3.2 Nonfilm imaging techniques 1.1.3 Transfer-imaging screens
2.4 Glossary of terms and units of measure 1.2 Film – principles, properties, and uses with neutron
converter screens
3.0 Radiation Sources for Neutrons (Specific Description) 1.2.1 Radiation response
3.1 Reactors 1.2.2 Vacuum/contact considerations
3.1.1 Principle of fission chain reactions 1.2.3 Radiographic speed
3.1.2 Neutron thermalization (slowing down) 1.2.4 Radiographic contrast
3.1.3 Thermal neutron flux
57
1.3 Track-etch 2.1.5.3 Nuclear reactors

1.3.1 Radiation response 2.1.5.4 Accelerators
1.3.2 Vacuum/contact considerations 2.2 Interaction between penetrating radiation and matter
1.3.3 Radiographic speed (neutron and gamma ray)
1.3.4 Radiographic contrast 2.2.1 Absorption
2.2.2 Scatter
2.0 Neutron Radiographic Testing Process: Basic Imaging 2.2.3 Other interactions
Considerations 2.3 Glossary of terms and units of measure
2.1 Definition of sensitivity (including image quality
indicators) 3.0 Radiation Sources for Neutrons
2.2 Contrast and definition 3.1 Neutron sources – general
2.2.1 Neutron energy and neutron screen relationship 3.1.1 Reactors
2.2.2 Effect of scattering in object 3.1.1.1 Principle of fission chain reactions
2.3 Geometric principles 3.1.1.2 Fast-neutron flux – energy and spatial
2.4 Generation and control of scatter distribution
2.5 Choice of neutron source 3.1.1.3 Neutron thermalization
2.6 Choice of film 3.1.1.4 Thermal-neutron flux – energy and
2.7 Use of exposure curves spatial distribution
2.8 Cause of correction of unsatisfactory radiographs 3.1.2 Accelerators
2.8.1 High film density 3.1.2.1 Types of accelerators
2.8.2 Low film density 3.1.2.2 Neutron-producing reactions
2.8.3 High contrast 3.1.2.3 Available yields and energy spectra
2.8.4 Low contrast 3.1.3 Isotopic sources
2.8.5 Poor definition 3.1.3.1 Radioisotope + Be
2.8.6 Excessive film fog 3.1.3.2 Radioisotope + D
2.8.7 Light leaks 3.1.3.3 Spontaneous fission 252Cf
2.8.8 Artifacts 3.1.4 Beam design
2.9 Arithmetic of exposure 3.1.4.1 Source placement
3.1.4.2 Collimation
3.0 Test Result Interpretation 3.1.4.3 Filtering
3.1 Relationship between X-ray and N-ray 3.1.4.4 Shielding
3.2 Effects on measurement and interpretation of test
3.3 Administrative control of test quality by interpreter 4.0 Radiation Detection
3.4 Familiarization with image 4.1 Imaging
4.1.1 Converter screens
Neutron Radiographic Testing Level II 4.1.1.1 Principles of operations
Topical Outline 4.1.1.2 Types of screens
4.1.1.2.1 Direct exposure
4.1.1.2.2 Transfer exposure
Neutron Radiographic Testing Physics Course
4.1.1.2.3 Track-etch process
4.1.1.2.4 Spectral sensitivity (each process)
1.0 Introduction
4.1.2 Film – principles, properties, use with neutron
1.1 General principles of examination of materials by
converter screens
penetrating radiation
4.1.2.1 Material examination
1.2 Relationship of penetrating neutron radiation,
4.1.2.2 Monitoring
radiography, and radiometry
4.1.3 Fluoroscopy
1.3 Comparison with other methods, particularly with X-
4.1.3.1 Fluorescent screen
rays and gamma rays
4.1.3.2 Image amplification
1.4 Specific areas of application in industry
4.1.3.3 Cine techniques
4.1.4 Direct TV viewing
2.0 Review of Physical Principles
4.1.5 Special instrumentation associated with above
2.1 Nature of penetrating radiation (all types)
techniques
2.1.1 Particles
4.2 Nonimaging devices
2.1.2 Wave properties
4.2.1 Solid-state
2.1.3 Electromagnetic waves
4.2.1.1 Scintillometer
2.1.4 Fundamentals of radiation physics
4.2.1.2 Photo-resistive devices
2.1.5 Sources of radiation
4.2.1.3 Other
2.1.5.1 Electronic sources
2.1.5.2 Isotopic sources
58
4.2.2 Gaseous 1.1.12 Causes and correction of unsatisfactory

4.2.2.1 Proportional counters radiographs
4.2.2.2 Geiger counters 1.1.12.1 High film density
4.2.2.3 Ionization chambers 1.1.12.2 Insufficient film density
4.2.2.4 Other 1.1.12.3 High contrast
4.2.3 Neutron detectors 1.1.12.4 Low contrast
4.2.3.1 Boron-based gas counters 1.1.12.5 Poor definition
4.2.3.2 Fission counters 1.1.12.6 Excessive neutron scatter
4.2.3.3 Helium-3 detectors 1.1.12.7 Fog
4.2.3.4 Lithium-based scintillator 1.1.12.8 Light leaks
4.2.3.5 Instrumentation 1.1.12.9 Artifacts
4.2.3.5.1 Rate meters 1.1.13 Arithmetic of exposure and of other factors
4.2.3.5.2 Counters affecting neutron radiographs
4.2.3.5.3 Amplifiers and preamplifiers 1.2 Miscellaneous applications
4.2.3.5.4 Recording readouts 1.2.1 Blocking and filtering
4.2.3.5.5 Other 1.2.2 Multifilm techniques
1.2.3 Enlargement and projection
5.0 Radiological Safety Principles Review 1.2.4 Stereoradiography
5.1 Controlling personnel exposure 1.2.5 Triangulation methods
5.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts 1.2.6 Autoradiography
5.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept 1.2.7 Flash neutron radiography
5.4 Radiation detection equipment 1.2.8 “In-motion” radiography and fluoroscopy
5.5 Exposure device operating characteristics 1.2.9 Backscatter NR
1.2.10 Neutron tomography
1.2.11 Micro-neutron radiography
Neutron Radiographic Testing Technique Course 1.2.12 Causes of “diffraction” effects and minimization
of interference with test
1.0 Neutron Radiographic Testing Process 1.2.13 Determination of focal-spot size
1.1 Basic neutron-imaging considerations 1.2.14 Panoramic techniques
1.1.1 Definition of sensitivity (including image quality 1.2.15 Altering film contrast and density
indicators) 1.2.16 Gauging and control processes
1.1.2 Contrast and definition
1.1.2.1 Neutron energy and neutron screen 2.0 Test Result Interpretation
relationship 2.1 Basic factors
1.1.2.2 Effect of scattering in object 2.1.1 General aspects (relationship between X-ray and
1.1.2.3 Exposure versus foil thickness neutron radiographs)
1.1.3 Geometric principles 2.1.2 Effects on measurement and interpretation of test
1.1.4 Intensifying screens 2.1.3 Administrative control of test quality by
1.1.4.1 Fluorescent (neutron-sensitive) interpreter
1.1.4.2 Metallic (neutron-sensitive) 2.1.4 Familiarization with image
1.1.5 Generation and control of scatter 2.2 Material considerations
1.1.6 Choice of source 2.2.1 Metallurgy or other material consideration as it
1.1.7 Choice of film/detector affects use of item and test results
1.1.8 Use of exposure curves and process by which they 2.2.2 Materials-processing effects on use of item and
are generated test results
1.1.9 Fluoroscopic inspection 2.2.3 Discontinuities – their causes and effects
1.1.9.1 Theory of operation 2.2.4 Radiographic appearance of discontinuities
1.1.9.2 Applications 2.3 Codes, standards, specifications, and procedures
1.1.9.3 Limitations 2.3.1 Thermal NR
1.1.10 Film processing 2.3.2 Resonance neutron radiography
1.1.10.1 Darkroom procedures 2.3.3 Other applicable codes, etc.
1.1.10.2 Darkroom equipment and chemicals
1.1.10.3 Film processing do’s and don’ts
1.1.11 Viewing of radiographs
1.1.11.1 Illuminator requirements (intensity)
1.1.11.2 Background lighting
1.1.11.3 Judging quality of neutron radiographs
59
Neutron Radiographic Testing Level III 4.1.2.2 Discontinuities, their cause and effects
Topical Outline 4.1.2.3 Radiographic appearance of
discontinuities
1.0 Principles/Theory 4.1.3 Codes, standards, and specifications
1.1 Nature of penetrating radiation
1.2 Interaction between penetrating radiation and matter 5.0 Procedures
1.3 NR 5.1 The radiographic process
1.3.1 Imaging by film 5.1.1 Imaging considerations
1.3.2 Imaging by fluorescent materials 5.1.1.1 Sensitivity
1.3.3 Imaging by electronic devices 5.1.1.2 Contrast and definition
1.4 Radiometry 5.1.1.3 Geometric factors
5.1.1.4 Intensifying screens
2.0 Equipment/Materials 5.1.1.5 Scattered radiation
2.1 Sources of neutrons 5.1.1.6 Source factors
2.1.1 Reactors 5.1.1.7 Detection media
2.1.2 Accelerators 5.1.1.8 Exposure curves
2.1.3 Isotopic sources 5.2 Film processing
2.1.4 Beam control factors 5.2.1 Darkroom procedures
2.2 Radiation detectors 5.2.2 Darkroom equipment and chemicals
2.2.1 Imaging 5.2.3 Film processing
2.2.1.1 Converter screens 5.3 Viewing of radiographs
2.2.1.2 Film principles, properties, use with 5.3.1 Illuminator requirements
neutron converter screens 5.3.2 Background lighting
2.2.1.3 Fluoroscopy 5.3.3 Optical aids
2.2.1.4 TV and optical systems 5.4 Judging radiographic quality
2.3 Nonimaging devices 5.4.1 Density
2.3.1 Solid-state detectors 5.4.2 Contrast
2.3.2 Gaseous ionization detectors 5.4.3 Definition
2.3.3 Neutron detectors 5.4.4 Artifacts
2.3.4 Instrumentation 5.4.5 Image quality indicators (IQIs)
2.3.5 Gauging and control processes 5.4.6 Causes and corrections of unsatisfactory
radiographs
3.0 Techniques/Standardization
3.1 Blocking and filtering 6.0 Safety and Health
3.2 Multifilm technique 6.1 Personnel safety and radiation hazards
3.3 Enlargement and projection 6.1.1 Exposure hazards
3.4 Stereoradiography 6.1.1.1 General – beta, gamma
3.5 Triangulation methods 6.1.1.2 Specific neutron hazards
3.6 Autoradiography 6.1.2 Methods of controlling radiation exposure
3.7 Flash radiography 6.1.3 Operation and emergency procedures
3.8 In-motion radiography
3.9 Fluoroscopy Neutron Radiographic Testing, Level I, II,
3.10 Electron emission radiography
and III Training References
3.11 Micro-radiography
ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
3.12 Laminography (tomography)
Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
3.13 Control of diffraction effects
3.14 Panoramic exposures ASNT, 2002, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 4:
3.15 Gauging Radiographic Testing, third edition, American Society for
3.16 Real-time imaging Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
3.17 Image analysis techniques
4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation Radiographic Testing, fourth edition, American Society for
4.1 Radiographic interpretation Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
4.1.1 Image-object relationships ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Neutron
4.1.2 Material considerations Radiographic Testing Method, American Society for
4.1.2.1 Material processing as it affects use of Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
item and test results
60
ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03 Harms, A., and D. Wyman, 1986, Mathematics and Physics of
Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Testing and Neutron Radiography, Reidel Publishing Co.
Materials, Philadelphia, PA.*
Berger, H., 1965, Neutron Radiography, Elsevier Publishing Co., Guide, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Amsterdam, Netherlands.
US Government, 1993, Code of Federal Regulations Title 10:
Berger, H., 1976, Practical Applications of Neutron Radiography Part 0–5, US Government Printing Office, Washington DC.
and Gaging – STP 586, American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, PA. US Government, 1996, Code of Federal Regulations Title 10:
Part 20, US Government Printing Office, Washington DC.
Domanus, J., 1987, Collimators for Thermal Neutron Radiography,
An Overview, D. Reidel Publishing Co.
Eastman Kodak, 1980, Radiography in Modern Industry, Inc., Columbus, OH.
www.pqt.net/Radiography-in-Modern-Industry-4th-Edition.pdf,
Carestream, Rochester, NY.
61
62
RT
Radiographic Testing Topical Outlines
Radiographic Testing Level I Topical 5.2 Radiation interaction with matter

Outline 5.2.1 Photoelectric effect
5.2.2 Compton scattering
Note: Independent of the training recommended for Level I 5.2.3 Pair production
and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive 5.3 Unit of radiation exposure – coulomb per kilogram
radiation safety training as required by the regulatory juris- (C/kg)
diction. A Radiation Safety Topical Outline is available in 5.4 Emissivity of commonly used radiographic sources
Appendix A and can be used as guidance. 5.5 Emissivity of X-ray exposure devices
5.6 Attenuation of electromagnetic radiation – shielding
5.7 Half-value layers (HVL), tenth-value layers (TVL)
Basic Radiographic Testing Physics Course 5.8 Inverse square law
1.0 Introduction 6.0 Exposure Devices and Radiation Sources

1.1 History and discovery of radioactive materials 6.1 Radioisotope sources
1.2 Definition of industrial radiographic testing (RT) 6.1.1 Sealed-source design and fabrication
1.3 Radiation protection – why? 6.1.2 Gamma ray sources
1.4 Basic math review – exponents, square root, etc. 6.1.3 Beta and bremsstrahlung sources
6.1.4 Neutron sources
2.0 Fundamental Properties of Matter 6.2 Radioisotope exposure device characteristics
2.1 Elements and atoms 6.3 Electronic radiation sources – 500 keV and less, low
2.2 Molecules and compounds energy
2.3 Atomic particles – properties of protons, electrons, and 6.3.1 Generator – high-voltage rectifiers
neutrons 6.3.2 X-ray tube design and fabrication
2.4 Atomic structure 6.3.3 X-ray control circuits
2.5 Atomic number and weight 6.3.4 Accelerating potential
2.6 Isotope versus radioisotope 6.3.5 Target material and configuration
6.3.6 Heat dissipation
3.0 Radioactive Materials 6.3.7 Duty cycle
3.1 Production 6.3.8 Beam filtration
3.1.1 Neutron activation 6.4* Electronic radiation sources – medium- and high-energy
3.1.2 Nuclear fission 6.4.1* Resonance transformer
3.2 Stable versus unstable (radioactive) atoms 6.4.2* Van de graaff accelerator
3.3 Becquerel – the unit of activity 6.4.3* Linear accelerator
3.4 Half-life of radioactive materials 6.4.4* Betatron
3.5 Plotting of radioactive decay 6.4.5* Coulomb per kilogram (C/kg) output
3.6 Specific activity – becquerels/gram 6.4.6* Equipment design and fabrication
6.4.7* Beam filtration
4.0 Types of Radiation 6.5* Fluoroscopic radiation sources
4.1 Particulate radiation – properties: alpha, beta, neutron 6.5.1* Fluoroscopic equipment design
4.2 Electromagnetic radiation – X-ray, gamma ray 6.5.2* Direct-viewing screens
4.3 X-ray production 6.5.3* Image amplification
4.4 Gamma ray production 6.5.4* Special X-ray tube considerations and duty cycle
4.5 Gamma ray energy 6.5.5* Screen unsharpness
4.6 Energy characteristics of common radioisotope sources 6.5.6* Screen conversion efficiency
4.7 Energy characteristics of X-ray machines
7.0 Radiographic Safety Principles Review
5.0 Interaction of Radiation with Matter 7.1 Controlling personnel exposure
5.1 Ionization 7.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts
63
7.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept 4.3 Film contrast

7.4 Radiation-detection equipment 4.4 Subject contrast
7.5 Exposure-device operating characteristics 4.5 Definition
4.6 Film graininess and screen mottle effects
* Topics may be deleted if the employer does not use these methods and 4.7 Image quality indicators (IQIs)
techniques.
5.0 Film Handling, Loading, and Processing
Radiographic Technique Course 5.1 Safelight and darkroom practices
5.2 Loading bench and cleanliness
1.0 Introduction 5.3 Opening of film boxes and packets
1.1 Process of radiography 5.4 Loading of film and sealing cassettes
1.2 Types of electromagnetic radiation sources 5.5 Handling techniques for “green film”
1.3 Electromagnetic spectrum 5.6 Elements of manual film processing
1.4 Penetrating ability or “quality” of X-rays and gamma
rays 6.0 Exposure Techniques – Radiography
1.5 Spectrum of X-ray tube source 6.1 Single-wall radiography
1.6 Spectrum of gamma radioisotope source 6.2 Double-wall radiography
1.7 X-ray tube – change of mA or kVp effect on “quality” 6.2.1 Viewing two walls simultaneously
and intensity 6.2.2 Offset double-wall exposure single-wall viewing
6.2.3 Elliptical techniques
2.0 Basic Principles of Radiography 6.3 Panoramic radiography
2.1 Geometric exposure principles 6.4 Use of multiple-film loading
2.1.1 “Shadow” formation and distortion 6.5 Specimen configuration
2.1.2 Shadow enlargement calculation
2.1.3 Shadow sharpness 7.0 Fluoroscopic Techniques
2.1.4 Geometric unsharpness 7.1 Dark adaptation and eye sensitivity
2.1.5 Finding discontinuity depth 7.2 Special scattered radiation techniques
2.2 Radiographic screens 7.3 Personnel protection
2.2.1 Lead intensifying screens 7.4 Sensitivity
2.2.2 Fluorescent intensifying screens 7.5 Limitations
2.2.3 Intensifying factors 7.6 Direct-screen viewing
2.2.4 Importance of screen-to-film contact 7.7 Indirect- and remote-screen viewing
2.2.5 Importance of screen cleanliness and care
2.2.6 Techniques for cleaning screens Radiographic Testing Level II Topical
2.3 Radiographic cassettes
2.4 Composition of industrial radiographic film
Outline
2.5 The “heel effect” with X-ray tubes
Film Quality and Manufacturing Processes Course
3.0 Radiographs
3.1 Formation of the latent image on film 1.0 Review of Basic Radiographic Principles
3.2 Inherent unsharpness 1.1 Interaction of radiation with matter
3.3 Arithmetic of radiographic exposure 1.2 Math review
3.3.1 Milliamperage – distance-time relationship 1.3 Exposure calculations
3.3.2 Reciprocity law 1.4 Geometric exposure principles
3.3.3 Photographic density 1.5 Radiographic image quality parameters
3.3.4 X-ray exposure charts – material thickness, kV,
and exposure 2.0 Darkroom Facilities, Techniques, and Processing
3.3.5 Gamma-ray exposure chart 2.1 Facilities and equipment
3.3.6 Inverse square law considerations 2.1.1 Automatic film processor versus manual
3.3.7 Calculation of exposure time for gamma and X- processing
ray sources 2.1.2 Safelights
3.4 Characteristic (hurter and driffield) curve 2.1.3 Viewer lights
3.5 Film speed and class descriptions 2.1.4 Loading bench
3.6 Selection of film for particular purpose 2.1.5 Miscellaneous equipment
2.2 Film loading
4.0 Radiographic Image Quality 2.2.1 General rules for handling unprocessed film
4.1 Radiographic sensitivity 2.2.2 Types of film packaging
4.2 Radiographic contrast 2.2.3 Cassette loading techniques for sheet and roll
64
2.3 Protection of radiographic film in storage 5.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept
2.4 Processing of film – manual 5.4 Radiation detection equipment
2.4.1 Developer and replenishment 5.5 Exposure device operating characteristics
2.4.2 Stop bath
2.4.3 Fixer and replenishment Radiographic Evaluation and Interpretation
2.4.4 Washing
Course
2.4.5 Prevention of water spots
2.4.6 Drying
2.5 Automatic film processing 1.0 Radiographic Viewing
2.6 Film filing and storage 1.1 Film illuminator requirements
2.6.1 Retention life measurements 1.2 Background lighting
2.6.2 Long-term storage 1.3 Multiple-composite viewing
2.6.3 Filing and separation techniques 1.4 IQI placement
2.7 Unsatisfactory radiographs – causes and cures 1.5 Personnel dark adaptation and visual acuity
2.7.1 High film density 1.6 Film identification
2.7.2 Insufficient film density 1.7 Location markers
2.7.3 High contrast 1.8 Film density measurement
2.7.4 Low contrast 1.9 Film artifacts
2.7.5 Poor definition
2.7.6 Fog 2.0 Application Techniques
2.7.7 Light leaks 2.1 Multiple-film techniques
2.7.8 Artifacts 2.1.1 Thickness variation parameters
2.8 Film density 2.1.2 Film speed
2.8.1 Step-wedge comparison film 2.1.3 Film latitude
2.8.2 Densitometers 2.2 Enlargement and projection
2.3 Geometrical relationships
3.0 Indications, Discontinuities, and Defects 2.3.1 Geometrical unsharpness
3.1 Indications 2.3.2 IQI sensitivity
3.2 Discontinuities 2.3.3 Source-to-film distance
3.2.1 Inherent 2.3.4 Focal spot size
3.2.2 Processing 2.4 Triangulation methods for discontinuity location
3.2.3 Service 2.5 Localized magnification
3.3 Defects 2.6 Film handling techniques
4.0 Manufacturing Processes and Associated Discontinuities 3.0 Evaluation of Castings

4.1 Casting processes and associated discontinuities 3.1 Casting-method review
4.1.1 Ingots, blooms, and billets 3.2 Casting discontinuities
4.1.2 Sand casting 3.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
4.1.3 Centrifugal casting 3.4 Radiographic appearance
4.1.4 Investment casting 3.5 Casting codes/standards – applicable acceptance criteria
4.2 Wrought processes and associated discontinuities 3.6 Reference radiographs
4.2.1 Forgings
4.2.2 Rolled products 4.0 Evaluation of Weldments
4.2.3 Extruded products 4.1 Welding method review
4.3 Welding processes and associated discontinuities 4.2 Welding discontinuities
4.3.1 Submerged arc welding (SAW) 4.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
4.3.2 Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) 4.4 Radiographic appearance
4.3.3 Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) 4.5 Welding codes/standards – applicable acceptance
4.3.4 Flux cored arc welding (FCAW) criteria
4.3.5 Gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) 4.6 Reference radiographs or pictograms
4.3.6 Resistance welding
4.3.7 Special welding processes – electron-beam, 5.0 Standards, Codes, and Procedures for Radiography
electroslag, electrogas, etc. 5.1 ASTM standards
5.2 Acceptable radiographic techniques and setups
5.0 Radiographic Safety Principles Review 5.3 Applicable employer procedures
5.1 Controlling personnel exposure 5.4 Procedure for radiograph parameter verification
5.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts 5.5 Radiographic reports
65
Computed Radiography Level I Topical 6.0 Exposure Devices and Radiation Sources
Outline 6.1 Radioisotope sources
6.1.1 Sealed-source design and fabrication
Note: Independent of the training recommended for Level I 6.1.2 Gamma ray sources
and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive 6.1.3 Beta and bremsstrahlung sources
radiation safety training as required by the regulatory juris- 6.1.4 Neutron sources
diction. A Radiation Safety Topical Outline is available in 6.2 Radioisotope exposure device characteristics
Appendix A and can be used as guidance. 6.3 Electronic radiation sources – 500 keV and less, low
energy
6.3.1 Generator – high-voltage rectifiers
Basic Radiographic Physics Course 6.3.2 X-ray tube design and fabrication
6.3.3 X-ray control circuits
1.0 Introduction 6.3.4 Accelerating potential
1.1 History and discovery of radioactive materials 6.3.5 Target material and configuration
1.2 Definition of industrial radiography 6.3.6 Heat dissipation
1.3 Radiation protection – why? 6.3.7 Duty cycle
1.4 Basic math review: exponents, square root, etc. 6.3.8 Beam filtration
6.4* Electronic radiation sources – medium- and high-energy
2.0 Fundamental Properties of Matter 6.4.1* Resonance transformer
2.1 Elements and atoms 6.4.2* Van de graaff accelerator
2.2 Molecules and compounds 6.4.3* Linear accelerator
2.3 Atomic particles – properties of protons, electrons, and 6.4.4* Betatron
neutrons 6.4.5* Coulomb per kilogram (C/kg) output
2.4 Atomic structure 6.4.6* Equipment design and fabrication
2.5 Atomic number and weight 6.4.7* Beam filtration
2.6 Isotope versus radioisotope
3.0 Radioactive Materials 7.1 Controlling personnel exposure
3.1 Production 7.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts
3.1.1 Neutron activation 7.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept
3.1.2 Nuclear fission 7.4 Radiation detection equipment
3.2 Stable versus unstable (radioactive) atoms 7.5 Exposure device operating characteristics
3.3 Becquerel – the unit of activity
3.4 Half-life of radioactive materials * Topics may be deleted if the employer does not use these methods and
3.5 Plotting of radioactive decay techniques.
3.6 Specific activity – becquerels/gram
4.0 Types of Radiation Computed Radiography Technique Course

4.1 Particulate radiation – properties: alpha, beta, neutron
4.2 Electromagnetic radiation – X-ray, gamma ray 1.0 Computed Radiography (CR) Overview
4.3 X-ray production 1.1 Photostimulable luminescence (PSL)
4.4 Gamma ray production 1.2 Comparison of radiography and CR
4.5 Gamma ray energy 1.3 Digital images
4.6 Energy characteristics of common radioisotope sources 1.3.1 Bits
4.7 Energy characteristics of X-ray machines 1.3.2 Bytes
1.3.3 Pixels/voxels
5.0 Interaction of Radiation with Matter 1.3.4 Image file formats and compression
5.1 Ionization 1.4 Advantages
5.2 Radiation interaction with matter 1.5 Disadvantages
5.2.1 Photoelectric effect 1.6 Examples
5.2.2 Compton scattering
5.2.3 Pair production 2.0 System Components
5.3 Unit of radiation exposure – coulomb per kilogram 2.1 Imaging plates (IP)
(C/kg) 2.2 IP readout devices
5.4 Emissivity of commonly used radiographic sources 2.3 Monitors
5.5 Emissivity of X-ray exposure devices 2.4 Computers
5.7 HVL, TVL
5.8 Inverse square law
66
3.0 Basic CR Techniques 6.0 Evaluation of Castings

3.1 Image acquisition 6.1 Casting method review
3.2 IQIs 6.2 Casting discontinuities
3.3 Display of acquired images 6.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
3.4 Optimization of displayed image 6.4 Radiographic appearance
3.5 Storage of acquired and optimized image 6.5 Casting codes/standards – applicable acceptance criteria
6.6 Reference radiographs or images
4.0 Digital Image Processing
4.1 Enhanced images 7.0 Evaluation of Weldments
4.2 Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) 7.1 Welding method review
4.3 Artifacts and anomalies 7.2 Welding discontinuities
7.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
7.5 Welding codes/standards – applicable acceptance
Computed Radiography Level II Topical criteria
Outline 7.6 Reference radiographs or images
Advanced Computed Radiography Course 8.0 Standards, Codes, and Procedures for Radiography
8.1 ASTM/ASME standards
1.0 CR Overview 8.2 Acceptable radiographic techniques and setups
1.1 Photostimulable luminescence (PSL) 8.3 Applicable employer procedures
1.2 Image acquisition
1.3 Image presentation 9.0 Radiographic Safety Principles Review
1.4 Artifacts 9.1 Controlling personnel exposure
9.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts
2.0 Image Display Characteristics 9.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept
2.1 Image definition 9.4 Radiation detection equipment
2.2 Filtering techniques 9.5 Exposure device operating characteristics
2.3 SNR
2.4 Modulation transfer function (MTF) Computed Tomography Level I Topical
2.5 Grayscale adjustments
2.6 IQIs
Outline
Note: Independent of the training recommended for Level I
3.0 Image Viewing and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive
3.1 Image monitor requirements radiation safety training as required by the regulatory juris-
3.2 Background lighting diction. A Radiation Safety Topical Outline is available in
3.3 IQI placement Appendix A and can be used as guidance.
3.4 Personnel dark adaptation and visual acuity
3.5 Image identification
Basic Radiographic Physics Course
3.6 Location markers
1.0 Introduction
4.0 Evaluation of CR Images
1.1 History and discovery of radioactive materials
4.1 Pixel value
1.2 Definition of industrial radiography
4.2 IQI
1.3 Radiation protection – why?
4.3 Artifact mitigation
1.4 Basic math review: exponents, square root, etc.
4.4 System performance
4.5 Conformance to specifications
4.6 Image storage and transmission 2.0 Fundamental Properties of Matter
2.1 Elements and atoms
2.2 Molecules and compounds
5.0 Application Techniques
2.3 Atomic particles – properties of protons, electrons, and
5.1 Multiple-view techniques
neutrons
5.1.1 Thickness variation parameters
2.4 Atomic structure
5.2 Enlargement and projection
2.5 Atomic number and weight
5.3 Geometric relationships
5.3.1 Geometric unsharpness
5.3.2 IQI sensitivity
5.3.3 Source-to-image plate distance 3.0 Radioactive Materials
5.3.4 Focal-spot size 3.1 Production
5.4 Localized magnification 3.1.1 Neutron activation
5.5 Plate handling techniques 3.1.2 Nuclear fission
67
3.2 Stable versus unstable (radioactive) atoms 7.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept
3.3 Becquerel – the unit of activity 7.4 Radiation detection equipment
3.4 Half-life of radioactive materials 7.5 Exposure device operating characteristics
3.5 Plotting of radioactive decay
3.6 Specific activity – becquerels/gram * Topics may be deleted if the employer does not use these methods and
techniques.
4.0 Types of Radiation
4.1 Particulate radiation – properties: alpha, beta, neutron Basic Computed Tomography Technique Course
4.2 Electromagnetic radiation – X-ray, gamma ray
4.3 X-ray production 1.0 Computed Tomography (CT) Overview
4.4 Gamma ray production 1.1 Difference between CT and conventional radiography
4.5 Gamma ray energy 1.2 Benefits and advantages
4.6 Energy characteristics of common radioisotope sources 1.3 Limitations
4.7 Energy characteristics of X-ray machines 1.4 Industrial imaging examples
5.0 Interaction of Radiation with Matter 2.0 Basic Hardware Configuration

5.1 Ionization 2.1 Scan geometries – general configurations by generation
5.2 Radiation interaction with matter 2.2 Radiation sources
5.2.1 Photoelectric effect 2.3 Detection systems
5.2.2 Compton scattering 2.4 Manipulation/mechanical system
5.2.3 Pair production 2.5 Computer system
5.3 Unit of radiation exposure – coulomb per kilogram 2.6 Image reconstruction
(C/kg) 2.7 Image display
5.4 Emissivity of commonly used radiographic sources 2.8 Data storage
5.5 Emissivity of X-ray exposure devices 2.9 Operator interface
5.7 HVL, TVL 3.0 Fundamental CT Performance Parameters
5.8 Inverse square law 3.1 Fundamental scan plan parameters
3.2 Basic system tradeoffs for spatial resolution/noise/slice
6.0 Exposure Devices and Radiation Sources thickness
6.1 Radioisotope sources
6.1.1 Sealed-source design and fabrication 4.0 Basic Image Interpretation and Processing
6.1.2 Gamma ray sources 4.1 Artifacts – definitions, detection, and basic causes
6.1.3 Beta and bremsstrahlung sources 4.2 CT density measurements
6.2 Radioisotope exposure device characteristics
6.3 Electronic radiation sources – 500 keV and less, low Computed Tomography Level II Topical
energy Outline
6.3.2 X-ray tube design and fabrication Computed Tomography Technique Course
6.3.4 Accelerating potential
1.0 General Principles of CT and Terminology
6.3.5 Target material and configuration
1.1 CT technical background
6.3.6 Heat dissipation
1.2 Physical basis – X-ray interactions with material
6.3.7 Duty cycle
properties
6.3.8 Beam filtration
1.3 Mathematical basis – line integrals
6.4* Electronic radiation sources – medium- and high-energy
1.4 Data sampling principles
6.4.1* Resonance transformer
1.5 Physical limitations of the sampling process
6.4.2* Van de graaff accelerator
1.6 Reconstruction algorithms
6.4.3* Linear accelerator
1.6.1 Convolution/backprojections
6.4.4* Betatron
1.6.2 Fourier reconstructions
6.4.5* Coulomb per kilogram (C/kg) output
1.6.3 Fan/cone beam
6.4.6* Equipment design and fabrication
2.0 CT System Performance – Characterizing System
Performance
2.1 CT system performance parameters overview
7.1 Controlling personnel exposure
2.2 Spatial resolution
68
2.3 Contrast sensitivity Digital Radiography Level I Topical

2.4 Artifacts Outline
2.4.1 Beam hardening, streak, under-sampling, etc.
2.5 Noise Note: Independent of the training recommended for Level I
2.6 Effective X-ray energy and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive
2.7 System performance measurement techniques radiation safety training as required by the regulatory juris-
2.8 Spatial resolution diction. A Radiation Safety Topical Outline is available in
2.9 Contrast sensitivity Appendix A and can be used as guidance.
2.9.1 Standardizing CT density
2.9.2 Measuring CT density
2.9.3 Performance measurement intervals Basic Radiographic Testing Physics Course
3.0 Image Interpretation and Processing 1.0 Introduction

3.1 Use of phantoms to monitor CT system performance 1.1 History and discovery of radioactive materials
3.2 Evaluation of CT system performance parameters 1.2 Definition of industrial radiography
3.3 Determination of artifacts 1.3 Radiation protection – why?
3.4 Artifact mitigation techniques 1.4 Basic math review: exponents, square root, etc.
4.0 Advanced Image Processing Algorithms 2.0 Fundamental Properties of Matter

4.1 Modulation transfer function calculation 2.1 Elements and atoms
4.2 Effective energy calculation 2.2 Molecules and compounds
4.3 Application of image processing algorithms 2.3 Atomic particles – properties of protons, electrons, and
4.4 Artifact mitigation techniques application neutrons
2.4 Atomic structure
2.5 Atomic number and weight
5.1 Controlling personnel exposure
5.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept 3.0 Radioactive Materials
5.4 Radiation detection equipment 3.1 Production
5.5 Exposure device operating characteristics 3.1.1 Neutron activation
3.1.2 Nuclear fission
3.2 Stable versus unstable (radioactive) atoms
Radiographic Evaluation and Interpretation 3.3 Becquerel – the unit of activity
Course 3.4 Half-life of radioactive materials
3.5 Plotting of radioactive decay
1.0 Evaluation of Castings 3.6 Specific activity – becquerels/gram
1.1 Casting method review
1.2 Casting discontinuities 4.0 Types of Radiation
1.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities 4.1 Particulate radiation – properties: alpha, beta, neutron
1.4 Radiographic appearance 4.2 Electromagnetic radiation – X-ray, gamma ray
1.5 Casting codes/standards – applicable acceptance criteria 4.3 X-ray production
4.4 Gamma ray production
2.0 Evaluation of Weldments 4.5 Gamma ray energy
2.1 Welding method review 4.6 Energy characteristics of common radioisotope sources
2.2 Welding discontinuities 4.7 Energy characteristics of X-ray machines
2.4 Welding codes/standards – applicable acceptance 5.0 Interaction of Radiation with Matter
criteria 5.1 Ionization
5.2 Radiation interaction with matter
3.0 Standards, Codes, and Procedures for Radiography 5.2.1 Photoelectric effect
3.1 ASTM standards 5.2.2 Compton scattering
3.2 Acceptable radiographic techniques and setups 5.2.3 Pair production
3.3 Applicable employer procedures 5.3 Unit of radiation exposure – coulomb per kilogram
(C/kg)
5.4 Emissivity of commonly used radiographic sources
5.5 Emissivity of X-ray exposure devices
5.7 HVL, TVL
5.8 Inverse square law
69
6.0 Exposure Devices and Radiation Sources 4.0 Detector Issues

6.1 Radioisotope sources 4.1 Scatter sensitivity
6.1.1 Sealed-source design and fabrication 4.2 Radiation exposure tolerance
6.1.2 Gamma ray sources 4.3 Portability
6.1.3 Beta and bremsstrahlung sources 4.4 Detector handling
6.2 Radioisotope exposure device characteristics 5.0 Technique Sheets
6.3 Electronic radiation sources – 500 keV and less, low-
energy
Digital Radiography Level II Topical
6.3.2 X-ray tube design and fabrication Outline
6.3.4 Accelerating potential Digital Radiography Technique Course
6.3.5 Target material and configuration
6.3.6 Heat dissipation 1.0 Basic DR versus Film Principles
6.3.7 Duty cycle 1.1 Film versus DR images
6.3.8 Beam filtration 1.1.1 Linearity and latitude
6.4* Electronic radiation sources – medium- and high-energy 1.1.2 Contrast and resolution
6.4.1* Resonance transformer
6.4.2* Van de graaff accelerator
2.0 DR System Components
6.4.3* Linear accelerator
2.1 X-ray and gamma ray sources
6.4.4* Betatron
2.1.1 Energy, mA, focal spot
6.4.5* Coulomb per kilogram (C/kg) output
2.1.2 Stability
6.4.6* Equipment design and fabrication
2.1.3 Open and closed X-ray tubes
2.1.4 Filtration
2.2 Computer
7.0 Radiographic Safety Principles Review 2.2.1 Operator interface
7.1 Controlling personnel exposure 2.2.2 System controller
7.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts 2.2.3 Image processor
7.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept 2.3 Monitors
7.4 Radiation detection equipment 2.3.1 CRT
7.5 Exposure device operating characteristics 2.3.2 LCD
2.4 Data archive
* Topics may be deleted if the employer does not use these methods and
techniques.
2.4.1 Removable media (CD, DVD, tape)
2.4.2 Redundant array of inexpensive disks (RAID)
2.4.3 Central archive
Basic DR Technique Course
3.0 Image Fidelity
1.0 Digital Radiography (DR) Overview 3.1 Measuring image fidelity
1.1 DR 3.1.1 Contrast and resolution
1.2 Digital images 3.1.2 SNR
1.2.1 Bits/bytes 3.2 Image fidelity indicators (system characterization)
1.2.2 Pixels/voxels
1.3 Image file formats and compression 4.0 Image Processing (Post-Processing)
1.4 DR system overview 4.1 Grayscale adjustments
1.5 DR system capabilities 4.1.1 Windowing and leveling
1.5.1 DR versus film procedural steps 4.1.2 Lookup tables (LUTs)
1.5.2 Cost and environmental issues 4.1.3 Thresholding
4.1.4 Histogram equalization
2.0 DR System Components 4.1.5 Pseudo-color
2.1 Detector(s) used in the radiography shop 4.2 Arithmetic
2.1.1 Operating procedures to use the equipment 4.2.1 Addition (integration)
4.2.2 Subtraction
3.0 Image Fidelity Indicators (System Characterization) 4.2.3 Division
3.1 IQIs: hole and wire types 4.2.4 Multiplication
3.2 Line pair gauges 4.2.5 Averaging
3.3 Phantoms 4.3 Filtering (kernels)
3.4 Reference quality indicators (RQIs) 4.3.1 Convolution
3.5 TV test patterns 4.3.2 Low pass (smoothing)
70
4.3.3 High pass (edge enhancement) 11.0 Use of Digital Reference Images
4.3.4 Median 11.1 ASTM standards review
4.3.5 Unsharp mask 11.2 Use of reference images and contrast normalization
4.4 Region of interest (ROI)
5.0 Detector Issues for the Detector(s) Used 12.1 Controlling personnel exposure
5.1 Frame rate 12.2 Time, distance, shielding concepts
5.2 Resolution (pixel pitch, pixel size, etc.) 12.3 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) concept
5.3 Blooming, bleed over 12.4 Radiation detection equipment
5.4 Ghosting/latent image/lag 12.5 Exposure device operating characteristics
5.5 Scatter sensitivity
5.6 Bit depth Evaluation and Interpretation Course
5.7 Dynamic range and SNR
5.8 Fabrication anomalies (bad pixels, chip grades, etc.)
1.0 Image Viewing
5.9 Radiation exposure tolerance
1.1 Image display requirements
5.10 Portability
1.2 Background lighting
5.11 Detector handling
1.3 Multiple-composite viewing
1.4 IQI placement
6.0 Detector Calibrations for the Detector(s) Used
1.5 Personnel dark adaptation and visual acuity
6.1 Gain and offset
1.6 Image identification
6.2 Detector-specific calibration
1.7 Location markers
7.0 Monitor and Viewing Environment
2.0 Application Techniques
7.1 Limited bit depth display
2.1 Multiple-view techniques
7.2 Monitor resolution
2.1.1 Thickness variation parameters
7.3 Monitor brightness and contrast
2.2 Enlargement and projection
7.4 Monitor testing
2.3 Geometric relationships
7.4.1 Test patterns
7.4.2 Luminance – cd/m2
2.3.2 IQI sensitivity
7.4.3 Contrast – min:max, digital driving level (DDL)
2.3.3 Source-to-detector distance
7.5 Monitor calibration
2.3.4 Focal spot size
7.6 Viewing area
2.4 Triangulation methods for discontinuity location
2.5 Localized magnification
8.0 Technique Development Considerations
8.1 Image unsharpness and geometric magnification
3.0 Evaluation of Castings
8.1.1 Determining required geometric magnification
3.1 Casting method review
8.1.2 Geometry and geometric unsharpness
3.2 Casting discontinuities
8.1.3 Focal spot size measurement method
8.1.4 Total image unsharpness
3.4 Casting codes/standards – applicable acceptance criteria
8.2 SNR compensation for spatial resolution
8.2.1 Frame averaging
8.2.2 Binning
4.0 Evaluation of Weldments
8.2.3 X-ray spectrum optimization
4.1 Welding method review
8.2.3.1 Filtering
4.2 Welding discontinuities
8.2.3.2 Beam collimation
8.2.3.3 Beam energy
4.4 Welding codes/standards – applicable acceptance
8.3 Image processing
criteria
8.3.1 Understanding of cost and benefits of common
image processing techniques – windowing,
filtering, subtraction, etc.
5.0 Standards, Codes, and Procedures for Radiography
5.1 ASTM standards
9.0 Detector Monitoring
5.2 Acceptable techniques and setups
5.3 Applicable employer procedures
10.0 Detector Maintenance
71
Radiographic Testing Level III Topical 3.0 Safety and Health

Outline 3.1 Exposure hazards
3.1.1 Occupational dose limits
3.2 Methods of controlling radiation exposure
Basic Radiographic Topics 3.2.1 Time
3.2.2 Distance
1.0 Principles/Theory 3.2.2.1 Inverse square law
1.1 Nature of penetrating radiation 3.2.3 Shielding
1.2 Interaction between penetrating radiation and matter 3.2.3.1 HVL
1.3 Radiology overview 3.2.3.2 TVL
1.3.1 Film radiography 3.3 Operational and emergency procedures
1.3.2 CR 3.4 Dosimetry and film badges
1.3.3 CT 3.5 Gamma leak testing
1.3.4 DR 3.6 Transportation regulations
1.3.4.1 Radioscopy
2.0 Equipment/Materials Radiographic Testing

2.1 Electrically generated sources
2.1.1 X-ray sources 1.0 Techniques/Standardization
2.1.1.1 Generators and tubes as an integrated 1.1 Imaging considerations
system 1.1.1 Sensitivity
2.1.1.2 Sources of electrons 1.1.2 Contrast and definition
2.1.1.3 Electron accelerating methods 1.1.3 Geometric factors
2.1.1.4 Target materials and characteristics 1.1.4 Intensifying screens
2.1.1.5 Equipment design considerations 1.1.5 Scattered radiation
2.1.1.6 Microfocus sources 1.1.6 Source factors
2.2 Isotope sources 1.1.7 Detection media
2.2.1 Exposure devices 1.1.8 Exposure curves
2.2.2 Source changers 1.2 Film Processing
2.2.3 Remote handling equipment 1.2.1 Darkroom procedures
2.2.4 Collimators 1.2.2 Darkroom equipment and chemicals
2.2.5 Specific characteristics 1.2.3 Film processing
2.2.5.1 Half-lives 1.3 Viewing of radiographs
2.2.5.2 Energy levels 1.3.1 Illuminator requirements
2.2.5.3 HVL 1.3.2 Background lighting
2.2.5.4 TVL 1.3.3 Optical aids
2.3 Radiation detection overview 1.4 Judging radiographic quality
2.3.1 Direct imaging 1.4.1 Density
2.3.1.1 Film overview 1.4.2 Contrast
2.3.1.2 Radioscopy overview 1.4.3 Definition
2.3.1.3 X-ray image intensifier system 1.4.4 Artifacts
2.3.2 Digital data acquisition/detectors 1.4.5 IQIs
2.3.2.1 Film digitizers 1.4.6 Causes and correction of unsatisfactory
2.3.2.2 CR radiographs
2.3.2.3 CT 1.5 Exposure calculations
2.3.2.4 DR 1.6 Radiographic techniques
2.4 Manipulators 1.6.1 Blocking and filtering
2.4.1 Manual versus automated 1.6.2 Multifilm techniques
2.4.2 Multiple axis 1.6.3 Enlargement and projection
2.4.3 Weight capacity 1.6.4 Stereoradiography
2.4.4 Precision 1.6.5 Triangulation methods
2.5 Visual perception 1.6.6 Autoradiography
2.5.1 Spatial frequency 1.6.7 Flash radiography
2.5.2 Contrast 1.6.8 In-motion radiography
2.5.3 Displayed brightness 1.6.9 Control of diffraction effects
2.5.4 SNR 1.6.10 Pipe welding exposures
2.5.5 Probability of detection (POD) (single versus 1.6.10.1 Contact
multiple locations, scanning) 1.6.10.2 Elliptical
2.5.6 Receiver operator characteristic (ROC) curves 1.6.10.3 Panoramic
72
1.6.11 Gauging 3.1.3.3 Wall thickness

1.6.12 Real-time imaging 3.1.3.4 Blob/cluster analysis
1.6.13 Image analysis techniques 3.2 Grayscale display adjustments
1.6.14 Image-object relationship 3.2.1 Window width and level
3.2.2 LUTs
2.0 Interpretation/Evaluation 3.2.3 Thresholding
2.1 Material considerations 3.2.4 Histogram equalization
2.1.1 Materials processing as it affects use of item and 3.2.5 Pseudo-color
test results 3.3 Filtering (kernels)
2.1.2 Discontinuities, their causes and effects 3.3.1 Convolution
2.1.3 Radiographic appearance of discontinuities 3.3.2 Low pass
2.1.4 Nonrelevent indications 3.3.3 High pass
2.1.5 Film artifacts 3.3.4 Median
2.1.6 Code considerations 3.3.5 Unsharp mask
3.0 Procedures 4.0 Acquisition System Considerations

4.1 Portability
4.2 Access requirements for detectors
Common Digital System Elements and Digital
4.3 High-energy applications
Image Properties
1.0 Digital Image Properties Computed Radiography

1.1 Bits/bytes
1.2 Pixels/voxels 1.0 CR System Capabilities
1.3 Image file formats and compression (JPEG, TIFF, 1.1 CR system overview
DICONDE) 1.2 CR versus film procedural steps
1.3.1 Advantages/disadvantages 1.3 Cost and environmental issues
1.3.2 Lossy versus lossless 1.4 Film versus CR images
1.4 Sampling theory (digitizing) 1.5 Linearity and latitude
1.4.1 Pixel size (aperture) 1.6 Contrast and resolution
1.4.2 Pixel pitch
1.4.3 Bit depth 2.0 Measuring Image Fidelity
1.4.4 Nyquist theory 2.1 Contrast and resolution
2.2 MTF
2.0 Digital System Specific: Components 2.3 SNR
2.1 Computer
2.1.1 Operator interface 3.0 Image Fidelity Indicators (System Characterization)
2.1.2 System controller 3.1 IQIs: hole and wire types
2.1.3 Image processor 3.2 Line pair gauges
2.2 Monitor and viewing environment 3.3 Phantoms
2.2.1 Type of monitors/displays 3.4 RQIs
2.2.2 Limited bit-depth display 3.5 TV test patterns
2.2.3 Monitor resolution
2.2.4 Monitor brightness and contrast 4.0 CR Technical Requirements
2.2.5 Monitor testing 4.1 Qualification of CR systems
2.2.6 Monitor calibration 4.2 Classification of CR systems
2.2.7 Viewing area and ergonomics 4.3 Maintenance of CR systems
2.3 Data archive 4.4 Technical requirements for inspection
2.3.1 Removable media – single media (CD, DVD, tape)
2.3.2 Redundant array of inexpensive disks (RAID) 5.0 CR Technical Development
2.3.3 Central archive 5.1 Hardware development
2.3.4 Image retrieval 5.1.1 Hard/soft cassette usage
5.1.2 Image plate wear and damage
3.0 Digital System Specific: Image Processing Topics 5.1.3 Image plate artifacts
3.1 ROI and measurements 5.2 Software development
3.1.1 Line profiles 5.3 CR image optimization
3.1.2 Histograms (mean/standard deviations) 5.3.1 Laser spot size optimization
3.1.3 Discontinuity sizing 5.3.2 Use of lead screens
3.1.3.1 Length
3.1.3.2 Area
73
6.0 Use of Digital Reference Images 4.1.3 Bad pixel characterization

6.1 ASTM standards review 4.1.4 Contrast sensitivity
6.2 Digital reference images installation 4.1.5 Efficiency
6.2.1 Include reference image resolutions/pixel size 4.1.6 Specific material thickness
6.3 Use of reference images and contrast normalization 4.1.7 MTF
4.1.8 SNR
7.0 Review of DR Industry Standards (e.g., ASTM) 4.2 Additional detector selection criteria/parameters
4.2.1 Frame rate
4.2.2 Blooming
Computed Tomography
4.2.3 Ghosting/latent image/lag
4.2.4 Scatter sensitivity
1.0 Advanced Theoretical Background 4.2.5 Bit depth
1.1 Radon transform 4.2.6 Fabrication anomalies (e.g., bad pixels, chip
1.2 Sampling the radon transform grades, etc.)
1.3 Convolution principles – point spread function 4.2.7 Radiation exposure tolerance
1.4 Reconstruction processes
1.4.1 Convolution/backprojections
5.0 DR Image Quality Topics
1.4.2 Fourier reconstructions
5.1 Standardization optimization
1.4.3 Fan/cone beam
5.2 Setting bad pixel limits versus application
5.3 Image unsharpness and geometric magnification
2.0 Advanced Image Processing and Algorithm Analysis 5.3.1 Determining required geometric magnification
2.1 System performance analysis 5.3.2 Geometry and geometric unsharpness
2.1.1 Modulation transfer function 5.3.3 Focal spot size measurement method
2.1.2 Contrast detail dose curves 5.3.4 Total image unsharpness
2.1.3 Effective energy 5.4 SNR compensation for spatial resolution
5.4.1 Frame averaging
3.0 CT System Performance Measurements and Monitoring 5.4.2 Binning
3.1 CT system trade spaces 5.4.3 X-ray spectrum optimization
3.2 CT system selection 5.4.3.1 Filtering
3.3 Key parameters 5.4.3.2 Beam collimation
3.3.1 Tradeoffs 5.4.3.3 Beam energy
3.3.2 Scan plan development 5.5 Radiation damage management
Digital Radiography 6.0 Qualification of DR Procedures

6.1 Qualification plan
1.0 DR System Capabilities 6.2 System performance characterization
1.1 DR system overview 6.2.1 Process controls
1.2 DR versus film procedural steps 6.3 Technique documentation
1.3 Cost and environmental issues 6.4 Technique validation
1.4 Film versus DR images
1.5 Linearity and latitude 7.0 Use of Digital Reference Images
1.6 Contrast and resolution 7.1 ASTM standards review
7.2 Digital reference images installation
2.0 Measuring Image Fidelity 7.2.1 Include reference image resolutions/pixel size
2.1 Contrast and resolution 7.3 Use of reference images and contrast normalization
2.2 MTF
2.3 SNR Radiographic Testing, Level I, II, and III
Training References
3.0 Image Fidelity Indicators (System Characterization) ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
3.1 IQIs: hole and wire types Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
3.2 Line pair gauges
3.3 Phantoms ASNT, 2002, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 4:
3.4 RQIs Radiographic Testing, third edition, American Society for
3.5 TV test patterns Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
4.0 Detector Selection ASNT, 2016, Materials and Processes for NDT Technology, second
4.1 ASTM E 2597 data interpretation edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
4.1.1 Frame rate, resolution, ghosting/lag, bit depth Columbus, OH.*
4.1.2 Basic spatial resolution
74
ASNT, 2019, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 3: Limited Certification for Radiographic
Radiographic Testing, fourth edition, American Society for Film Interpretation Topical Outlines
Note: Independent of the training recommended for Level I
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Radiographic
and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive
Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Columbus, OH.* radiation safety training as required by the regulatory juris-
diction. A Radiation Safety Topical Outline is available in
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Radiographic Appendix A and can be used as guidance.
Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Columbus, OH.*
Radiographic Technique Course
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book:
Radiographic Testing Method, American Society for 1.0 Introduction
Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.* 1.1 Process of radiography
1.2 Types of electromagnetic radiation sources
ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.03: 1.3 Electromagnetic spectrum
Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Testing and 1.4 Penetrating ability or “quality” of X-rays and gamma
Materials, Philadelphia, PA.* rays
AWS, latest edition, Welding Inspection Handbook, American 1.5 X-ray tube – change of mA or kVp effect on “quality”
Welding Society, Miami, FL. and intensity
Eastman Kodak, 1980, Radiography in Modern Industry, 2.0 Basic Principles of Radiography
www.pqt.net/Radiography-in-Modern-Industry-4th-Edition.pdf, 2.1 Geometric exposure principles
Carestream, Rochester, NY. 2.1.1 “Shadow” formation and distortion
2.1.2 Shadow enlargement calculation
McCain, D., 2009, ASNT Study Guide: Industrial Radiography
2.1.3 Shadow sharpness
Radiation Safety, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Inc. Columbus, OH.*
2.1.5 Finding discontinuity depth
McGuire, S., and C. Peabody, 2004, Working Safely in 2.2 Radiographic screens
Radiography, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., 2.2.1 Lead intensifying screens
Columbus, OH.* 2.2.2 Fluorescent intensifying screens
2.2.3 Intensifying factors
Mix, P., 2005, Introduction to Nondestructive Testing: A Training 2.2.4 Importance of screen-to-film contact
Guide, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York. 2.2.5 Importance of screen cleanliness and care
2.3 Radiographic cassettes
Schneeman, J., 1985, Industrial X-ray Interpretation, Intex
2.4 Composition of industrial radiographic film
Publishing Co., Evanston, IL.*
Staton, J., 2016, Radiographic Testing Classroom Training Book 3.0 Radiographs
(PTP Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., 3.1 Formation of the latent image on film
Columbus, OH.* 3.2 Inherent unsharpness
3.3 Arithmetic of radiographic exposure
Taylor, J.L., ed., 1988, Basic Metallurgy for Non-Destructive 3.3.1 Milliamperage – distance-time relationship
Testing, revised edition, W.H. Houldershaw Ltd., British Institute 3.3.2 Reciprocity law
of Nondestructive Testing, Essex, England. 1988.* 3.3.3 Photographic density
Thielsch, H., 1977, Defects and Failures in Pressure Vessels and 3.3.4 Inverse square law considerations
Piping. New York: R.E. Krieger Publishing.* 3.4 Characteristic (Hurter and Driffield) curve
3.5 Film speed and class descriptions
Note: Technical papers on much of the subject material can be 3.6 Selection of film for particular purpose
found in the journal of ASNT, Materials Evaluation. For specific
topics, see the index of Materials Evaluation, on the ASNT website 4.0 Radiographic Image Quality
(asnt.org). 4.1 Radiographic sensitivity
4.2 Radiographic contrast
4.3 Film contrast
Inc., Columbus, OH. 4.4 Subject contrast
4.5 Definition
4.6 Film graininess and screen mottle effects
4.7 IQIs
75
5.0 Exposure Techniques – Radiography 3.3 Welding processes and associated discontinuities
5.1 Single-wall radiography 3.3.1 Submerged arc welding (SAW)
5.2 Double-wall radiography 3.3.2 Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW)
5.2.1 Viewing two walls simultaneously 3.3.3 Gas metal arc welding (GMAW)
5.2.2 Offset double-wall exposure single-wall viewing 3.3.4 Flux cored arc welding (FCAW)
5.2.3 Elliptical techniques 3.3.5 Gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW)
5.3 Panoramic radiography
5.4 Use of multiple-film loading Radiographic Evaluation and Interpretation
5.5 Specimen configuration
Course
Film Quality and Manufacturing Processes Course 1.0 Radiographic Viewing

1.1 Film-illuminator requirements
1.0 Darkroom Facilities, Techniques, and Processing 1.2 Background lighting
1.1 Facilities and equipment 1.3 Multiple-composite viewing
1.1.1 Automatic film processor versus manual processing 1.4 IQI placement
1.2 Protection of radiographic film in storage 1.5 Personnel dark adaptation and visual acuity
1.3 Processing of film – manual 1.6 Film identification
1.3.1 Developer and replenishment 1.7 Location markers
1.3.2 Stop bath 1.8 Film density measurement
1.3.3 Fixer and replenishment 1.9 Film artifacts
1.3.4 Washing
1.3.5 Prevention of water spots 2.0 Application Techniques
1.3.6 Drying 2.1 Multiple-film techniques
1.4 Automatic film processing 2.1.1 Thickness variation parameters
1.5 Film filing and storage 2.1.2 Film speed
1.5.1 Retention-life measurements 2.1.3 Film latitude
1.5.2 Long-term storage 2.2 Enlargement and projection
1.5.3 Filing and separation techniques 2.3 Geometric relationships
1.6 Unsatisfactory radiographs – causes and cures 2.3.1 Geometric unsharpness
1.6.1 High film density 2.3.2 IQI sensitivity
1.6.2 Insufficient film density 2.3.3 Source-to-film distance
1.6.3 High contrast 2.3.4 Focal spot size
1.6.4 Low contrast 2.4 Triangulation methods for discontinuity location
1.6.5 Poor definition 2.5 Localized magnification
1.6.6 Fog 2.6 Film handling techniques
1.6.7 Light leaks
1.6.8 Artifacts 3.0 Evaluation of Castings
1.7 Film density 3.1 Casting method review
1.7.1 Step-wedge comparison film 3.2 Casting discontinuities
1.7.2 Densitometers 3.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
3.4 Radiographic appearance
2.0 Indications, Discontinuities, and Defects 3.5 Casting codes/standards – applicable acceptance criteria
2.1 Indications 3.6 Reference radiographs
2.2 Discontinuities
2.2.1 Inherent 4.0 Evaluation of Weldments
2.2.2 Processing 4.1 Welding method review
2.2.3 Service 4.2 Welding discontinuities
2.3 Defects 4.3 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
4.4 Radiographic appearance
3.0 Manufacturing Processes and Associated Discontinuities 4.5 Welding codes/standards – applicable acceptance criteria
3.1 Casting processes and associated discontinuities 4.6 Reference radiographs or pictograms
3.1.1 Ingots, blooms, and billets
3.1.2 Sand casting 5.0 Standards, Codes, and Procedures for Radiography
3.1.3 Centrifugal casting 5.1 Acceptable radiographic techniques and setups
3.1.4 Investment casing 5.2 Applicable employer procedures
3.2 Wrought processes and associated discontinuities 5.3 Procedure for radiograph parameter verification
3.2.1 Forgings 5.4 Radiographic reports
3.2.2 Rolled products
3.2.3 Extruded products
76
IR
Thermal/Infrared Testing Topical Outlines
Thermal/Infrared Testing Level I Topical Basic Thermal/Infrared Operating Course

Outline
1.0 Introduction
Basic Thermal/Infrared Physics Course 1.1 Thermography defined
1.2 How infrared imagers work
1.3 Differences among imagers and alternative equipment
1.0 The Nature of Heat – What is it and How is it
1.4 Operation of infrared thermal imager
Measured/Expressed?
1.4.1 Selecting the best perspective
1.1 Instrumentation
1.4.2 Image area and lens selection for required details
1.2 Scales and conversions
1.4.3 Optimizing the image
1.4.4 Basic temperature measurement
2.0 Temperature – What Is It and How Is It 1.4.5 Basic emissivity measurement
Measured/Expressed? 1.5 Operation of support equipment for infrared surveys
2.1 Instrumentation
2.2 Scales and conversions
2.0 Checking Equipment Calibration with Blackbody
References
3.0 Heat Transfer Modes Familiarization
3.1 Heat conduction fundamentals
3.0 Infrared Image and Documentation Quality
3.1.1 Fourier’s law of heat conduction (concept)
3.1 Elements of a good infrared image
3.1.2 Conductivity/resistance basics
3.1.1 Clarity (focus)
3.2 Heat convection fundamentals
3.1.2 Dynamic range of the image
3.2.1 Newton’s law of cooling (concept)
3.1.3 Recognizing and dealing with reflections
3.2.2 Film coefficient/film resistance basics
3.1.4 Recognizing and dealing with spurious
3.3 Heat radiation fundamentals
convection
3.3.1 Stefan-boltzmann law (concept)
3.2 Recording
3.3.2 Emissivity/absorptivity/reflectivity/transmissivity
3.2.1 Videotape
basics (Kirchhoff’s law)
3.2.2 Photographic images
3.2.3 Video photo cameras
4.0 Radiosity Concepts Familiarization 3.2.4 Digital recording
4.1 Reflectivity 3.2.5 Videoprinters
4.2 Transmissivity
4.3 Absorptivity
4.0 Support Data Collection
4.4 Emissivity
4.1 Environmental data
4.5 Infrared radiometry and imaging
4.2 Emissivity
4.6 Spatial resolution concepts
4.2.1 Measurement
4.6.1 Field of view (FOV)
4.2.2 Estimation
4.6.2 Instantaneous field of view (IFOV) – ref. ASTM
4.2.3 Surface modification
E1149
4.3 Surface reference temperatures
4.6.3 Spatial resolution for temperature measurement –
4.4 Identification and other
the split response function (SRF)
4.6.4 Measurement instantaneous field of view
(MIFOV)
4.7 Error potential in radiant measurements (an overview)
77
Basic Thermal/Infrared Applications Course 3.2.5 Lambertian and non-lambertian emitters (the
angular sensitivity of emissivity)
1.0 Detecting Thermal Anomalies Resulting from Differences 3.2.6 Effects of emissivity errors
in Thermal Resistance (Quasi-Steadystate Heat Flow) 3.3 Calculation of emissivity, reflectivity, and transmissivity
1.1 Large surface-to-ambient temperature difference (practical use of Kirchoff’s law)
1.2 Small surface-to-ambient temperature difference 3.4 Reflectivity problem
3.4.1 Quantifying effects of unavoidable reflections
3.4.2 Theoretical corrections
2.0 Detecting Thermal Anomalies Resulting from Differences
3.5 Transmissivity problem
in Thermal Capacitance, Using System or Environmental
3.5.1 Quantified effects of partial transmittance
Heat Cycles
3.0 Detecting Thermal Anomalies Resulting from Differences
4.0 Resolution Tests and Calculations
in Physical State
4.1 IFOV, FOV, and MIFOV measurements and
calculations
4.0 Detecting Thermal Anomalies Resulting from Fluid Flow
4.2 MRTD measurements and calculations
Problems
4.3 Slit response function – measurement, calculations,
interpretations, and comparisons
5.0 Detecting Thermal Anomalies Resulting from Friction 4.4 Resolution versus lens and distance
4.5 Dynamic range
6.0 Detecting Thermal Anomalies Resulting from 4.6 Data acquisition rate/data density
Nonhomogeneous Exothermic or Endothermic Conditions 4.7 Frame rate and field rate
4.8 Image data density
7.0 Field Quantification of Point Temperatures 4.8.1 Lines of resolution
7.1 Simple techniques for emissivity 4.8.2 IFOVs/line
7.2 Typical (high-emissivity) applications 4.8.3 Computer pixels/line
7.3 Special problem of low-emissivity applications
Intermediate Thermal/Infrared Operating Course
Thermal/Infrared Testing Level II Topical
Outline 1.0 Operating for Infrared Measurements (Quantification)
1.1 Simple infrared energy measurement
Intermediate Thermal/Infrared Physics Course 1.2 Quantifying the emissivity of the target surface
1.3 Quantifying temperature profiles
1.3.1 Use of blackbody temperature references in the
1.0 Basic Calculations in the Three Modes of Heat Transfer
image
1.1 Conduction – principles and elementary calculation
1.3.2 Use of temperature measurement devices for
1.1.1 Thermal resistance – principles and elementary
reference surface temperatures
calculations
1.3.3 Common sources of temperature measurement
1.1.2 Heat capacitance – principles and elementary
errors
calculations
1.4 Computer processing to enhance imager data
1.2 Convection – principles and elementary calculations
1.3 Radiation – principles and elementary calculations
2.0 Operating for High-Speed Data Collection
2.1 Producing accurate images of transient processes
2.0 The Infrared Spectrum
2.2 Recording accurate images of transient processes
2.1 Planck’s law/curves
2.3 Equipment selection and operation for imaging from
2.1.1 Typical detected bands
moving vehicles
2.1.2 Spectral emissivities of real surfaces
2.1.3 Effects due to semitransparent windows and/or
3.0 Operating Special Equipment for “Active” Techniques
gases
3.1 Hot or cold fluid energy sources
2.1.4 Filters
3.2 Heat lamp energy sources
3.3 Flash lamp energy sources
3.0 Radiosity Problems
3.4 Electromagnetic induction
3.1 Blackbodies – theory and concepts
3.5 Laser energy sources
3.2 Emissivity problems
3.2.1 Blackbody emissivity
4.0 Reports and Documentation
3.2.2 The graybody and the non-graybody
4.1 Standardization requirements and records
3.2.3 Broadband and narrow-band emitter targets
4.2 Report data requirements
3.2.4 Specular and diffuse emitters
4.3 Preparing reports
78
Intermediate Thermal/Infrared Applications 3.0 Radiosity – Basic Theory and Building Applications
Course 3.1 Blackbodies – theory and concepts
3.2 Emissivity problems
1.0 Temperature Measurement Applications 3.2.1 Blackbody, graybody, and non-graybody
1.1 Isotherms/alarm levels – personnel safety audits, etc. 3.2.2 Specular and diffuse emitters in building materials
1.2 Profiles 3.2.3 Lambertian and non-lambertian emitters (the
2.0 Energy Loss Analysis Applications 3.2.4 Effects of emissivity errors
2.1 Conduction losses through envelopes 3.2.5 Calculation of emissivity, reflectivity, and
2.1.1 Basic envelope heat-flow quantification transmissivity (practical use of Kirchoff’s law)
2.1.2 Recognizing and dealing with wind effects 3.2.6 Quantifying effects of unavoidable reflections in
2.2 Mass-transfer heat exchange (air or other flows into or buildings
out of the system)
2.2.1 Location 4.0 Understanding Infrared Camera Specifications for
2.2.2 Quantification Buildings
4.1 Resolution tests and calculations
3.0 “Active” Applications 4.2 IFOV and FOV measurements and calculations
3.1 Insulation flaws 4.3 Resolution versus lens and distance
3.2 Delamination of composites 4.4 Dynamic range
3.3 Bond quality of coatings 4.5 Data acquisition rate/data density
3.4 Location of high heat-capacity components 4.6 Frame rate and field rate
4.0 Filtered Applications Thermal/Infrared Level II Building Diagnostics

4.1 Sunlight Operating Course
4.2 Furnace interiors
4.3 Semitransparent targets 1.0 Operating for Qualitative Analysis
1.1 Simple infrared energy measurement
5.0 Transient Applications 1.2 Quantifying the relative emissivity variations of the
5.1 Imaging a rapidly moving process target surface
5.2 Imaging from a vehicle 1.3 Quantifying thermal profiles
1.4 Producing accurate images of qualitative thermal scenes
Thermal/Infrared Level II Building Diagnostics 1.5 Qualitative and quantitative analysis during
Physics Course pressurization/depressurization testing of building
envelopes
1.1 Conduction – principles and elementary calculation 2.0 Operating for Quantitative Measurements and Analysis
1.1.1 Thermal resistance – principles and elementary 2.1 Infrared energy measurement
calculations 2.2 Quantifying the emissivity of the target surface
1.1.2 Heat capacitance – principles and elementary 2.3 Quantifying temperature profiles
calculations 2.3.1 Use of blackbody temperature references in the
1.2 Convection – principles and elementary calculations image
1.3 Radiation – principles and elementary calculations 2.3.2 Use of temperature measurement devices for
1.4 Building envelope pressurization/depressurization reference surface temperatures
effects on measurement of heat transfer 2.3.3 Common sources of temperature measurement
errors
2.0 The Infrared Spectrum 2.4 Computer processing to enhance imager data
2.1 Planck’s law/curves 2.5 Producing accurate images of quantitative thermal
2.1.1 Typical detection bands scenes
2.1.3 Effects due to semitransparent windows and/or 3.0 Reports and Documentation
materials 3.1 Standardization requirements and records
79
Thermal/Infrared Level II Building Diagnostics 3.4 Reflectivity problem

Applications Course 3.4.1 Quantifying effects of unavoidable reflections
1.0 Qualitative versus Quantitative Measurement Applications 3.5 Transmissivity problem
1.1 Isotherms/alarm levels – personnel safety audits, etc. 3.5.1 Quantified effects of partial transmittance
2.0 Energy Loss Analysis Applications
2.1 Conduction losses through envelopes 4.0 Resolution Tests and Calculations
2.1.1 Basic envelope heat-flow quantification 4.1 IFOV, FOV, and MIFOV measurements and
2.1.2 Recognizing and dealing with wind effects calculations
2.2 Mass-transfer heat exchange (air or other flows into or 4.2 MRTD measurements and calculations
out of the system) 4.3 Slit response function – measurement, calculations,
2.2.1 Location interpretations, and comparisons
2.2.2 Quantification 4.4 Resolution versus lens and distance
4.5 Dynamic range
3.0 Building Applications 4.6 Data acquisition rate/data density
3.1 Thermal bridges and insulation flaws 4.7 Frame rate and field rate
3.2 Air infiltration in building envelops 4.8 Image data density
3.3 Envelope pressurization/depressurization (blower door) 4.8.1 Lines of resolution
testing 4.8.2 IFOVs/line
3.4 Moisture in building materials 4.8.3 Computer pixels/line
3.5 Sunlight
3.6 Semitransparent targets Intermediate Thermal/Infrared Operating Course
3.7 Transient applications
1.0 Operating for Infrared Measurements (Quantification)
Electrical and Mechanical Equipment 1.1 Simple infrared energy measurement
Intermediate Thermal/Infrared Physics Course 1.2 Quantifying the emissivity of the target surface
1.0 Basic Calculations in the Three Modes of Heat Transfer 1.3.1 Use of blackbody temperature references in the
1.1 Conduction – principles and elementary calculation image
1.1.1 Thermal resistance – principles and elementary 1.3.2 Use of temperature measurement devices for
calculations reference surface temperatures
1.1.2 Heat capacitance – principles and elementary 1.3.3 Common sources of temperature measurement
calculations errors
1.2 Convection – principles and elementary calculations 1.4 Computer processing to enhance imager data
2.0 Operating for High-Speed Data Collection
2.0 The Infrared Spectrum 2.1 Producing accurate images of transient processes
2.1 Planck’s law/curves 2.2 Recording accurate images of transient processes
2.1.1 Typical detected bands 2.3 Equipment selection and operation for imaging from
2.1.2 Spectral emissivities of real surfaces moving vehicles
2.1.3 Effects due to semitransparent windows and/or
gasses 3.0 Operating Special Equipment for “Active” Techniques
2.1.4 Filters 3.1 Hot or cold fluid energy sources
3.2 Heat lamp energy sources
3.0 Radiosity Problems 3.3 Flash lamp energy sources
3.1 Blackbodies – theory and concepts 3.4 Electromagnetic induction
3.2 Emissivity problems 3.5 Laser energy sources
3.2.1 Blackbody emissivity
3.2.2 The graybody and the non-graybody 4.0 Reports and Documentation
3.2.3 Broadband and narrow-band emitter targets 4.1 Standardization requirements and records
3.2.4 Specular and diffuse emitters 4.2 Report data requirements
3.2.5 Lambertian and non-lambertian emitters (the 4.3 Preparing reports
3.2.6 Effects of emissivity errors
3.3 Calculation of emissivity, reflectivity, and transmissivity
(practical use of Kirchoff’s law)
80
Intermediate Thermal/Infrared Applications 3.2.5 Calculation of emissivity, reflectivity, and

Course transmissivity (practical use of Kirchoff’s law)
3.2.6 Quantifying effects of unavoidable reflections
1.0 Temperature Measurement Applications
1.1 Isotherms/alarm levels – personnel safety audits, etc. 4.0 Understanding Infrared Camera Specifications Required
1.2 Profiles for Determining Size, Depth, and Type of Flaws in
Materials
2.0 Energy Loss Analysis Applications 4.1 Resolution tests and calculations
2.1 Conduction losses through enclosures and housings 4.2 IFOV and FOV measurements and calculations
2.1.1 Basic envelope heat-flow quantification 4.3 Resolution versus lens and distance
2.1.2 Recognizing and dealing with wind effects 4.4 Dynamic range
2.2 Mass-transfer heat exchange (air or other flows into or 4.5 Data acquisition rate/data density
out of the system) 4.6 Frame rate and field rate
2.2.1 Location
2.2.2 Quantification Thermal/Infrared Level II NDT of Materials
Operating Course
3.0 “Active” Applications
3.1 Insulation flaws in electrical and mechanical equipment 1.0 Operating for Qualitative Analysis
3.2 Location of high heat-capacity components 1.1 Simple infrared energy measurement – active versus
passive
4.0 Filtered Applications 1.2 Quantifying the relative emissivity variations of the
4.1 Sunlight target surface
4.2 Furnace interiors 1.3 Quantifying thermal profiles
4.3 Semitransparent targets 1.4 Producing accurate images of qualitative thermal scenes
1.5 Qualitative and quantitative analysis
5.0 Transient Applications 1.6 Understanding thermal differences from the rate of
5.1 Imaging a rapidly moving process change of thermal differences
5.2 Imaging from a vehicle
2.0 Operating for Quantitative Measurements and Analysis
Thermal/Infrared Level II NDT of Materials Physics 2.1 Infrared energy measurement
Course 2.2 Quantifying the emissivity of the target surface
2.3.1 Use of blackbody temperature references in the
image
1.1 Conduction – principles and elementary calculation
2.3.2 Use of temperature measurement devices for
1.1.1 Thermal resistance – principles and elementary
reference surface temperatures
calculations
2.3.3 Common sources of temperature measurement
1.1.2 Heat capacitance – principles and elementary
errors
calculations
2.4 Computer processing to enhance imager data
1.2 Convection – principles and elementary calculations
2.5 Producing accurate images of quantitative thermal
scenes
2.0 The Infrared Spectrum
3.0 Reports and Documentation
2.1 Planck’s law/curves
3.1 Standardization requirements and records
2.1.1 Typical detection bands
2.1.3 Effects due to semitransparent windows and
materials
Thermal/ Infrared Level II NDT of Materials
3.0 Radiosity – Basic Theory and Application to Applications Course
Characteristics of Materials
3.1 Blackbodies – theory and concepts 1.0 Qualitative versus Quantitative Measurement Applications
3.2 Emissivity problems 1.1 Isotherms/alarm levels – personnel safety audits, etc.
3.2.1 Blackbody, graybody, and non-graybody
3.2.2 Specular and diffuse emitters in materials 2.0 Energy Loss Analysis Applications
3.2.3 Lambertian and non-lambertian emitters (the 2.1 Conduction losses through envelopes
angular sensitivity of emissivity) 2.1.1 Basic envelope heat-flow quantification
3.2.4 Effects of emissivity errors 2.1.2 Recognizing and dealing with wind effects
81
2.2 Mass-transfer heat exchange (air or other flows into or 2.1.18.1 Pyroelectric vidicons
out of the system) 2.1.18.2 Single-detector scanners
2.2.1 Location 2.1.18.3 Multi-detector scanners
2.2.2 Quantification 2.1.18.4 Staring arrays
2.2 Heat flux indicators
3.0 Composite Material Applications 2.3 Performance parameters of noncontact devices
3.1 Thermal bridges and insulation flaws 2.3.1 Absolute precision and accuracy
3.2 Behavior of water, moisture, and FOD in test materials 2.3.2 Repeatability
3.3 Differentiating materials and flaws/contaminants based 2.3.3 Sensitivity
on differences in the rate of change of surface 2.3.4 Spectral response limits
temperature 2.3.5 Response time
3.4 Effects of sunlight and background heat sources 2.3.6 Drift
3.5 Semitransparent targets 2.3.7 Spot size ratio
3.6 Transient applications 2.3.8 IFOV
2.3.9 Minimum resolvable temperature difference
Thermal/Infrared Testing Level III Topical 2.3.10 Slit response function
Outline
3.0 Techniques
3.1 Contact temperature indicators
3.1.1 Standardization
1.1 Conduction
3.2 Noncontact pyrometers
1.2 Convection
3.2.1 Standardization of equipment
1.3 Radiation
3.2.2 Quantifying emissivity
1.4 The nature of heat and flow
3.2.3 Evaluating background radiation
1.4.1 Exothermic or endothermic conditions
3.2.4 Measuring (or mapping) radiant energy
1.4.2 Friction
3.2.5 Measuring (or mapping) surface temperatures
1.4.3 Variations in fluid flow
3.2.6 Measuring (or mapping) surface heat flows
1.4.4 Variations in thermal resistance
3.2.7 Use in high-temperature environments
1.4.5 Thermal capacitance
3.2.8 Use in high-magnetic-field environments
1.5 Temperature measurement principles
3.2.9 Measurements on small targets
1.6 Proper selection of thermal/infrared testing (IR) as
3.2.10 Measurements through semitransparent materials
technique of choice
3.3 Infrared line scanners
1.6.1 Differences between IR and other techniques
3.3.1 Standardization of equipment
1.6.2 Complementary roles of IR and other methods
3.3.2 Quantifying emissivity
3.3.3 Evaluating background radiation
1.6.4 Factors that qualify/disqualify the use of IR
3.3.4 Measuring (or mapping) surface radiant energy
3.3.5 Measuring (or mapping) surface temperatures
2.0 Equipment/Materials 3.3.6 Measuring (or mapping) surface heat flows
2.1 Temperature measurement equipment 3.3.7 Use in high-temperature environments
2.1.1 Liquid – in-glass thermometers 3.3.8 Use in high-magnetic-field environments
2.1.2 Vapor – pressure thermometers 3.3.9 Measurements on small targets
2.1.3 Bourdon – tube thermometers 3.3.10 Measurements through semitransparent materials
2.1.4 Bi-metallic thermometers 3.4 Thermal/infrared imaging
2.1.5 Melting-point indicators 3.4.1 Standardization of equipment
2.1.6 Thermochromic liquid crystal materials 3.4.2 Quantifying emissivity
2.1.7 (Irreversible) Thermochromic change materials 3.4.3 Evaluating background radiation
2.1.8 Thermocouples 3.4.4 Measuring (or mapping) surface radiant energy
2.1.9 Resistance thermometers 3.4.5 Measuring (or mapping) surface temperatures
2.1.9.1 RTDs 3.4.6 Measuring (or mapping) surface heat flows
2.1.9.2 Thermistors 3.4.7 Use in high-temperature environments
2.1.10 Optical pyrometers 3.4.8 Use in high-magnetic-field environments
2.1.11 Infrared pyrometers 3.4.9 Measurements on small targets
2.1.12 Two-color infrared pyrometers 3.4.10 Measurements through semitransparent materials
2.1.13 Laser/infrared pyrometers 3.5 Heat flux indicators
2.1.14 Integrating hemisphere radiation pyrometers 3.5.1 Standardization of equipment
2.1.15 Fiber-optic thermometers 3.5.2 Measurement of heat flow
2.1.16 Infrared photographic films and cameras
2.1.17 Infrared line scanners
2.1.18 Thermal/infrared imagers
82
3.6 Exothermic or endothermic investigations. Typical 3.7 Friction investigations. Typical examples may include,
examples may include, but are not limited to, the but are not limited to, the following:
following: 3.7.1 Bearings
3.6.1 Power distribution systems 3.7.2 Seals
3.6.1.1 Exposed electrical switchgear 3.7.3 Drive belts
3.6.1.2 Enclosed electrical switchgear 3.7.4 Drive couplings
3.6.1.3 Exposed electrical buses 3.7.5 Exposed gears
3.6.1.4 Enclosed electrical buses 3.7.6 Gearboxes
3.6.1.5 Transformers 3.7.7 Machining processes
3.6.1.6 Electric rotating equipment 3.7.8 Aerodynamic heating
3.6.1.7 Overhead power lines 3.8 Fluid flow investigations. Typical examples may include,
3.6.1.8 Coils but are not limited to, the following:
3.6.1.9 Capacitors 3.8.1 Fluid piping
3.6.1.10 Circuit breakers 3.8.2 Valves
3.6.1.11 Indoor wiring 3.8.3 Heat exchangers
3.6.1.12 Motor control center starters 3.8.4 Fin fans
3.6.1.13 Lighter arrestors 3.8.5 Cooling ponds
3.6.2 Chemical processes 3.8.6 Cooling towers
3.6.3 Foam-in-place insulation 3.8.7 Distillation towers
3.6.4 Firefighting 3.8.7.1 Packed
3.6.4.1 Building investigations 3.8.7.2 Trays
3.6.4.2 Outside ground-based investigations 3.8.8 HVAC systems
3.6.4.3 Outside airborne investigations 3.8.9 Lake and ocean current mapping
3.6.5 Moisture in airframes 3.8.10 Mapping civil and industrial outflows into
3.6.6 Underground investigations waterways
3.6.6.1 Airborne coal mine fires 3.8.11 Locating leaks in pressure systems
3.6.6.2 Utility locating 3.8.12 Filters
3.6.6.3 Utility pipe leak detection 3.9 Thermal resistance (steadystate heat flow) investigations.
3.6.6.4 Void detection Typical examples may include, but are not limited to, the
3.6.7 Locating and mapping utilities concealed in following:
structures 3.9.1 Thermal safety audits
3.6.8 Mammal location and monitoring 3.9.2 Low temperature insulating systems
3.6.8.1 Ground investigations 3.9.3 Industrial insulation systems
3.6.8.2 Airborne investigations 3.9.4 Refractory systems
3.6.8.3 Sorting mammals according to stress 3.9.5 Semitransparent walls
levels 3.9.6 Furnace interiors
3.6.9 Fracture dynamics 3.9.7 Disbonds in lined process equipment
3.6.10 Process heating or cooling 3.10 Thermal capacitance investigations. Typical examples
3.6.10.1 Rate may include, but are not limited to, the following:
3.6.10.2 Uniformity 3.10.1 Tank levels
3.6.11 Heat tracing or channelized cooling 3.10.2 Rigid injection molding
3.6.12 Radiant heating 3.10.3 Thermal laminating processes
3.6.13 Electronic components 3.10.4 Building envelopes
3.6.13.1 Assembled circuit boards 3.10.5 Roof moisture
3.6.13.2 Bare printed circuit boards 3.10.5.1 Roof-level investigations
3.6.13.3 Semiconductor microcircuits 3.10.5.2 Airborne investigations
3.6.14 Welding 3.10.6 Underground voids
3.6.14.1 Welding technique parameters 3.10.7 Bridge-deck laminations
3.6.14.2 Material parameters 3.10.8 Steam traps
3.6.15 Mapping of energy fields 3.10.9 Paper manufacturing moisture profiles
3.6.15.1 Electromagnetic fields 3.10.10 Subsurface discontinuity detection in materials
3.6.15.2 Electromagnetic heating processes 3.10.11 Coating disbond
3.6.15.3 Radiant heat flux distribution 3.10.12 Structural materials
3.6.15.4 Acoustic fields 3.10.12.1 Subsurface discontinuity detection
3.6.16 Gaseous plumes 3.10.12.2 Thickness variations
3.6.16.1 Monitoring 3.10.12.3 Disbonding
3.6.16.2 Mapping
3.6.17 Ground frost-line mapping
83
4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation Building Diagnostics References Level II

4.1 Exothermic or endothermic investigation: Typical ASTM, 2009, ASTM E1183: Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site
examples may include, but are not limited to, the Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems, American
examples shown in Section 3.6 Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA.
4.2 Friction investigations: Typical examples may include,
but are not limited to, the examples shown in Section 3.7 ASTM, 2010, ASTM C1153-10: Standard Practice for Location of
4.3 Fluid flow investigations: Typical examples may include, Wet Insulation in Roofing Systems Using Infrared Imaging,
but are not limited to, the examples shown in Section 3.8 American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA.
4.4 Differences in thermal resistance (steadystate heat flow) ASTM, 2010, ASTM E779: Standard Test Method for Determining
investigations: Typical examples may include, but are Air Leakage Rate by Fan Depressurization, American Society for
not limited to, the examples shown in Section 3.9 Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA.
4.5 Thermal capacitance investigations: Typical examples
may include, but are not limited to, the examples shown ASTM, 2011, ASTM C1060-11a: Standard Practice for
in Section 3.10 Thermographic Inspection of Insulation Installations in Envelope
Cavities of Frame Buildings, American Society for Testing and
5.0 Procedures Materials, Philadelphia, PA.
5.1 Existing codes and standards
5.2 Elements of IR job procedure development British Standards Institution, 1999, BS EN 13187:1999: Thermal
performance of buildings. Qualitative detection of thermal irregu-
larities in building envelopes. Infrared method.
6.1 Safety responsibility and authority Canadian General Standards Board, 1986, CGSB 149-GP-2MP-
6.2 Safety for personnel 1986: Document 149-GP-2MP Manual for Thermographic Analysis
6.2.1 Liquefied nitrogen handling of Building Enclosures.
6.2.2 Compressed gas handling
6.2.3 Battery handling International Organization for Standardization, 1983, ISO
6.2.4 Safety clothing 6781:1983: Thermal Insulation: Qualitative Detection of Thermal
6.2.5 Safety ropes and harnesses Irregularities in Building Envelopes.
6.2.6 Ladders
RESNET, 2013, RESNET Mortgage Industry National Home
6.2.7 Safety backup personnel
Energy Rating Systems Standards, Residential Energy Services
6.3 Safety for client and facilities
Network Inc.
6.4 Safety for testing equipment
Thermal/Infrared Testing, Level I, II, and III Secondary References

Training References DeWitt, D., and G. Nutter, eds., 1989, Theory and Practice of
Radiation Thermometry, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, NY.
Primary Body of Knowledge References Guyer, E.C., 1999, Handbook of Applied Thermal Design, Taylor &
ASNT, 2001, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 3: Infrared Francis, Philadelphia, PA.
and Thermal Testing, third edition, American Society for
Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.* Henderson, F., and A. Lewis, eds., R. Ryerson, ed. in chief, 1998,
Principles & Applications of Imaging Radar, Vol. 2, John Wiley &
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Infrared and Sons Inc., New York, NY.
Thermal Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Inc., Columbus, OH.* Holman, J., 2000, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw-
Hill, New York.
ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol.
03.03: Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Testing and Holst, G., 1998, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging
Materials, Philadelphia, PA. Systems, third edition. SPIE Press and JCD Publishing Co., Winter
Park, FL.*
ASTM, latest edition, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol.
04.06: Thermal Insulation and Environmental Acoustics, Holst, G., 2001, Common Sense Approach to Thermal Imaging
American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. Systems, SPIE Press and JCD Publishing Co., Winter Park, FL.*
NFPA, 2018, NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety on the Incropera, F., and D. DeWitt, 2001, Fundamentals of Heat and
Workplace, National Fire Protection Association. Mass Transfer, fifth edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,
NY.*
NFPA, 2019, NFPA 70B: Recommended Practice for Electrical
Equipment Maintenance, National Fire Protection Association. Jackson, M., ed., 2009, Earth Observing Platforms & Sensors, Vol.
1.1., John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, NY.
84
Kaplan, H., 2007, Practical Applications of Infrared Thermal Tipler, P., and R. Liewellyn, 2007, Modern Physics, fifth edition,
Sensing and Imaging Equipment, third edition, Tutorial Texts in W.H. Freeman.
Optical Engineering, Volume TT 75, SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA.
Von Baeyer, H., 1999, Warmth Disperses and Time Passes – The
Maldague, X., 2001, Theory and Practice of Infrared Technology for History of Heat, Modern Library.
Nondestructive Evaluation, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,
NY. Wolfe, W., and G. Zissis, eds., 1985, The Infrared Handbook, The
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan (prepared for The
Schlessinger, M., and I. Spiro, 1994, Infrared Technology Department of the Navy).
Fundamentals, Optical Engineering Series/46, second edition. CRC
Press.
Thomas, R.A., 1999, The Thermography Monitoring Handbook, Inc., Columbus, OH.
first edition, Coxmoor Publishing Company.
85
86
UT
Ultrasonic Testing Level I Topical Outline 3.4 Couplants

3.4.1 Purpose and principles
Basic Ultrasonic Testing Course 3.4.2 Materials and their efficiency
Note: It is recommended that the trainee receive instruction 4.0 Basic Testing Methods
in this course prior to performing work in ultrasonic testing 4.1 Contact
(UT). 4.2 Immersion
4.3 Air coupling
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Definition of ultrasonics Ultrasonic Testing Technique Course
1.2 History of UT
1.3 Applications of ultrasonic energy
1.0 Testing Methods
1.4 Basic math review
1.1 Contact
1.1.1 Straight-beam
1.1.2 Angle-beam
2.0 Basic Principles of Acoustics 1.1.3 Surface-wave and plate waves
2.1 Nature of sound waves 1.1.4 Pulse-echo transmission
2.2 Modes of sound-wave generation 1.1.5 Multiple transducer
2.3 Velocity, frequency, and wavelength of sound waves 1.1.6 Curved surfaces
2.4 Attenuation of sound waves 1.1.6.1 Flat entry surfaces
2.5 Acoustic impedance 1.1.6.2 Cylindrical and tubular shapes
2.6 Reflection 1.2 Immersion
2.7 Refraction and mode conversion 1.2.1 Transducer in water
2.8 Snell’s law and critical angles 1.2.2 Water column, wheels, etc.
2.9 Fresnel and fraunhofer effects 1.2.3 Submerged test part
1.2.4 Sound beam path – transducer to part
3.0 Equipment 1.2.5 Focused transducers
3.1 Basic pulse-echo instrumentation (A-scan, B-scan, C- 1.2.6 Curved surfaces
scan, and computerized systems) 1.2.7 Plate waves
3.1.1 Electronics – time-base, pulser, receiver, and 1.2.8 Pulse-echo and through-transmission
various monitor displays 1.3 Comparison of contact and immersion methods
3.1.2 Control functions
3.1.3 Standardization 2.0 Calibration (Electronic and Functional)
3.1.3.1 Basic instrument standardization 2.1 Equipment
3.1.3.2 Reference blocks (types and use) 2.1.1 Monitor displays (amplitude, sweep, etc.)
3.2 Digital thickness instrumentation 2.1.2 Recorders
3.3 Transducer operation and theory 2.1.3 Alarms
3.3.1 Piezoelectric effect 2.1.4 Automatic and semiautomatic systems
3.3.2 Types of transducer elements 2.1.5 Electronic distance/amplitude correction
3.3.3 Frequency (transducer elements – thickness 2.1.6 Transducers
relationships) 2.2 Standardization of equipment electronics
3.3.4 Near field and far field 2.2.1 Variable effects
3.3.5 Beam spread 2.2.2 Transmission accuracy
3.3.6 Construction, materials, and shapes 2.2.3 Standardization requirements
3.3.7 Types (straight, angle, dual, etc.) 2.2.4 Standardization reflectors
3.3.8 Beam-intensity characteristics 2.3 Inspection standardization
3.3.9 Sensitivity, resolution, and damping 2.3.1 Comparison with reference blocks
3.3.10 Mechanical vibration into part 2.3.2 Pulse-echo variables
3.3.11 Other type of transducers (laser UT, EMAT, etc.)
87
2.3.3 Reference for planned tests (straight-beam, angle- 2.4 Pipe and tubular products
beam, etc.) 2.4.1 Manufacturing process
2.3.4 Transmission factors 2.4.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
2.3.5 Transducer discontinuities
2.3.6 Couplants 2.4.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
2.3.7 Materials 2.4.4 Applicable codes/standards
2.5 Forgings
3.0 Straight-Beam Examination to Specific Procedures 2.5.1 Process review
3.1 Selection of parameters 2.5.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
3.2 Test standards discontinuities
3.3 Evaluation of results 2.5.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.4 Test reports 2.5.4 Applicable codes/standards
2.6 Castings
4.0 Angle-Beam Examination to Specific Procedures 2.6.1 Process review
4.1 Selection of parameters 2.6.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
4.2 Test standards discontinuities
4.3 Evaluation of results 2.6.3 Response of ultrasound to discontinuities
4.4 Test reports 2.6.4 Applicable codes/standards
2.7 Composite structures
2.7.1 Process review
Ultrasonic Testing Level II Topical Outline
2.7.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
discontinuities
Ultrasonic Testing Evaluation Course 2.7.3 Response of ultrasound to discontinuities
2.7.4 Applicable codes/standards
1.0 Review of Ultrasonic Testing Technique Course 2.8 Other product forms as applicable – rubber, glass, etc.
1.1 Principles of ultrasonics
1.2 Equipment 3.0 Evaluation of Weldments
1.2.1 A-scan 3.1 Welding processes
1.2.2 B-scan 3.2 Weld geometries
1.2.3 C-scan 3.3 Welding discontinuities
1.2.4 Computerized systems 3.4 Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
1.3 Testing techniques 3.5 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
1.4 Standardization 3.6 Applicable codes/standards
1.4.1 Straight-beam
1.4.2 Angle-beam 4.0 Evaluation of Bonded Structures
1.4.3 Resonance 4.1 Manufacturing processes
1.4.4 Special applications 4.2 Types of discontinuities
2.0 Evaluation of Base-Material Product Forms 4.4 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
2.1 Ingots 4.5 Applicable codes/standards
2.1.1 Process review
2.1.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of 5.0 Discontinuity Detection
discontinuities 5.1 Sensitivity to reflections
2.1.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound 5.1.1 Size, type, and location of discontinuities
2.1.4 Applicable codes/standards 5.1.2 Techniques used in detection
2.2 Plate and sheet 5.1.3 Wave characteristics
2.2.1 Rolling process 5.1.4 Material and velocity
2.2.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of 5.2 Resolution
discontinuities 5.2.1 Standard reference comparisons
2.2.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound 5.2.2 History of part
2.2.4 Applicable codes/standards 5.2.3 Probability of type of discontinuity
2.3 Bar and rod 5.2.4 Degrees of operator discrimination
2.3.1 Forming process 5.2.5 Effects of ultrasonic frequency
2.3.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of 5.2.6 Damping effects
discontinuities 5.3 Determination of discontinuity size
2.3.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound 5.3.1 Various monitor displays and meter indications
2.3.4 Applicable codes/standards 5.3.2 Transducer movement versus display
5.3.3 Two-dimensional testing techniques
5.3.4 Signal patterns
88
5.4 Location of discontinuity 7.0 Standardization

5.4.1 Various monitor displays 7.1 Single probe
5.4.2 Amplitude and linear time 7.2 Tandem probe
5.4.3 Search technique 7.3 Reflectors versus paths
7.4 Delay and velocity
6.0 Evaluation 7.5 Time-corrected gain (TCG)
6.1 Comparison procedures
6.1.1 Standards and references 8.0 FMC Characteristics
6.1.2 Amplitude, area, and distance relationship 8.1 Signal characteristics
6.1.3 Application of results of other NDT methods 8.2 Scale factor for FMC
6.2 Object appraisal 8.3 FMC data size
6.2.1 History of part 8.4 Different FMC techniques
6.2.2 Intended use of part 8.5 FMC versus other data collection
6.2.3 Existing and applicable code interpretation 8.6 How to use FMC data
6.2.4 Type of discontinuity and location 8.7 Typical FMC data explained
9.0 Total Focusing Method (TFM) Characteristics

Full Matrix Capture Ultrasonic Testing 9.1 Signal characteristics
Level II Topical Outline 9.2 TFM frame parameters and FMC
Note: It is recommended that this course have as a minimum pre- 9.3 TFM and delay laws
requisite an Ultrasonic Testing Level II unrestricted certification. 9.4 Focusing capability
9.5 Coverage capability
9.6 Impact of frame parameters on amplitude
The intent of this document is to provide “basic” knowledge on
9.7 Adaptive algorithms
full matrix capture (FMC) ultrasonic testing consistent with other
methods and to acknowledge FMC as unique enough to warrant 10.0 Examination
an additional body of knowledge and qualification requirements. 10.1 Types of equipment
10.1.1 Fully automated
1.0 Overview 10.1.2 Semiautomated
1.1 Introduction 10.1.3 Manual
1.2 Full matrix capture (FMC) terminology 10.1.4 Advantages and disadvantages
1.3 History
1.4 Ultrasonic theory 11.0 Evaluation
1.4.1 Beam divergence 11.1 Display, and display settings
1.4.2 Wavelength 11.1.1 Imaging
1.5 Overview of phased array ultrasonic testing (PAUT) 11.1.2 3D
11.2 Flaw characterization
2.0 Basics of FMC Data Collection 11.3 Flaw dimensioning
11.4 Software tools
3.0 Equipment 11.5 Image artifacts and saturation
3.1 Computer-based system
3.2 Processors and throughput 12.0 Documentation
3.3 Block diagram showing basic internal components 12.1 Images
3.4 Portable versus full computer-based systems 12.2 Equipment settings
12.3 Plotting
4.0 Probe 12.4 Onboard reporting, requirements
4.1 Review of arrays
4.1.1 Types and configurations 13.0 Amplitude
4.1.2 Effects of pitch and element size relevant to sound 13.1 Amplitude fidelity
transmission 13.2 Amplitude subject to resolution
4.1.3 Aperture size and effects 13.3 Amplitude and interface/dead zones
4.2 Probe selection
4.3 Dead-element check 14.0 Use Cases
14.1 Weld examinations
5.0 Essential Variables 14.1.1 Examination volume
14.1.2 Impact of geometry
6.0 Scan Plan 14.1.3 Material type
6.1 Major components of a scan plan 14.1.4 Material thickness
6.2 Paths 14.1.5 Probe considerations
14.1.6 Review typical welding defects and responses
89
14.2 Corrosion examinations 3.3 Probes

14.2.1 Advantages, disadvantages 3.3.1 Composite materials
14.2.2 Probe considerations 3.3.2 Pitch, gap, and size
14.3 Other examples 3.3.3 Passive planes
14.3.1 Aluminum 3.3.4 Active planes
14.3.2 Composites 3.3.5 Arrays: 1D, 2D, polar, annular, special shape, etc.
14.3.3 Effects of probe frequency and wavelength 3.3.6 Beam and wave forming
14.3.4 Manufacturing processes and defects 3.3.7 Grating lobes
14.3.5 Types of welding processes 3.4 Wedges
14.3.6 Historical processes and defects 3.4.1 Types of wedge designs
3.5 Scanners
15.0 Procedures and Requirements 3.5.1 Mechanized
15.1 Codes and standards specific 3.5.2 Manual
15.2 Customized specific applications
4.0 Testing Techniques
4.1 Linear scans
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing Level II 4.2 Sectorial scans
Topical Outline 4.3 Electronic scans
Note: It is recommended that this course have as a minimum
prerequisite of an Ultrasonic Testing Level II unrestricted 5.0 Standardization
certification. 5.1 Active element and probe checks
5.2 Wedge delay
The intent of this document is to provide “basic” knowledge on 5.3 Velocity
phased array ultrasonic testing (PAUT) consistent with other 5.4 Exit point verifications
5.5 Refraction angle verifications
methods and to acknowledge PAUT as unique enough to warrant
5.6 Sensitivity
an additional body of knowledge and qualification requirements.
5.7 DAC, TCG, TVG, and ACG variables and parameters
5.8 Effects of curvature
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing Evaluation Course 5.9 Focusing effects
5.10 Beam steering
1.0 Introduction 5.11 Acquisition gates
1.1 Terminology of PAUT
1.2 History of PAUT – medical ultrasound, etc. 6.0 Data Collection
1.3 Responsibilities of levels of certification 6.1 Single probes
6.2 Multiple probes
2.0 Basic Principles of PAUT 6.3 Multiple groups or multiplexing single/multiple probes
2.1 Review of ultrasonic wave theory: longitudinal and shear 6.4 Nonencoded scans
wave 6.4.1 Time-based data storage
2.2 Introduction to PAUT concepts and theory 6.5 Encoded scans
6.5.1 Line scans
3.0 Equipment 6.5.2 Raster scans
3.1 Computer-based systems 6.6 Zone discrimination
3.1.1 Processors 6.7 Scan plans and exam coverages
3.1.2 Control panel including input and output sockets 6.7.1 Sectorial
3.1.3 Block diagram showing basic internal circuit 6.7.2 Linear
modules 6.7.3 Electronic raster scans
3.1.4 Multi-element/multichannel configurations 6.8 Probe offsets and indexing
3.1.5 Portable battery-operated versus full computer-
based systems 7.0 Procedures
3.2 Focal law generation 7.1 Specific applications
3.2.1 Onboard focal law generator 7.1.1 Material evaluations
3.2.2 External focal law generator 7.1.1.1 Composites
7.1.1.2 Nonmetallic materials
7.1.1.3 Metallic materials
7.1.1.4 Base material scan
7.1.1.5 Bar, rod, and rail
7.1.1.6 Forgings
7.1.1.7 Castings
90
7.1.2 Component evaluations 3.0 Equipment

7.1.2.1 Ease with complex geometries 3.1 Computer-based systems
7.1.2.1.1 Turbines (blades, dovetails, 3.1.1 Processors
rotors) 3.1.2 Control panel including input and output sockets
7.1.2.1.2 Shafts, keyways, etc. 3.1.3 Block diagram showing basic internal circuit
7.1.2.1.3 Nozzles modules
7.1.2.1.4 Flanges 3.1.4 Portable battery-operated versus full computer-
7.1.2.2 Geometric limitations based systems
7.1.3 Weld inspections 3.2 Beam profile tools
7.1.3.1 Fabrication/in-service 3.2.1 Probe center separation (PCS) calculators for
7.1.3.2 Differences in material: carbon steel, “flat” material/components
stainless steel, high-temperature nickel- 3.2.2 PCS calculators for “curved” surfaces
chromium alloy, etc. 3.2.3 Beam-spread effects and control
7.1.3.3 Review of welding discontinuities 3.2.4 Multiple zone coverage and limitations
7.1.3.4 Responses from various discontinuities 3.3 Probes
7.2 Data presentations 3.3.1 Composite materials
7.2.1 Standard (A-scan, B-scan, and C-scan) 3.3.2 Damping characteristics
7.2.2 Other (D-scan, S-scan, etc.) 3.3.3 Selection of frequency and diameter
7.3 Data evaluation 3.4 Wedges
7.3.1 Codes/standards/specifications 3.4.1 Incident- and refracted-angle selections
7.3.2 Flaw characterization 3.4.2 High-temperature applications
7.3.3 Flaw dimensioning 3.5 Scanners
7.3.4 Geometry 3.5.1 Mechanized
7.3.5 Software tools 3.5.2 Manual
7.3.6 Evaluation gates
7.4 Reporting 4.0 Testing Techniques
7.4.1 Imaging outputs 4.1 Line scans (single tandem probe setups)
7.4.2 Onboard reporting tools 4.2 Line scans (multiple probe setups)
7.4.3 Plotting, ACAD, etc. 4.3 Raster scans
Time of Flight Diffraction Level II Topical 5.0 Standardization

5.1 Material velocity calculations
Outline 5.2 Combined probe delay(s) calculation(s)
Note: It is recommended that this course have as a minimum pre- 5.3 Digitization rates and sampling
requisite an Ultrasonic Testing Level II unrestricted certification. 5.4 Signal averaging
5.5 Pulse width control
5.6 PCS and angle selection
The intent of this document is to provide “basic” knowledge on
5.7 Sensitivity
time of flight diffraction (TOFD) ultrasonic testing consistent with
5.8 Preamplifiers
other methods and to acknowledge TOFD as unique enough to 5.9 Effects of curvature
warrant an additional body of knowledge and qualification
requirements. 6.0 Data Collection
6.1 Single probe setups
Time of Flight Diffraction Evaluation Course 6.2 Multiple probe setups
6.3 Nonencoded scans
1.0 Introduction 6.3.1 Time-based data storage
1.1 Terminology of TOFD 6.4 Encoded scans
1.2 History of TOFD (e.g., M.G. Silk) 6.4.1 Line scans
1.3 Responsibilities of levels of certification 6.4.2 Raster scans
6.5 Probe offsets and indexing
2.0 Basic Principles of TOFD
2.1 Review of ultrasonic wave theory, refracted longitudinal 7.0 Procedures
waves 7.1 Specific applications
2.2 Introduction to TOFD concepts and theory 7.1.1 Material evaluations
2.3 Technique limitations 7.1.1.1 Base material scans
91
7.1.2 Weld inspections 2.0 Equipment/Materials

7.1.2.1 Detection and evaluation of fabrication 2.1 Equipment
welding flaws 2.1.1 Pulse-echo instrumentation
7.1.2.2 Detection and evaluation of in-service 2.1.1.1 Controls and circuits
cracking 2.1.1.2 Pulse generation (spike, square wave, and
7.1.2.3 Detection of volumetric loss such as weld toneburst pulsers)
root erosion and partial penetration weld 2.1.1.3 Signal detection
dimensional verifications 2.1.1.4 Display and recording methods, A-scan,
7.1.2.4 Geometric limitations B-scan, and C-scan and digital
7.1.2.5 Cladding thickness and integrity 2.1.1.5 Sensitivity and resolution
evaluations 2.1.1.6 Gates, alarms, and attenuators
7.1.3 Complex geometries 2.1.1.6.1 Basic instrument standardization
7.1.3.1 Transitions, nozzles, branch connections, and calibration
tees, saddles, etc. 2.1.1.6.2 Reference blocks
7.2 Data presentations 2.1.2 Digital thickness instrumentation
7.2.1 Standard (A-scan, D-scan) 2.1.3 Transducer operation and theory
7.2.2 Other (B-scan, C-scan) 2.1.3.1 Piezoelectric effect
7.3 Data evaluation 2.1.3.2 Types of transducer elements
7.3.1 Codes/standards/specifications 2.1.3.3 Frequency (transducer elements –
7.3.2 Flaw characterization thickness relationships)
7.3.3 Flaw dimensioning 2.1.3.4 Near field and far field
7.3.4 Geometry 2.1.3.5 Beam spread
7.3.5 Software tools 2.1.3.6 Construction, materials, and shapes
7.3.5.1 Linearization 2.1.3.7 Types (straight, angle, dual, etc.)
7.3.5.2 Lateral/back wall straightening and 2.1.3.8 Beam intensity characteristics
removal 2.1.3.9 Sensitivity, resolution, and damping
7.3.5.3 Synthetic aperture focusing technique 2.1.3.10 Mechanical vibration into parts
(SAFT) 2.1.3.11 Other types of transducers (laser UT,
7.3.5.4 Spectrum processing EMAT, etc.)
7.3.5.5 Curved surface compensation 2.1.4 Transducer operation/manipulations
7.3.6 Parabolic cursor(s) 2.1.4.1 Tanks, bridges, manipulators, and
7.4 Reporting squirters
7.4.1 Imaging outputs 2.1.4.2 Wheels and special hand devices
7.4.2 Onboard reporting tools 2.1.4.3 Transfer devices for materials
7.4.3 Plotting, ACAD, etc. 2.1.4.4 Manual manipulation
2.1.5 Resonance testing equipment
2.1.5.1 Bond testing
Ultrasonic Testing Level III Topical Outline 2.1.5.2 Thickness testing
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 Couplants
1.1 General
2.2.1.1 Contact
1.2 Principles of acoustics
2.2.1.1.1 Purpose and principles
1.2.1 Nature of sound waves
2.2.1.1.2 Materials and their efficiency
1.2.2 Modes of sound wave generation
2.2.1.2 Immersion
1.2.3 Velocity, frequency, and wavelength of sound
2.2.1.2.1 Purpose and principles
waves
2.2.1.2.2 Materials and their efficiency
1.2.4 Attenuation of sound waves
2.2.1.3 Air coupling
1.2.5 Acoustic impedance
2.2.2 Reference blocks
1.2.6 Reflection
2.2.3 Cables/connectors
1.2.7 Refraction and mode-conversion
2.2.4 Test specimen
1.2.8 Snell’s law and critical angles
2.2.5 Miscellaneous materials
1.2.9 Fresnel and fraunhofer effects
3.0 Techniques/Standardization
3.1 Contact
3.1.1 Straight-beam
3.1.2 Angle-beam
3.1.3 Surface-wave and plate waves
3.1.4 Pulse-echo transmission
92
3.1.5 Multiple transducer 4.1.2.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound

3.1.6 Curved surfaces 4.1.2.4 Applicable codes, standards,
3.2 Immersion specifications
3.2.1 Transducer in water 4.1.3 Bar and rod
3.2.2 Water column, wheels, etc. 4.1.3.1 Process review
3.2.3 Submerged test part 4.1.3.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
3.2.4 Sound beam path – transducer to part discontinuities
3.2.5 Focused transducers 4.1.3.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.2.6 Curved surfaces 4.1.3.4 Applicable codes, standards,
3.2.7 Plate waves specifications
3.2.8 Pulse-echo and through-transmission 4.1.4 Pipe and tubular products
3.3 Comparison of contact and immersion methods 4.1.4.1 Process review
3.4 Remote monitoring 4.1.4.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
3.5 Standardization (electronic and functional) discontinuities
3.5.1 General 4.1.4.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.5.2 Reference reflectors for standardization 4.1.4.4 Applicable codes, standards,
3.5.2.1 Balls and flat-bottom holes specifications
3.5.2.2 Area-amplitude blocks 4.1.5 Forgings
3.5.2.3 Distance-amplitude blocks 4.1.5.1 Process review
3.5.2.4 Notches 4.1.5.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
3.5.2.5 Side-drilled holes discontinuities
3.5.2.6 Special blocks – IIW and others 4.1.5.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.5.3 Equipment 4.1.5.4 Applicable codes, standards,
3.5.3.1 Various monitor displays (amplitude, specifications
sweep, etc.) 4.1.6 Castings
3.5.3.2 Recorders 4.1.6.1 Process review
3.5.3.3 Alarms 4.1.6.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
3.5.3.4 Automatic and semiautomatic systems discontinuities
3.5.3.5 Electronic distance amplitude correction 4.1.6.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.5.3.6 Transducers 4.1.6.4 Applicable codes, standards,
3.5.4 Standardization of equipment electronics specifications
3.5.4.1 Variable effects 4.1.7 Composite structures
3.5.4.2 Transmission accuracy 4.1.7.1 Process review
3.5.4.3 Standardization and calibration 4.1.7.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
requirements discontinuities
3.5.4.4 Standardization reflectors 4.1.7.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.5.5 Inspection standardization 4.1.7.4 Applicable codes, standards,
3.5.5.1 Comparison with reference blocks specifications
3.5.5.2 Pulse-echo variables 4.1.8 Miscellaneous product forms as applicable
3.5.5.3 Reference for planned tests (straight- (rubber, glass, etc.)
beam, angle-beam, etc.) 4.1.8.1 Process review
3.5.5.4 Transmission factors 4.1.8.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
3.5.5.5 Transducers discontinuities
3.5.5.6 Couplants 4.1.8.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
3.5.5.7 Materials 4.1.8.4 Applicable codes, standards,
specifications
4.0 Interpretations/Evaluations 4.2 Evaluation of weldments
4.1 Evaluation of base material product forms 4.2.1 Process review
4.1.1 Ingots 4.2.2 Weld geometries
4.1.1.1 Process review 4.2.3 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
4.1.1.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of discontinuities
discontinuities 4.2.4 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
4.1.1.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound 4.2.5 Applicable codes, standards, specifications
4.1.1.4 Applicable codes, standards, 4.3 Evaluation of bonded structures
specifications 4.3.1 Manufacturing process
4.1.2 Plate and sheet 4.3.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of
4.1.2.1 Process review discontinuities
4.1.2.2 Types, origin, and typical orientation of 4.3.3 Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
discontinuities 4.3.4 Applicable codes, standards, specifications
93
4.4 Variables affecting test results 2.2.3 Delay laws or focal laws
4.4.1 Instrument performance variations 2.2.4 Imaging
4.4.2 Transducer performance variations 2.2.5 Dynamic depth focusing
4.4.3 Test specimen variations
4.4.3.1 Surface condition 3.0 Equipment
4.4.3.2 Part geometry 3.1 Computer-based systems
4.4.3.3 Material structure 3.1.1 Processors
4.4.4 Discontinuity variations 3.1.2 Control panel including input and output sockets
4.4.4.1 Size and geometry 3.1.3 Block diagram showing basic internal circuit
4.4.4.2 Relation to entry surface modules
4.4.4.3 Type of discontinuity 3.1.4 Multi-element/multichannel configurations
4.4.5 Procedure variations 3.1.5 Portable batteryoperated versus full computer-
4.4.5.1 Recording criteria based systems
4.4.5.2 Acceptance criteria 3.2 Focal law generation
4.4.6 Personnel variations 3.2.1 Onboard focal law generator
4.4.6.1 Skill level in interpretation of results 3.2.2 External focal law generator
4.4.6.2 Knowledge level in interpretation of 3.3 Probes
results 3.3.1 Composite materials
4.5 Evaluation (general) 3.3.2 Passive planes
4.5.1 Comparison procedures 3.3.3 Active planes
4.5.1.1 Standards and references 3.3.4 Arrays: 1D, 2D, polar, annular, special shape, etc.
4.5.1.2 Amplitude, area, distance relationship 3.3.4.1 Linear arrays
4.5.1.3 Application of results of other NDT 3.3.4.1.1 Aperture (active, effective,
methods minimum, passive)
4.5.2 Object appraisal 3.3.4.1.2 Element pitch, gap, width, and
4.5.2.1 History of part size
4.5.2.2 Intended use of part 3.3.5 Beam and wave forming
4.5.2.3 Existing and applicable code 3.3.5.1 Sweep range
interpretation 3.3.5.2 Steering focus power
4.5.2.4 Type of discontinuity and location 3.3.5.3 Compensation gain
3.3.5.4 Beam (length and width)
5.0 Procedures 3.3.5.5 Focal depth, depth of field, and focal
5.1 Specific applications range
5.1.1 General 3.3.5.6 Resolution
5.1.2 Flaw detection 3.3.5.6.1 Near-surface resolution
5.1.3 Thickness measurement 3.3.5.6.2 Far-surface resolution
5.1.4 Bond evaluation 3.3.5.6.3 Lateral and axial resolution
5.1.5 Fluid flow measurement 3.3.5.6.4 Angular-surface resolution
5.1.6 Material properties measurements 3.3.6 Lobes
5.1.7 Computer control and defect analysis 3.3.6.1 Main lobes
5.1.8 Liquid level sensing 3.3.6.2 Side lobes
5.1.9 Process control 3.3.6.3 Grating lobes
5.1.10 Field inspection 3.3.6.4 Grating lobe amplitude
5.2 Codes, standards, specifications 3.3.7 Beam apodization
3.4 Wedges
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing 3.4.1 Types of wedge designs
3.5 Scanners
3.5.1 Mechanized
1.0 Introduction
3.5.2 Manual
1.1 Terminology of PAUT
1.2 History of PAUT – medical ultrasound, etc.
4.0 Testing Techniques
4.1 Linear scans
4.2 Sectorial scans
2.0 Basic Principles of PAUT
4.3 Electronic scans
2.1 Review of ultrasonic wave theory: longitudinal- and
shear-wave
5.0 Standardization
2.2 Introduction to PAUT concepts and theory
5.1 Active element and probe checks
2.2.1 Phasing
5.2 Wedge delay
2.2.2 Beam scanning patterns
94
5.3 Velocity 7.3.4 Geometry

5.4 Exit point verifications 7.3.5 Software tools
5.5 Refraction angle verifications 7.3.6 Evaluation gates
5.6 Sensitivity 7.4 Reporting
5.7 DAC, TCG, TVG, and ACG variables and parameters 7.4.1 Imaging outputs
5.8 Effects of curvature 7.4.2 Onboard reporting tools
5.9 Focusing effects 7.4.3 Plotting, ACAD, etc.
5.10 Beam steering
5.11 Acquisition gates Time of Flight Diffraction
6.0 Data Collection
1.0 Introduction
6.1 Single probes
1.1 Terminology of TOFD
6.2 Multiple probes
1.2 History of TOFD (e.g., M.G. Silk)
6.3 Multiple groups or multiplexing single/multiple probes
6.4 Nonencoded scans
6.4.1 Time-based data storage
2.0 Basic Principles of TOFD
6.5 Encoded scans
2.1 Review of ultrasonic wave theory, refracted longitudinal
6.5.1 Line scans
waves
6.5.2 Raster scans
2.2 Introduction to TOFD concepts and theory
6.6 Zone discrimination
2.3 Technique limitations
6.7 Scan plans and exam coverages
6.7.1 Sectorial
6.7.2 Linear 3.0 Equipment
6.7.3 Electronic raster scans 3.1 Computer-based systems
6.8 Probe offsets and indexing 3.1.1 Processors
3.1.2 Control panel including input and output sockets
3.1.3 Block diagram showing basic internal circuit
7.0 Procedures
modules
3.1.4 Portable battery-operated versus full computer-
7.1.1 Material evaluations
based systems
7.1.1.1 Composites
3.2 Beam profile tools
7.1.1.2 Nonmetallic materials
3.2.1 Probe center separation (PCS) calculators for
7.1.1.3 Metallic materials
“flat” material/components
7.1.1.4 Base material scan
3.2.2 PCS calculators for “curved” surfaces
7.1.1.5 Bar, rod, and rail
3.2.3 Beam-spread effects and control
7.1.1.6 Forgings
3.2.4 Multiple-zone coverage and limitations
7.1.1.7 Castings
3.3 Probes
7.1.2 Component evaluations
3.3.1 Composite materials
7.1.2.1 Ease with complex geometries
3.3.2 Damping characteristics
7.1.2.1.1 Turbines (blades, dovetails,
3.3.3 Selection of frequency and diameter
rotors)
3.4 Wedges
7.1.2.1.2 Shafts, keyways, etc.
3.4.1 Incident and refracted angle selections
7.1.2.1.3 Nozzles
3.4.2 High-temperature applications
7.1.2.1.4 Flanges
3.5 Scanners
7.1.2.2 Geometric limitations
3.5.1 Mechanized
7.1.3 Weld inspections
3.5.2 Manual
7.1.3.1 Fabrication/in-service
7.1.3.2 Differences in material: carbon steel,
stainless steel, high-temperature nickel- 4.0 Testing Techniques
chromium alloy, etc. 4.1 Line scans (single tandem-probe setups)
7.1.3.3 Review of welding discontinuities 4.2 Line scans (multiple-probe setups)
7.1.3.4 Responses from various discontinuities 4.3 Raster scans
7.2 Data presentations
7.2.1 Standard (A-scan, B-scan, and C-scan) 5.0 Standardization
7.2.2 Other (D-scan, S-scan, etc.) 5.1 Material velocity calculations
7.3 Data evaluation 5.2 Combined probe delay(s) calculation(s)
7.3.1 Codes, standards, specifications 5.3 Digitization rates and sampling
7.3.2 Flaw characterization 5.4 Signal averaging
7.3.3 Flaw dimensioning 5.5 Pulse width control
95
5.6 PCS and angle selection Ultrasonic Testing, Level I, II, and III
5.7 Sensitivity Training References
5.8 Preamplifiers ASNT, 2007, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 7: Ultrasonic
5.9 Effects of curvature Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive
6.0 Data Collection
6.1 Single-probe setups ASNT, 2015, Ultrasonic Testing Classroom Training Book (PTP
6.2 Multiple-probe setups Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
6.3 Nonencoded scans Columbus, OH.*
6.3.1 Time-based data storage ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Ultrasonic
6.4 Encoded scans Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
6.4.1 Line scans Columbus, OH.*
6.4.2 Raster scans
6.5 Probe offsets and indexing ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Ultrasonic
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
7.0 Procedures Columbus, OH.*
7.1.1 Material evaluations ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Ultrasonic
7.1.1.1 Base material scans Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
7.1.2 Weld inspections Columbus, OH.*
7.1.2.1 Detection and evaluation of fabrication Dube, N., 2004, Introduction to Phased Array Ultrasonic
welding flaws Technology Application: R/D Tech Guideline, R/D Tech/Olympus
7.1.2.2 Detection and evaluation of in-service NDT, Waltham, MA.
cracking
7.1.2.3 Detection of volumetric loss such as weld Dube, N., 2007, Advances in Phased Array Ultrasonic Technology
root erosion and partial penetration weld Applications, Olympus NDT, Waltham, MA.
dimensional verifications
7.1.2.4 Geometric limitations
* Available from the American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
7.1.2.5 Cladding thickness and integrity Columbus, OH.
evaluations
7.1.3 Complex geometries
7.1.3.1 Transitions, nozzles, branch connections, Limited Certification for Ultrasonic Digital
tees, saddles, etc. Thickness Measurement Topical Outline
7.2 Data presentations
7.2.1 Standard (A-scan, D-scan) 1.0 Principles/Theory
7.2.2 Other (B-scan, C-scan) 1.1 General
7.3 Data evaluation 1.2 Principles of acoustics
7.3.1 Codes/standards/specifications 1.2.1 Nature of sound waves
7.3.2 Flaw characterization 1.2.2 Modes of sound wave generation
7.3.3 Flaw dimensioning 1.2.3 Velocity, frequency, and wavelength of sound
7.3.4 Geometry waves
7.3.5 Software tools 1.2.4 Attenuation/scattering of sound waves
7.3.5.1 Linearization
7.3.5.2 Lateral/back wall straightening and 2.0 Equipment/Materials
removal 2.1 Equipment
7.3.5.3 Synthetic aperture focusing technique 2.1.1 Pulse-echo instrumentation
(SAFT) 2.1.1.1 Pulse generation
7.3.5.4 Spectrum processing 2.1.1.2 Signal detection
7.3.5.5 Curved surface compensation 2.1.1.3 Display and recording methods, A-scan,
7.3.6 Parabolic cursor(s) B-scan, C-scan, and digital
7.4 Reporting 2.1.1.4 Sensitivity and resolution
7.4.1 Imaging outputs 2.1.2 Digital thickness instrumentation
7.4.2 Onboard reporting tools 2.1.3 Transducer operation and theory
7.4.3 Plotting, ACAD, etc. 2.1.3.1 Piezoelectric effect
2.1.3.2 Frequency (crystal-thickness
relationships)
2.1.3.3 Types (straight, angle, single, dual, etc.)
96
2.2 Materials 2.1.1.4 Display and recording methods, A-scan,

2.2.1 Couplants B-scan, C-scan, and digital
2.2.1.1 Purpose and principles 2.1.1.5 Sensitivity and resolution
2.2.1.2 Material and their efficiency 2.1.1.6 Gates, alarms, and attenuators
2.2.2 Reference blocks 2.1.1.7 Basic instrument standardization
2.2.3 Cables/connectors 2.1.1.8 Reference blocks
2.2.4 Test specimen 2.1.2 Digital thickness instrumentation
2.1.3 Transducer operation and theory
3.0 Techniques/Standardization – Contact Straight Beam 2.1.3.1 Piezoelectric effect
2.1.3.2 Types of crystals
2.1.3.3 Frequency (crystal-thickness
4.0 Variables Affecting Test Results
relationships)
4.1 Instrument performance variations
2.1.3.4 Types (straight, angle, single, dual, etc.)
4.2 Transducer performance variations
2.1.4 Resonance testing equipment
4.3 Test specimen variations
2.1.4.1 Thickness testing
4.3.1 Surface condition
2.2 Materials
4.3.2 Part geometry
2.2.1 Couplants
4.3.3 Material structure
2.2.1.1 Purpose and principles
2.2.1.2 Material and their efficiency
5.0 Procedure/Specification Applications/Thickness
2.2.2 Reference blocks
Measurement
2.2.3 Cables/connectors
2.2.4 Test specimen
Limited Certification for Ultrasonic A-scan 2.2.5 Miscellaneous materials
Thickness Measurement Topical Outline
3.0 Techniques/Standardization – Contact Straight-Beam
1.0 Principles/Theory 3.1 Contact
1.1 General 3.1.1 Straight-beam
1.2 Principles of acoustics 3.1.2 Pulse-echo transmission
1.2.1 Nature of sound waves
1.2.2 Modes of sound wave generation 4.0 Variables Affecting Test Results
1.2.3 Velocity, frequency, and wavelength of sound 4.1 Instrument performance variations
waves 4.2 Transducer performance variations
1.2.4 Attenuation of sound waves 4.3 Test specimen variations
1.2.5 Acoustic impedance 4.3.1 Surface condition
1.2.6 Reflection 4.3.2 Part geometry
4.3.3 Material structure
2.0 Equipment/Materials 4.4 Personnel variations
2.1 Equipment 4.4.1 Skill level in interpretation of results
2.1.1 Pulse-echo instrumentation 4.4.2 Knowledge level in interpretation of results
2.1.1.1 Controls and circuits
2.1.1.2 Pulse generation 5.0 Procedures
2.1.1.3 Signal detection 5.1 Thickness measurement
97
98
VA
Vibration Analysis Topical Outlines
Vibration Analysis Level I Topical Outline 2.0 Data Collection Procedures

2.1 Upload/download route
2.2 Following a route
Basic Vibration Analysis Physics Course 2.3 Data acquisition
2.3.1 Recognize good versus bad data
1.0 Introduction 2.3.2 Perform machine observations
1.1 Brief history of NDT/PdM and vibration analysis (VA) 2.3.3 Recognize abnormal conditions (exceptions data)
1.2 The purpose of VA (condition monitoring)
1.3 Basic principles of VA 3.0 Safety and Health
1.4 Basic terminology of VA to include: 3.1 Mechanical
1.4.1 Measurement units 3.2 Electrical
1.4.2 Measurement orientation 3.3 Environmental/chemical
1.4.3 Hardware
1.4.4 Software and signal processing
1.4.5 Machine components Vibration Analysis Level II Topical Outline
1.4.6 Data presentation
Intermediate Vibration Analysis Physics Course
2.0 Transducers
2.1 Types 1.0 Review
2.2 Applications 1.1 Basic principles
2.3 Mounting 1.2 Basic terminology
2.4 Limitations 1.3 Transducers
1.4 Instrumentation
3.0 Instrumentation
3.1 Types 2.0 Additional Terminology
3.2 Applications 2.1 Data acquisition
3.3 Limitations 2.2 Signal processing
2.3 Data presentation
Basic Vibration Analysis Operating Course
3.0 Diagnostic Tools
1.0 Machinery Basics 3.1 Phase
1.1 Machine types to include: 3.2 Fast fourier transform (FFT)
1.1.1 Motors 3.3 Time waveform
1.1.2 Pumps 3.4 Orbit analysis
1.1.3 Gearboxes 3.5 Bode/nyquist
1.1.4 Air handlers 3.6 Trend analysis
1.1.5 Compressors
1.1.6 Turbines Intermediate Vibration Analysis Techniques
1.1.7 Rolls Course
1.2 Machine components to include:
1.2.1 Bearings
1.0 Data Acquisition
1.2.2 Couplings
1.1 Units
1.2.3 Rotors
1.2 Analysis parameters
1.2.4 Gears
1.3 Alarm levels
1.2.5 Impellers
1.4 Time constant (minimum/maximum)
1.2.6 Belts/chains
1.5 Speed consideration
1.3 Machine orientations
1.6 Lines of resolution
1.7 Overlap
1.8 Number of averages (specifications)
99
1.9 Averaging types and data collection methods Vibration Analysis Level III Topical Outline
1.10 Windows
1.11 Sensitivity The principles and theory section, or any other section, is not
1.12 Special transducers intended to be covered as a completely separate section. This cate-
1.13 Routes (data collection) and online systems gory just means that somewhere in the material for training it is
1.14 Transducer selections necessary to cover the basic theory and principles on those topics.
1.15 Transducer location
1.16 Types of data collection 1.0 Principles/Theory
1.17 Resonance testing The vibration data provides detailed information about the
1.18 Check (instrument) standardization condition of a machine and its components. Data can be
1.19 Codes, standards, and specifications processed and presented in different ways to help the analyst
in diagnosing specific problems. The section on principles
2.0 Signal Processing and theory provides the concepts of VA.
2.1 Windows/weighting 1.1 Physical concepts
2.1.1 Hanning 1.1.1 Sources of vibration
2.1.2 Uniform 1.1.2 Stiffness
2.2 Overlap 1.1.3 Mass
2.3 Filters 1.1.4 Damping
2.3.1 High-pass 1.1.5 Phase
2.3.2 Low-pass 1.1.6 Modes of vibration
2.3.3 Bandpass 1.1.7 Resonance
2.4 Sampling rate and size 1.2 Data presentation
2.5 Digital versus analog 1.2.1 Units of measurement of spectrum
1.2.2 Waveform
3.0 Data Presentation 1.2.3 Phase analysis
3.1 Scope and limitations of different testing methods 1.3 Sources of vibration
3.2 Waterfall/cascades 1.3.1 Reciprocating machinery analysis
3.3 Linear versus logarithmic 1.3.2 Specialty machine concepts
3.4 Trends 1.3.2.1 Nonlinear behavior
3.5 Changing units 1.4 Correction methods
3.6 True zoom and expansion 1.4.1 Absorbers
3.7 Order and/or frequency 1.4.2 Damping treatments
1.4.3 Changing mass
4.0 Problem Identification 1.4.4 Changing stiffness
4.1 Unbalance 1.4.5 Changing operating speed
4.2 Misalignment
4.3 Resonance 2.0 Equipment
4.4 Bearing defects This section under equipment includes instrumentation,
4.5 Looseness sensors, and cabling used in VA.
4.6 Bent shafts 2.1 Sensors
4.7 Gear defects 2.1.1 Attachments (brackets, connectors, sensor mounting)
4.8 Electrical defects 2.1.2 Cabling
4.9 Hydraulic/flow dynamics 2.2 Signal conditioning
4.10 Rubs 2.2.1 Averaging methods
4.11 Belts and couplings 2.2.2 Windows and weighting
4.12 Eccentricity 2.2.3 Triggering
2.2.4 Spectral and time-domain resolution
5.0 Reporting Methodology 2.3 Instruments
5.1 Technical reports 2.3.1 Portable, route-based data collector
5.2 Management-oriented reports 2.3.2 Online surveillance data collector
5.3 Oral reports 2.3.3 Unfiltered meter (i.e., vibration pen)
2.3.4 Multi-channel transient data recorder
6.0 Safety and Health 2.4 Equipment response to environments performance based
6.1 Mechanical 2.4.1 Temperature gradients
6.2 Electrical 2.4.2 Moisture
6.3 Environmental
100
Vibration Analysis Topical Outlines
3.0 Techniques/Standardization 4.3.3 Failure mode and effects analysis

Description of ways in which VA equipment can be used to 4.3.4 Root cause analysis
perform vibration measurements and to analyze the results. 4.3.5 Cost justification or return on investment analysis
This includes routine field standardization and correction of
measured data due to effects of test equipment. 5.0 Procedures
3.1 Standardization To be able to develop procedures for performing the various
3.1.1 Point sensor standardization types of testing techniques needed to determine equipment
3.1.2 Instrument standardization condition.
3.1.3 Test instrument standardization
3.2 Measurement and techniques 6.0 Safety and Health
3.2.1 Order tracking Working in close proximity to operating equipment
3.2.2 Time synchronous averaging containing a great deal of energy, special care must be taken
3.2.3 Cross channel measurements to avoid injury in addition to using specific personal
3.2.4 Transient analysis protective equipment.
3.2.5 Modal analysis fundamentals 6.1 Mechanical
3.2.6 Operating deflection shape analysis 6.2 Electrical
3.2.6.1 Frequency domain 6.3 Environmental/chemical
3.2.6.2 Time domain
3.2.7 Natural frequency tests
3.2.8 Torsional vibration techniques Vibration Analysis, Level I, II, and III
3.2.9 Specialized VA techniques (high-frequency Training References
detection, demodulated spectrum, spike-energy API, 2010, API STD 610: Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum,
spectrum, negative averaging, shock pulse, etc.) Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries, 11th edition, American
3.3 Vibration correction techniques Petroleum Institute.
3.3.1 Change mass, stiffness, and/or damping
API, 2014, API STD 670: Machinery Protection Systems, fifth edi-
3.3.2 Alignment
tion, American Petroleum Institute.
3.3.3 Clearances on journal bearings
3.3.4 Correct beats Bloch, H., 1998, Practical Machinery Management for Process
3.3.5 Static/dynamic balancing Plants, Vol. 1: Improving Machinery Reliability, third edition,
3.3.6 Dynamic absorber Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA.
3.3.7 Eliminate looseness
3.3.8 Isolation treatments Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 2012, Practical Machinery Management
3.3.9 Speed change for Process Plants, Vol. 2: Machinery Failure Analysis and
Troubleshooting, fourth edition, Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA.
4.0 Analysis/Evaluation Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 2005, Practical Machinery Management
Ability to analyze test data, perform an evaluation, and for Process Plants, Vol. 3: Machinery Component Maintenance and
recommend remedial action Repair, Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA.
4.1 Equipment considerations
4.1.1 Low-speed (<600 rpm) Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 1997, Practical Machinery Management
4.1.2 High-speed (>4000 rpm) for Process Plants, Vol. 4: Major Process Equipment Maintenance
4.1.3 Variable-speed drive (electrical) and Repair, second edition, Gulf Professional Publishing Co.
4.1.4 Variable-speed drive (i.e., gas or steam turbine)
4.1.5 Reciprocating machinery Crawford, A., 1992, The Simplified Handbook of Vibration
4.1.6 Gear type (e.g, spur, helical, worm, epicyclic, etc.) Analysis, Volume I, Introduction to Vibration Analysis, CSI,
4.1.7 Pump type (e.g, centrifugal, positive Knoxville, TN.
displacement, etc.) Crawford, A., 1992, The Simplified Handbook of Vibration
4.1.8 Bearing type (e.g, fluid film, anti-friction, etc.) Analysis, Volume II, Applied Vibration Analysis, CSI, Knoxville,
4.1.9 Process variables TN.
4.2 Data analysis
4.2.1 Operational effects Den Hartog, J., 2008, Mechanical Vibrations, Crastre Pres,
4.2.2 Correlation of test data Mineola, NY.
4.2.3 Transient analysis
4.2.4 In-depth time waveform analysis Eisenmann Sr., R., and R. Eisenmann Jr., 1997, Machinery
4.2.5 Cross-channel analysis Malfunction Diagnosis and Correction: Vibration Analysis and
4.2.6 Multichannel analysis Troubleshooting for Process Industries, Prentice Hall Printers,
4.2.7 Machinery-specific analysis Upper Saddle River, NJ.
4.3 Data evaluation Goldman, S., 1999, Vibration Spectrum Analysis, second edition,
4.3.1 Evaluation of data to standards/codes Industrial Press, New York.
4.3.2 Specifications or acceptance criteria
101
HI, 2009, ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2009, Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Taylor, J., 2003, The Bearing Analysis Handbook, Vibration
Measurement and Allowable Values, Hydraulic Institute, Consultants, Tampa, FL.
Englewood, CO.
Taylor, J., 2003, The Gear Analysis Handbook, Vibration
Jackson, C., 2012, Practical Vibration Primer, Gulf Publishing Co. Consultants, Tampa, FL.
Mitchell, J., 1993, An Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Taylor, J., 2003, The Vibration Analysis Handbook, Vibration
Monitoring, PenWell Publishing Co., Tulsa, OK. Consultants, Tampa, FL.
Piersol, A., and T. Paez, 2009, Harris’ Shock and Vibration Wowk, V., 1994, Machinery Vibration: Balancing, McGraw-Hill.
Handbook, sixth edition, McGraw-Hill Inc.
Wowk, V., 1991, Machinery Vibration: Measurement and Analysis,
Schneider, H., 1991, Balancing Technology, Schenck Trebel McGraw-Hill.
Corporation, Deer Park, NY.
102
VT
Visual Testing Topical Outlines
Visual Testing Level I Topical Outline 6.0 VT to Specific Procedures

6.1 Selection of parameters
Note: The guidelines listed below should be implemented using 6.1.1 Inspection objectives
equipment and procedures relevant to the employer’s industry. No 6.1.2 Inspection checkpoints
times are given for a specific subject; this should be specified in the 6.1.3 Sampling plans
employer’s written practice. Based upon the employer’s product, 6.1.4 Inspection patterns
not all of the referenced subcategories need apply. 6.1.5 Documented procedures
6.2 Test standards/standardization
1.0 Introduction 6.3 Classification of indications per acceptance criteria
1.1 Definition of visual testing (VT) 6.4 Reports and documentation
1.2 History of VT
1.3 Overview of VT applications Visual Testing Level II Topical Outline
The guidelines listed below should be implemented using equip-
2.0 Definitions
ment and procedures relevant to the employer’s industry. The
Standard terms and their meanings in the employer’s
employer should tailor the program to the company’s particular
industry
application area. Discontinuity cause, appearance, and how to best
3.0 Fundamentals visually detect and identify these discontinuities should be empha-
3.1 Vision sized. No times are given for a specific subject; this should be spec-
3.2 Lighting ified in the employer’s written practice. Depending upon the
3.3 Material attributes employer’s product, not all the referenced subcategories need
3.4 Environmental factors apply.
3.5 Visual perception A Level I class should precede every Level II class. When a
3.6 Direct and indirect methods Level II certification is sought in one step, the Level I topics shall
be blended into this Level II topical outline. The combined outline
4.0 Equipment (as applicable) must be reviewed and accepted by the responsible Level III.
4.1 Mirrors
4.2 Magnifiers 1.0 Purpose and Scope of VT
4.3 Borescopes 1.1 Scope
4.4 Fiber borescopes 1.1.1 Internal quality control
4.5 Video borescopes 1.1.2 Quality control by the customer
4.6 Remote visual inspection systems 1.1.3 Quality control by authorities
4.7 Light sources and special lighting 1.2 VT looks for
4.8 Gauges (welding, go/no-go, etc.) templates, scales, 1.2.1 Discontinuities
micrometers, calipers, special tools, etc. 1.2.2 Shape and geometry deviations
4.9 Automated systems 1.2.3 Surface finish
4.10 Computer-enhanced systems 1.3 Time of application
1.3.1 During manufacture
5.0 Employer-Defined Applications 1.3.2 In service
(Includes a description of inherent, processing, and service-
induced discontinuities) 2.0 Elements of Vision
5.1 Mineral-based material 2.1 Mechanics of vision
5.2 Metallic materials, including welds 2.2 Adaptation and accommodation
5.3 Organic-based materials 2.3 Vision limitations
5.4 Other materials (employer defined) 2.3.1 Perception and environmental conditions
2.3.2 Orientation, visual angle, and distance
103
2.3.3 Ophthalmic disorders 7.3 Service-induced discontinuities

2.3.4 Mental attitude and fatigue 7.3.1 Caused by mechanical loads (e.g., fatigue)
2.3.5 Physiology and health 7.3.2 Caused by thermal loads (e.g., thermal shock)
2.4 Vision acuity examination and charts 7.3.3 Caused by corrosion (e.g., pitting)
2.4.1 Vision acuity tests 7.3.4 Caused by abrasive wear (e.g., erosion)
2.4.2 Color and gray shade differentiation 7.4 Inherent discontinuities
3.0 Elements of Lighting 8.0 Evaluation and Reporting

3.1 Fundamentals of light 8.1 General evaluation scheme (ASTM E1316)
3.2 Light sources 8.2 Evaluation criteria
3.2.1 Incandescent radiators 8.2.1 Verbal descriptions
3.2.2 Luminescent radiators (fluorescent light, high- 8.2.2 Comparison standards or catalogues (e.g.,
intensity discharge light, light-emitting diodes, photos/replica)
lasers) 8.2.3 Size-based criteria (measures)
3.3 Adequate light levels 8.2.4 Mixtures of the above
3.4 Glare and fatigue 8.3 Evaluation techniques
3.5 General lighting requirements 8.3.1 Visual-tactile recognition
8.3.2 Grading by comparison with a standard
4.0 Contrast and Resolution 8.3.4 Measurement
4.1 Reflection at smooth and rough/textured surfaces 8.4 Reporting and documentation
4.2 Law of illumination 8.4.1 Technique reports
4.3 Reflectivity and luminance 8.4.2 Data reports
4.4 Luminous contrast 8.4.3 Image reports (sketches, hard-copy photo, or
4.5 Influence of cleanliness on contrast digital photo)
4.6 Dark-field contrast 8.5 Completion of testing confirmed with a checklist
4.7 Colors and contribution of colors to contrast
4.8 Surface geometry and contrast 9.0 Codes, Standards, and Specifications
9.1 VT as an engineering task
5.0 Optics 9.2 VT as a technician task
5.1 Transmission of light through solid and liquid media 9.3 US standards (e.g., ASME BPVC, AWS D1.1)
5.2 Refraction of light 9.4 European standards (based on PED)
5.3 Refractive indexes of glasses 9.5 ISO standards
5.4 How prisms change the direction of light
5.5 How lenses focus and disperse light 10.0 Employer-specific Topics
5.6 Lens optics and lens trains 10.1 Applications and techniques
5.7 Fiber optics and fiber bundles 10.2 Specifications
5.8 Digitization and digital technology 10.3 Lighting techniques
10.4 Materials tested
6.0 VT Equipment 10.5 Special evaluation criteria
6.1 Generic tools such as magnifiers and mirrors 10.6 Safety rules
6.2 Rigid borescopes
6.3 Fiber borescopes 11.0 Glossary
6.4 Video borescopes
6.5 Video borescopes measurement techniques * Topics may be deleted if the VT is only required to perform direct visual
6.5.1 Comparison technique inspection.
6.5.2 Shadow technique
6.5.3 Stereo technique Visual Testing Level III Topical Outline
6.5.4 Laser-based measurements
6.6 Specialized inspection systems 1.0 Principles/Theory
6.6.1 Push-tube cameras 1.1 Vision and light
6.6.2 Pipe crawler camera systems 1.1.1 Physiology of sight
6.6.3 Subsea remote camera systems 1.1.2 Visual acuity
1.1.3 Visual angle and distance
7.0 Visual Appearance of Discontinuities 1.1.4 Color vision
7.1 Primary manufacturing discontinuities (e.g., castings) 1.1.5 Physics and measurement of light
7.2 Secondary manufacturing discontinuities (e.g., 1.2 Environmental factors
forgings) 1.2.1 Lighting
1.2.2 Cleanliness
104
Visual Testing Topical Outlines
1.2.3 Distance 3.4.4 Soldering

1.2.4 Air contamination 3.4.5 Bonding
1.3 Test object characteristics 3.5 Fabricated components
1.3.1 Texture 3.5.1 Pressure vessels
1.3.2 Color 3.5.2 Pumps
1.3.3 Cleanliness 3.5.3 Valves
1.3.4 Geometry 3.5.4 Fasteners
3.5.5 Piping systems
2.0 Equipment Accessories 3.6 In-service materials
2.1 Magnifiers 3.6.1 Wear
2.2 Mirrors 3.6.2 Corrosion/erosion
2.3 Dimensional 3.6.3 Microscopy
2.3.1 Linear measurement 3.7 Coatings
2.3.2 Micrometers/calipers 3.7.1 Paint
2.3.3 Optical comparators 3.7.2 Insulation
2.3.4 Dial indicators 3.7.3 Cathodic protection (conversion coatings)
2.3.5 Gauges 3.7.4 Anodizing
2.4 Borescopes 3.8 Other applications
2.4.1 Rigid 3.8.1 Ceramics
2.4.2 Fiber optic 3.8.2 Composites
2.4.3 Special purpose 3.8.3 Glasses
2.5 Video systems (robotics) 3.8.4 Plastics
2.5.1 Photoelectric devices 3.8.5 Bearings
2.5.2 Microscopy 3.9 Requirements
2.5.3 Video borescopes 3.9.1 Codes
2.5.4 Video imaging/resolution/image processing 3.9.2 Standards
(enhancement) 3.9.3 Specifications
2.5.5 Charge-coupled devices (CCDs) 3.9.4 Techniques (direct, indirect, video, etc.)
2.6 Automated systems 3.9.5 Personnel qualification and certification
2.6.1 Lighting techniques
2.6.2 Optical filtering 4.0 Interpretation/Evaluation
2.6.3 Image sensors 4.1 Equipment variables affecting test results including type
2.6.4 Signal processing and intensity of light
2.7 Video technologies 4.2 Material variables affecting test results including the
2.8 Machine vision variations of surface finish
2.9 Replication 4.3 Discontinuity variables affecting test results
2.10 Surface comparators 4.4 Determination of dimensions (e.g., depth, width, length,
2.11 Chemical aids etc.)
2.12 Photography 4.5 Sampling/scanning procedure variables affecting test
2.13 Eye results
4.6 Process for reporting visual discontinuities
3.0 Techniques/Standardization 4.7 Personnel (human factors) variables affecting test results
3.1 Diagrams and drawings 4.8 Detection
3.2 Raw materials 4.8.1 Interpretation
3.2.1 Ingots 4.8.2 Evaluation
3.2.2 Blooms/billets/slabs
3.3 Primary process materials 5.0 Procedures and Documentation
3.3.1 Plates/sheets 5.1 Hard copy – general applications
3.3.2 Forgings 5.1.1 Mineral-based materials
3.3.3 Castings 5.1.2 Organic-based materials
3.3.4 Bars 5.1.3 Composite materials
3.3.5 Tubing 5.1.4 Metallic materials
3.3.6 Extrusions 5.2 Photography – specific applications
3.3.7 Wire 5.2.1 Metal joining processes
3.4 Joining processes 5.2.2 Pressure vessels
3.4.1 Joint configuration 5.2.3 Pumps
3.4.2 Welding 5.2.4 Valves
3.4.3 Brazing 5.2.5 Bolting
105
5.2.6 Castings ASNT, 2010, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 9: Visual

5.2.7 Forgings Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive
5.2.8 Extrusions Testing Inc. Columbus, OH.*
5.2.9 Microcircuits
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Visual Testing
5.3 Audio/video – requirements
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
5.3.1 Codes (AWS, ASME, etc.)
Columbus, OH.*
5.3.2 Standards (ASTM, NAVSEA, MIL-STD, etc.)
5.3.3 Specifications ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Visual and
5.3.4 Procedures (Level III exam specific) Optical Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive
5.4 Electronic and magnetic media Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
5.5 Personnel qualification and certification
AWS, latest edition, Welding Handbook, Vol. 1, American
6.0 Safety and Health Welding Society, Miami, FL.
6.1 Electrical shock AWS, latest edition, Welding Inspection, American Welding
6.2 Mechanical hazards Society, Miami, FL.
6.3 Lighting hazards physiological deleterious effects of light
6.4 Chemicals contamination Cary, H.B., and S. Helzer, 2004, Modern Welding Technology,
6.5 Radioactive materials Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
6.6 Explosive environments
Henning, D., 2017, Visual Testing Classroom Training Book (PTP
Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Visual Testing, Level I, II, and III Training Columbus, OH.*
References
Starret, L.S., 1982, The Tools and Rules of Precision Measuring, L.S.
ASM, 1989, Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control: ASM
Starret Co., Athol, MA.
Handbook, Vol. 17, ASM International, Metals Park, OH.*
ASNT, 1993, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 8: Visual and

Optical Testing, second edition, American Society for Inc., Columbus, OH.
106
BASIC
Basic Examination Topical Outlines
Basic Examination Level III Topical 1.2.9 Records

Outline 1.2.10 Referenced publications
1.3 NDT Level III certification program
The Basic Examination will cover three main topical areas: 1.3.1 Scope
1.3.2 Definitions
1.0 Personnel Qualification and Certification Programs 1.3.3 Certification outcome
Covering Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A, 1.3.4 Eligibility for examination
ANSI/ASNT-CP-189, and the ASNT NDT Level III 1.3.5 Qualification examinations
Program 1.3.6 Examinations results
1.3.7 Certification
2.0 General Familiarity with Other NDT Methods, Covering 1.3.8 Validity
the 11 NDT Test Methods Listed in this Section, and; 1.3.9 Recertification
3.0 General Knowledge of Materials, Fabrication, and Product 2.0 General Familiarity with Other NDT Methods
Technology 2.1 Acoustic Emission Testing (AE)
The above topics are further subdivided into topical outlines 2.1.1 Fundamentals
below, followed by the reference materials used in the 2.1.1.1 Principles/theory of AE
development of these outlines and sample questions typical of 2.1.1.2 Sources of acoustic emissions
those in the examinations. 2.1.1.3 Equipment and material
2.1.2 Proper selection of acoustic emission technique
1.0 Personnel Qualification and Certification Programs 2.1.2.1 Instrumentation and signal processing
1.1 Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A 2.1.2.2 Cables (types)
1.1.1 Scope 2.1.2.3 Signal conditioning
1.1.2 Definitions 2.1.2.4 Signal detection
1.1.3 Nondestructive testing methods 2.1.2.5 Noise discrimination
1.1.4 Levels of qualification 2.1.2.6 Electronic technique
1.1.5 Written practice 2.1.2.7 Attenuation materials
1.1.6 Education, training, and experience for initial 2.1.2.8 Data filtering techniques
qualification 2.1.3 Interpretation and evaluation of test results
1.1.7 Training programs 2.2 Electromagnetic Testing (ET)
1.1.8 Examinations 2.2.1 Sensors
1.1.9 Certification 2.2.2 Basic types of equipment; types of readout
1.1.10 Technical performance evaluation 2.2.3 Reference standards
1.1.11 Interrupted service 2.2.4 Applications and test result interpretation
1.1.12 Recertification 2.2.4.1 Flaw detection
1.1.13 Termination 2.2.4.2 Conductivity and permeability sorting
1.1.14 Reinstatement 2.2.4.3 Thickness gauging
1.1.15 Referenced publications 2.2.4.4 Process control
1.2 ASNT Standard ANSI/ASNT-CP-189 2.3 Leak Testing (LT)
1.2.1 Scope 2.3.1 Fundamentals
1.2.2 Definitions 2.3.1.1 Bubble leak testing
1.2.3 Levels of qualification 2.3.1.2 Pressure leak testing
1.2.4 Qualification requirements 2.3.1.3 Halogen detector leak testing
1.2.5 Qualification and certification 2.3.1.4 Mass spectrometer leak testing
1.2.6 Examinations 2.3.2 LT procedures, and techniques
1.2.7 Expiration, suspension, revocation, and 2.3.2.1 System factors
reinstatement of employer certification 2.3.2.2 Relative sensitivity
1.2.8 Employer recertification 2.3.2.3 Evacuated systems
107
2.3.2.4 Pressurized systems; ambient fluids, 2.6.1.3 Nature of penetrating radiation and
tracer fluids interactions with matter
2.3.2.5 Locating leaks 2.6.1.4 Essentials of safety
2.3.2.6 Standardization 2.6.2 NR
2.3.3 Test result interpretation 2.6.2.1 Basic imaging considerations
2.3.4 Essentials of safety 2.6.2.2 Test result interpretation; discontinuity
2.3.5 Test equipment indications
2.3.6 Applications 2.6.2.3 Systems factors (source/test
2.3.6.1 Piping and pressure vessels object/detector interactions)
2.3.6.2 Evacuated systems 2.6.2.4 Applications
2.3.6.3 Low-pressure fluid containment vessels, 2.6.2.4.1 Explosives and pyrotechnic devices
pipes, and tubing 2.6.2.4.2 Assembled components
2.3.6.4 Hermetic seals 2.6.2.4.3 Bonded components
2.3.6.5 Electrical and electronic components 2.6.2.4.4 Corrosion detection
2.4 Liquid Penetrant Testing (PT) 2.6.2.4.5 Nonmetallic materials
2.4.1 Fundamentals 2.7 Radiographic Testing (RT)
2.4.1.1 Interaction of penetrants and 2.7.1 Fundamentals
discontinuity openings 2.7.1.1 Sources
2.4.1.2 Fluorescence and contrast 2.7.1.2 Detectors
2.4.2 PT 2.7.1.2.1 Imaging
2.4.2.1 Penetrant processes 2.7.1.2.2 Nonimaging
2.4.2.2 Test equipment and systems factors 2.7.1.3 Nature of penetrating radiation and
2.4.2.3 Test result interpretation; discontinuity interactions with matter
indications 2.7.1.4 Essentials of safety
2.4.2.4 Applications 2.7.2 RT
2.4.2.4.1 Castings 2.7.2.1 Basic imaging considerations
2.4.2.4.2 Welds 2.7.2.2 Test result interpretation; discontinuity
2.4.2.4.3 Wrought metals indications
2.4.2.4.4 Machined parts 2.7.2.3 Systems factors (source/test object/detector
2.4.2.4.5 Leaks interactions)
2.4.2.4.6 Field inspections 2.7.2.4 Applications
2.5 Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) 2.7.2.4.1 Castings
2.5.1 Fundamentals 2.7.2.4.2 Welds
2.5.1.1 Magnetic field principles 2.7.2.4.3 Assemblies
2.5.1.2 Magnetization by means of electric 2.7.2.4.4 Electronic components
current 2.7.2.4.5 Field inspections
2.5.1.3 Demagnetization 2.8 Thermal/Infrared Testing (IR)
2.5.2 MT 2.8.1 Fundamentals
2.5.2.1 Basic types of equipment and inspection 2.8.1.1 Principles and theory of IR
materials 2.8.1.2 Temperature measurement principles
2.5.2.2 Test results interpretation; discontinuity 2.8.1.3 Proper selection of IR technique
indications 2.8.2 Equipment/materials
2.5.2.3 Applications 2.8.2.1 Temperature measurement equipment
2.5.2.3.1 Welds 2.8.2.2 Heat flux indicators
2.5.2.3.2 Castings 2.8.2.3 Noncontact devices
2.5.2.3.3 Wrought metals 2.8.2.4 Contact temperature indicators
2.5.2.3.4 Machined parts 2.8.2.5 Noncontact pyrometers
2.5.2.3.5 Field applications 2.8.2.6 Line scanners
2.6 Neutron Radiographic Testing (NR) 2.8.2.7 Thermal imaging
2.6.1 Fundamentals 2.8.3 Applications
2.6.1.1 Sources 2.8.3.1 Exothermic or endothermic investigations
2.6.1.1.1 Isotopic 2.8.3.2 Friction investigations
2.6.1.1.2 Neutron 2.8.3.3 Fluid flow investigations
2.6.1.2 Detectors 2.8.3.4 Thermal resistance investigations
2.6.1.2.1 Imaging 2.8.3.5 Thermal capacitance investigations
2.6.1.2.2 Nonimaging 2.8.4 Interpretation and evaluation
108
Basic Examination Topical Outlines
2.9 Ultrasonic Testing (UT) 3.0 Basic Materials, Fabrication, and Product Technology
2.9.1 Fundamentals 3.1 Fundamentals of material technology
2.9.1.1 Wave propagation 3.1.1 Properties of materials
2.9.1.1.1 Sound fields 3.1.1.1 Strength and elastic properties
2.9.1.1.2 Wave travel modes 3.1.1.2 Physical properties
2.9.1.1.3 Refraction, reflection, scattering, 3.1.1.3 Material properties testing
and attenuation 3.1.2 Origin of discontinuities and failure modes
2.9.1.2 Transducers and sound beam coupling 3.1.2.1 Inherent discontinuities
2.9.2 UT 3.1.2.2 Process-induced discontinuities
2.9.2.1 Basic types of equipment 3.1.2.3 Service-induced discontinuities
2.9.2.2 Reference standards 3.1.2.4 Failures in metallic materials
2.9.2.3 Test result interpretation; discontinuity 3.1.2.5 Failures in nonmetallic materials
indications 3.1.3 Statistical nature of detecting and characterizing
2.9.2.4 System factors discontinuities
2.9.2.5 Applications 3.2 Fundamentals of fabrication and product technology
2.9.2.5.1 Flaw detection and evaluation 3.2.1 Raw materials processing
2.9.2.5.2 Thickness measurement 3.2.2 Metals processing
2.9.2.5.3 Bond evaluation 3.2.2.1 Primary metals
2.9.2.5.4 Process control 3.2.2.1.1 Metal ingot production
2.9.2.5.5 Castings 3.2.2.1.2 Wrought primary metals
2.9.2.5.6 Weldments 3.2.2.2 Castings
2.10 Visual Testing (VT) 3.2.2.2.1 Green sand molded
2.10.1 Fundamentals 3.2.2.2.2 Metal molded
2.10.1.1 Principles and theory of VT 3.2.2.2.3 Investment molded
2.10.1.2 Selection of correct visual technique 3.2.2.3 Welding
2.10.1.3 Equipment and materials 3.2.2.3.1 Common processes
2.10.2 Specific applications 3.2.2.3.2 Hard-surfacing
2.10.2.1 Metal joining processes 3.2.2.3.3 Solid-state
2.10.2.2 Pressure vessels 3.2.2.4 Brazing
2.10.2.3 Pumps 3.2.2.5 Soldering
2.10.2.4 Valves 3.2.2.6 Machining and material removal
2.10.2.5 Bolting 3.2.2.6.1 Turning, boring, and drilling
2.10.2.6 Castings 3.2.2.6.2 Milling
2.10.2.7 Forgings 3.2.2.6.3 Grinding
2.10.2.8 Extrusions 3.2.2.6.4 Electrochemical
2.10.2.9 Microcircuits 3.2.2.6.5 Chemical
2.10.3 Interpretation and evaluation 3.2.2.7 Forming
2.10.3.1 Codes and standards 3.2.2.7.1 Cold-working processes
2.10.3.2 Environmental factors 3.2.2.7.2 Hot-working processes
2.11 Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing (MFL) 3.2.2.8 Powdered metal processes
2.11.1 Fundamentals 3.2.2.9 Heat treatment
2.11.1.1 Magnetic field principles 3.2.2.10 Surface finishing and corrosion
2.11.1.2 Magnetization by means of electric current protection
2.11.1.3 Flux leakage 3.2.2.10.1 Shot peening and grit blasting
2.11.2 MFL 3.2.2.10.2 Painting
2.11.2.1 Basic types of equipment and inspection 3.2.2.10.3 Plating
materials 3.2.2.10.4 Chemical conversion coatings
2.11.2.2 Types of discontinuities found by MFL 3.2.2.11 Adhesive joining
2.11.2.3 Sensors used in MFL 3.2.3 Nonmetals and composite materials processing
2.11.3 Applications 3.2.3.1 Basic materials processing and process
2.11.3.1 Wire rope inspection control
2.11.3.2 Pipe body inspection 3.2.3.2 Nonmetals and composites fabrication
2.11.3.3 Tank floor/steel plate inspection 3.2.3.3 Adhesive joining
3.2.4 Dimensional metrology
3.2.4.1 Fundamental units and standards
3.2.4.2 Gauging
3.2.4.3 Interferometry
109
Basic Examination Training References Marks, P., 2015, Ultrasonic Testing, Classroom Training Book (PTP
Series), second edition, American Society for Nondestructive
Personnel Qualification and Certification
Programs Mix, P., 2005, Introduction to Nondestructive Testing: A Training
ASNT, 2016, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Basic, American Society Guide, second edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York.
for Nondestructive Testing Inc. Columbus, OH.*
Sadek, H., ASNT, 2018, Electromagnetic Testing Classroom
ASNT, latest edition, ANSI/ASNT CP-189: ASNT Standard for Training Book (PTP Series), second edition, American Society for
Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel, Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Smith, G., 2015, Magnetic Particle Testing Classroom Training
Columbus, OH.*
Book (PTP Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Harris, D.W., latest edition, A Guide to Personnel Qualification Inc., Columbus, OH.*
and Certification, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Staton, J., 2016, Radiographic Testing Classroom Training Book
(PTP Series), second edition, American Society for Nondestructive
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Recommended Practice No. Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
SNT-TC-1A: Personnel Qualification and Certification in
Nondestructive Testing, American Society for Nondestructive
Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.* Materials, Fabrication, and Product Technology
ASNT, 2016, Materials and Processes for NDT Technology, second
edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Common NDT Methods Columbus, OH.*
AWS, 2015, Welding Inspection Handbook, fourth edition,
Nondestructive Testing Overview, third edition, American Society
American Welding Society, Miami, FL.
for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
Taylor, J., ed., 1996, Basic Metallurgy for Nondestructive Testing,
Badger, D., 2005, Liquid Penetrant Testing Classroom Training
revised edition, W.H. Houldershaw Ltd, British Institute for Non-
Book (PTP Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Destructive Testing, Essex, England.*
Henning, D., 2017, Visual Testing Classroom Training Book (PTP

Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Inc., Columbus, OH.
Columbus, OH.*
110
PdM
Predictive Maintenance Topical Outlines
PdM Basic Examination Level III Topical 1.2.6 Examinations

Outline 1.2.7 Expiration, suspension, revocation, and
reinstatement of employer certification
The Basic Examination will cover three main topical areas. 1.2.8 Employer recertification
1.2.9 Records
1.0 Personnel qualification and certification programs 1.2.10 Referenced publications
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A, ANSI/ASNT 1.3 NDT Level III Certification Program
CP-189 and the ASNT NDT Level III Program 1.3.1 Scope
1.3.2 Definitions
2.0 General familiarity with PdM and reliability methods listed 1.3.3 Certification outcome
in this section 1.3.4 Eligibility for examination
1.3.5 Qualification examinations
3.0 Machinery technology, common problems, and corrective 1.3.6 Examinations results
actions 1.3.7 Certification
The above topics are further subdivided into topical outlines 1.3.8 Validity
below, followed by the reference materials used in the 1.3.9 Recertification
development of these outlines. 1.3.10 Applicant rights
1.3.11 Program changes
The PdM Basic Examination and one or more PdM method 1.3.12 Accommodation for disabilities
examination(s) (either thermal/infrared testing or vibration
analysis) must be taken and passed to qualify for an ASNT 2.0 General Familiarity with Other PdM and Reliability
PdM Level III certificate. The endorsements on the ASNT Methods
certificate will list the various methods the applicant passed. 2.1 Maintenance and reliability methods (e.g., CM, PM,
PdM, RCM, etc.)
1.0 Personnel Qualification and Certification Programs 2.1.1 Condition monitoring/predictive maintenance
1.1 Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A 2.1.2 Preventative maintenance
1.1.1 Scope 2.1.3 Reliability-centered maintenance
1.1.2 Definitions 2.1.4 Root cause failure analysis
1.1.3 Nondestructive testing methods 2.1.5 Proactive maintenance
1.1.4 Levels of qualification 2.2 Motor circuit evaluation/motor current analysis
1.1.5 Written practice 2.3 Oil/lubrication analysis
1.1.6 Education, training, and experience for initial 2.4 Thermal/infrared testing
qualification 2.4.1 Fundamentals
1.1.7 Training programs 2.4.1.1 Principles and theory of thermal/infrared
1.1.8 Examinations testing
1.1.9 Certification 2.4.1.2 Temperature measurement principles
1.1.10 Technical performance review 2.4.1.3 Proper selection of thermal/infrared
1.1.11 Interrupted service technique
1.1.12 Recertification 2.4.1.4 Equipment/materials
1.1.13 Termination 2.4.1.5 Temperature measurement equipment
1.1.14 Reinstatement 2.4.1.6 Heat flux indicators
1.1.15 Referenced publications 2.4.1.7 Noncontact devices
1.2 ASNT Standard ANSI/ASNT CP-189 2.4.2 Applications
1.2.1 Scope 2.4.2.1 Contact temperature indicators
1.2.2 Definitions 2.4.2.2 Noncontact pyrometers
1.2.3 Levels of qualification 2.4.2.3 Linescanners
1.2.4 Qualification requirements 2.4.2.4 Thermal imaging
1.2.5 Qualification and certification 2.4.2.5 Heat flux indicators
111
2.4.2.6 Exothermic or endothermic Basics of Common PdM Methods Training

investigations References
2.4.2.7 Friction investigations ASNT, 2012, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 10:
2.4.2.8 Fluid flow investigations Nondestructive Testing Overview, third edition “Chapter 12:
2.4.2.9 Thermal resistance investigations Vibration Analysis,” American Society for Nondestructive Testing
2.4.2.10 Thermal capacitance investigations Inc., Columbus, OH.*
2.4.3 Interpretation and evaluation
2.5 Ultrasonic/acoustic emission ASNT, 2016, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Basic, American Society
2.6 Vibration analysis for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
2.6.1 Fundamentals
2.6.1.1 Principles and theory of vibration analysis ASNT, latest edition, ANSI/ASNT CP-189: ASNT Standard for
2.6.1.2 Measurement principles Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel,
2.6.1.3 Signal processing American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus,
2.6.1.4 Equipment/materials OH.*
2.6.1.5 Data recorder ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Infrared and
2.6.1.6 Sensor Thermal Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
2.6.2 Considerations dependent on Inc. Columbus, OH.*
machine/component type
2.6.2.1 Fixed and multi-speed drive ASNT, latest edition, Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A:
2.6.2.2 Variable speed drive (electrical) Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing,
2.6.2.3 Variable speed (e.g., gas or steam turbine) American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., Columbus,
2.6.2.4 Reciprocating machinery OH.*
2.6.2.5 Gear type (e.g., spur, helical, worm,
epicyclic, etc.) Bannister, K., 1996, Lubrication for Industry, Industrial Press, New
2.6.2.6 Positive displacement York, NY.
2.6.2.7 High-speed (i.e., >4000 rpm) Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 1990, Machinery Failure and
2.6.2.8 Bearing type (i.e., fluid film) Troubleshooting, fourth Edition, Gulf Publishing Company,
2.6.3 Interpretation and evaluation Houston, TX.
3.0 Machinery Technology, Problems, and Corrective Actions Crawford, A., 1992, The Simplified Handbook of Vibration
3.1 Fundamentals of machinery technology Analysis, Volume I, Introduction to Vibration Analysis, CSI,
3.1.1 Engineering mechanics Knoxville, TN.
3.1.1.1 Machinery design
Fitch, F., and D. Troyer, 2010, Oil Analysis Basics, second edition,
3.1.1.2 Lubrication considerations
Noria Publishing, Tulsa, OK.
3.1.1.3 Electrical components
3.1.1.4 Mechanical components Harris, D., latest edition, A Guide to Personnel Qualification and
3.1.2 Failure modes Certification, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
3.1.2.1 Installation Columbus, OH.*
3.1.2.2 Preexisting component defect
3.1.2.3 Fatigue Moubray, J., 1997, RCM II Reliability-Centered Maintenance, sec-
3.1.2.4 Thermal ond edition, Gulf Publishing Co., Houston, TX.
3.1.2.5 Lubrication
Murphy, T., and A. Rienstra, 2010, Hear More – A Guide to Using
3.1.2.6 Loading
Ultrasound for Leak Detection and Condition Monitoring,
3.2 Common problems/corrective actions
Reliability Web, Ft. Meyers, FL.
3.2.1 Balance
3.2.2 Alignment NFPA, 2018, NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety on the
3.2.3 Structural/base Workplace, National Fire Protection Association.
3.2.4 Resonance
3.2.5 Lubrication NFPA, 2019, NFPA 70B Recommended Practice for Electrical
3.2.6 Bonding/grounding Equipment Maintenance, National Fire Protection Association.
3.2.7 Wiring, connections, and splices
Nicholas, J., 2006, Predictive Maintenance Management,
3.2.8 Process related
Maintenance Quality Systems LLC, Millersville, MD.
Nicholas, J., 2013, Motor Electrical Predictive Maintenance and

Testing, ninth edition, Reliability Web, Ft. Meyers, FL.
112
PdM Topical Outlines
Piersol, A., and T. Paez, 2009, Harris’ Shock and Vibration Fitch, F., and D. Troyer, 2010, Oil Analysis Basics, second edition,
Handbook, sixth edition, McGraw-Hill Inc. Noria Publishing, Tulsa, OK.
Ruddock, R., 2012, Basic Infrared Thermography Principles, Goldman, S., 1999, Vibration Spectrum Analysis, second edition,
Reliability Web, Ft. Meyers, FL. Industrial Press, New York.
Smith, R., 2008, Rules of Thumb for Maintenance and Reliability Logan Jr., E., and R. Roy, 2003, Handbook of Turbomachinery, sec-
Engineers, Elsevier Inc., Burlington, MA. ond edition, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, NY.
Taylor, J., 2003, The Vibration Analysis Handbook, Vibration Mobley, R., 2004, Maintenance Fundamentals, second edition,
Consultants, Tampa, FL. Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA.
Murphy, T., and A. Rienstra, 2010, Hear More – A Guide to Using

Machinery Technology, Problems, and Corrective Ultrasound for Leak Detection and Condition Monitoring,
Reliability Web, Ft. Meyers, FL.
Actions Training References
Bannister, K., 1996, Lubrication for Industry, Industrial Press, New Nicholas, J., 2014, Motor Electrical Predictive Maintenance and
York, NY. Testing, ninth edition, Reliability Web, Ft. Meyers, FL.
Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 1997, Practical Machinery Management Piersol, A., and T. Paez, 2009, Harris’ Shock and Vibration
for Process Plants, Vol. 4: Major Process Equipment Maintenance Handbook, sixth edition, McGraw-Hill Inc.
and Repair, second edition, Gulf Professional Publishing Co.
Ruddock, R., 2010, Basic Infrared Thermography Principles,
Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 2005, Practical Machinery Management Reliability Web, Ft. Meyers, FL.
for Process Plants, Vol. 3: Machinery Component Maintenance and
Repair, Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA. Schneider, H., 1991, Balancing Technology, Schenck Trebel
Corporation, Deer Park, New York.
Bloch, H., and F. Geitner, 2012, Practical Machinery Management
for Process Plants, Vol. 2: Machinery Failure Analysis and Smith, R., and R. Mobley, 2008, Rules of Thumb for Maintenance
Troubleshooting, fourth edition, Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA. and Reliability Engineers, Elsevier Inc., Burlington, MA.
Bloch, H., 1998, Practical Machinery Management for Process Taylor, J., 2003, The Vibration Analysis Handbook, Vibration
Plants, Vol. 1: Improving Machinery Reliability, third edition, Consultants, Tampa, FL.
Elsevier, Inc., Burlington, MA. Traister, J., 1992, Handbook of Electric Motors, Fairmont Press
Crawford, A., 1992, The Simplified Handbook of Vibration Inc., Lilburn, GA.
Analysis, Volume I, Introduction to Vibration Analysis, CSI,
Knoxville, TN. * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Inc., Columbus, OH.
Eisenmann Sr., R., and R. Eisenmann Jr., 1997, Machinery
Malfunction Diagnosis and Correction: Vibration Analysis and
Troubleshooting for Process Industries, Prentice Hall Printers,
Upper Saddle River, NJ.
113
114
APPENDIX A
Radiographic Safety
Appendix A: Radiographic Safety 2.0 Radiation Survey Instruments

Operations and Emergency Instructions 2.1 Types of radiation instruments
Course 2.1.1 Geiger-müller tube
2.1.2 Ionization chambers
Note: This outline provides radiation safety subject matter that 2.1.3 Scintillation chambers, counters
applies to multiple types of penetrating radiation. Instructors 2.2 Neutron radiation survey equipment
should consider the applicable type of radiation source and deliv- 2.3 Reading and interpreting meter indications
ery system to be covered and tailor their use of these subjects 2.4 Calibration frequency
accordingly. 2.5 Calibration expiration – action to be taken
2.6 Battery check – importance
1.0 Personnel Safety and Radiation Protection
1.1 Hazards of excessive exposure 3.0 Radiation-Area Surveys
1.1.1 General: alpha-, beta-, gamma-, neutron, and 3.1 Type and quantity of radiation
X-radiation 3.2 Establishment of restricted areas
1.1.1.1 Alpha particles 3.3 Posting and surveillance of restricted areas
1.1.1.2 Beta particles 3.3.1 Radiation areas
1.1.1.3 X-radiation 3.3.2 High-radiation areas
1.1.1.4 Gamma radiation 3.4 Use of time, distance, and shielding to reduce personnel
1.1.2 Specific neutron hazards radiation exposure
1.1.2.1 Relative biological effectiveness 3.5 Applicable regulatory requirements for surveys, posting,
1.1.2.2 Neutron activation control of radiation, and high-radiation areas
1.2 Methods of controlling radiation dose 3.6 Establishment of time limits
1.2.1 Time
1.2.2 Distance 4.0 Radiation Survey Reports
1.2.3 Shielding 4.1 Requirements for completion
1.2.3.1 Half-value layers 4.2 Description of report format
1.2.3.2 Tenth-value layers
1.2.4 Exposure shields and/or exposure rooms 5.0 Neutron Radiographic (NR) Work Practices
1.2.4.1 Operation 5.1 Radioactive contamination
1.2.4.2 Alarms 5.1.1 Clothing requirements
1.3 Personnel monitoring 5.1.2 Contamination control
1.3.1 Difference between dose and dose rate 5.1.3 Contamination cleanup
1.3.1.1 Coulomb per kilogram (C/kg) 5.2 Operation and emergency procedures
1.3.1.2 Gray (Gy) 5.3 Specific procedures
1.3.1.3 Sievert (Sv)
1.3.2 Wearing of monitoring badges 6.0* NR Explosive-Device Safety**
1.3.2.1 Pocket dosimeters 6.1 Static electricity
1.3.2.1.1 Neutron monitoring dosimeters 6.2 Grounding devices
1.3.2.1.2 Gamma- and X-ray dosimeters 6.3 Clothing requirements
1.3.2.2 Film badges 6.4 Handling and storage requirements and procedures
1.3.2.3 Thermoluminescent detectors (TLDs) 6.5 Shipping and receiving procedures
1.3.3 Reading of pocket dosimeters 6.6 State and federal explosive-licensing requirements
1.3.4 Recording of daily dosimeter readings
1.3.5 “Off-scale” dosimeter – required activity 7.0 Safety and Health
1.3.6 Permissible exposure limits 7.1 Radiation hazards
1.3.7 As low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) 7.1.1 Exposure hazards
concept 7.1.2 Methods of controlling radiation exposure
7.1.3 Operation and emergency procedures
115
8.0 Biological Effects of Radiation 12.7* Department of Transportation regulations for

8.1 “Natural” background radiation radiographic source shipment
8.2 Unit of radiation dose – sievert (Sv) 12.8 Regulatory requirements for X-ray machines (state
8.3 Difference between radiation and contamination and federal as applicable)
8.4 Radiation damage – repair concept
8.5 Symptoms of radiation injury * Topics may be deleted if the radiography is limited to X-ray exposure
devices.
8.6 Acute radiation exposure and somatic injury **Required only by those personnel who will be involved in neutron
8.7 Personnel monitoring for tracking exposure radiography of explosive devices.
8.8 Organ radiosensitivity
Radiographic Safety Operations Training
9.0 Exposure Devices
References
9.1 Daily inspection and maintenance
9.2* Radiation exposure limits for gamma-ray exposure ASNT, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 4: Radiographic
devices Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive
9.3 Labeling Testing Inc., Columbus, OH.*
9.4 Use
Bush, J., 2001, Gamma Radiation Safety Study Guide, second edi-
9.5 Use of collimators to reduce personnel exposure
tion. American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
9.6* Use of source changers for gamma-ray sources
Columbus, OH.*
10.0 Emergency Procedures Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Energy, Part 34, Licenses for
10.1* Vehicle accidents with radioactive sealed sources Industrial Radiography and Radiation Safety Requirements for
10.2* Fire involving sealed sources Industrial Radiographic Operations, Sub-Part 43, Training.
10.3* “Source out” – failure to return to safe shielded Available online at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-
conditions search.html#page1.
10.4* Emergency call list
McCain, D., 2009, ASNT Study Guide: Industrial Radiography
11.0 Storage and Shipment of Exposed Devices and Sources Radiation Safety, American Society for Nondestructive Testing
11.1* Vehicle storage Inc., Columbus, OH.*
11.2* Storage vault – permanent McGuire, S.A., and C.A. Peabody. 2004, Working Safely in
11.3* Shipping instructions – sources Radiography, American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
11.4* Receiving instructions – radioactive material Columbus, OH.*
12.0 State and Federal Regulations Staton, Jean, 2016, Radiographic Testing Classroom Training Book
12.1 Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) and (PTP Series), American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.,
Agreement States – authority Columbus, OH.*
12.2 License reciprocity
12.3* Radioactive materials license requirements for Suggested State Regulations for Control of Radiation (SSRCR),
industrial radiography 1999, Part E, Radiation Safety Requirements for Industrial
12.4 Occupational Safety and Health Administration Radiographic Operations, Sec. E.17, Training. Available online at
(OSHA) http://www.crcpd.org/SSRCRs/e-1999.PDF.
12.5 Qualification requirements for radiography personnel
12.6 Regulations for the control of radiation (state or NRC * Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing
as applicable) Inc., Columbus, OH.
116
ISBN: 978-1-57117-471-0
Catalog No.: 2823
The American Society for

Nondestructive Testing Inc.

CP 105 - Ed. 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP 105 - Ed. 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP 105 - Ed. 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSI/ASNT CP-105-2020

The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.

First printing 05/20

ISBN: 978-1-57117-471-0 (print)

Toni Kervina, Director of Publications

ASNT Mission Statement:

ASNT Code of Ethics:

American National Standard

The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.

Approved November 7, 2019

American National Standards Institute

This standard is subject to revision or withdrawal at any time by ASNT.

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD

(This foreword is not part of American National Standard CP-105-2020.)

Michael E. McDaniel, Chair

Methods Division Ground Penetrating Radar Leak Testing Committee

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Acoustic Emission Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Electromagnetic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Ground Penetrating Radar Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Guided Wave Testing Topical Outlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Laser Methods Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Leak Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Liquid Penetrant Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Magnetic Particle Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Microwave Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Neutron Radiographic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Radiographic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Radiographic Technique Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Thermal/Infrared Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Ultrasonic Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Vibration Analysis Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Visual Testing Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Basic Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Predictive Maintenance Topical Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Appendix A. Radiographic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

CP-105 2020 Edition

Basic Acoustic Emission Technique Course

Laser Methods Basic Operating Course — Measurement standardization

Holography/Shearography Level III Topical Outline — Measurement standardization

Ultrasonic Testing Topical Outlines

Visual Testing Level II Topical Outline

ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel

Acoustic Emission Testing Level I Topical 1.3 Signal detection

2.10 Reports 1.1.2.4 Factors that qualify/disqualify the use of

3.0 Techniques 4.2 Data evaluation

Alternating Current Field Measurement Technique Course

7.0 Signal Interpretation Eddy Current Testing Level I Topical

1.0 Software Commands 3.0 Lab Demonstration

1.1.5 Applications 2.2 Test system

Basic Technique Course 1.0 Review of Electromagnetic Theory

3.0 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 1.2.3 Chart recordings

Remote Field Testing Level II Topical 3.0 Applications

4.0 Inspection System Output 2.5 Instrument design considerations

1.4 Signal analysis Electromagnetic Testing Method, Level I,

Ground Penetrating Radar Level I Topical 3.1.3 Snell angle

Ground Penetrating Radar Level lI Topical 2.0 Systems Design

3.0 Factors Affecting Tests 3.0 Modeling

7.0 Signal processing 4.3 Polythermal glaciers